THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


LA' 


/*- 


7  2 


: 

V    tK»  fe«     '  '    •  • 


/     -f )  < 

/  fj 

I    -~-t,"--ft  / 


THE 


REPORTING  STYLE 


OF 


SHORT-HAND. 


A  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OF  AMERICAN  PHONOGRAPHY. 


TO  WHICH  18   ADDED 


A  SERIES  OF  LESSONS  ON   AMANUENSIS.    SPEECH,    LEGISLATIVE,  AND 
.LAW  REPORTING. 


BY   ELDON   MORAN, 


PRINCIPAL  INSTRUCTOR  STATE   UNIVERSITY   OF  IOWA   SCHOOL  OP  SHORT-HAND,  AXJt 
LATE   OFFICIAL   STENOGRAPHER  FOR  THE   COURTS   AT  INDIANAPOLIS,  IND. 


DESIGNED  FOR  USF  IN  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES,  AND    IN  CONNECTION 

WITH  THE  AUTHOR'S  I'ERFECTED  METHOD  OF 

POSTAL  INSTRUCTION. 


FIFTH  EDITION. 

ST.  LOUIS: 
CHRISTIAN  PUBLISHING  COMPANY. 

1887. 


COPYRIGHT,  1884, 
BY  ELDON   MORAN 


ALL  BIGHTS  RESERVED. 


PREFACE. 


To  impart  practical  instruction   in  the  Reporting  Style  of  the 

American  Pitman  Phonography,  the  system  now  employed  by  most 

professional  reporters,  is  the  aim  of  this  work.    The  Corresponding 

Style,  which  cannot  be  made  a  substitute  for  long-hand,  and  serves 

no  end  not  better  met  by  the  briefer  method,  is  for  these  reasons 

discarded.     Heretofore  the  only  accessible  way  to  the  Reporting 

HP    Style  has  been  through  the   Corresponding,  a  circuitous  route, 

LU    requiring  much  needless  time  and  labor.    This  treatise  is  designed 

>_     as  a  school  and  college  text-book,  and   is  well  adapted  to  self- 

«c     instruction.     It  is  also  the  basis  of  the  Author's  mode  of  teaching 

by  mail,  known  as  the  Perfected  Method  of  Postal  Stenography. 

The  best  results  of  his  twelve  years  experience  as  verbatim  reporter 

and  teacher  are  embraced  herein.    Printed  in  separate  sheets,  these 

!*     lessons  have  been  used  for  the  past  three  years  in  giving  instruction 

**     to  large  classes  in  the  State  University  of  Iowa  School  of  Short- 

^     Hand.    The  advantages  of  omitting  the  Corresponding  Style,  and 

requiring  speed  in  writing  from  the  first,  have  been  fully  demon- 

^.    strated  in  this  Institution,  students  in  some  instances  having  taken 

h    secretaryships    in   eleven   weeks  from    the   date   of    entry.      The 

t_    names  of  a  few  of  the   stenographers   who  became   qualified  in 

this   way  will  be  found  at  the  close  of  the  book. 

An  important  feature  is  the  series  of  lessons  on  professional  report- 
ing, nothing  similar  to  which  is  to  be  found  in  any  other  instruction 
book  whatever.  These  explain  the  forms  and  methods  made  use 

of  in  amanuensis,  convention,  legislative,  and  law  reporting,  with- 

(iii) 


iV  PKKKACK. 

out  a  knowledge  of  which  the  art  is  quite  unavailable  as  a  business. 
A  vocabulary  of  all  the  word  and  phrase  signs  in  common  use  is 
appended.  Those  who  have  not  the  assistance  of  a  teacher,  and  are 
desirous  of  progressing  rapidly,  will  be  enabled  to  do  so  by  pro- 
curing instruction  by  mail.  The  first  lessons  are  furnished 
gratuitously  to  those  wishing  to  test  the  efficiency  of  this  method. 

To  all  those  young  men  and  women  who  have  the  courage  to 
undertake,  and  perseverance  to  master  this  truly  beautiful  art,  the 
present  work  is  inscribed  with  the  sincere  wish  that  it  may  render 
them  genuine  service. 

Finally,  to  his  kind  assistants,  by  whose  careful  labors  he  has 
profited  much,  are  tendered  the  grateful  acknowledgments  of 

THE    AUTHOR. 

Stenographic  Supply  Agency,     \ 
Iowa  City,  Ja.,  September,  1881. ) 


NOTE  TO  THE  FOURTH  EDITION. 

A  number  of  brief  paragraphs,  containing  practical  hints  and  direc- 
tions, are  added  to  several  of  the  lessons  lu  this  edition.  The  portions 
quoted  are  taken  from  a  recent  work,  entitled,  "  One  Hundred  Valuable 
Suggestions  to  Short-hand  Students,"  by  Selby  A.  Moran,  of  the  Steno- 
graphic Institute,  Michigan  University.  E.  M. 

August,  1W6. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION 

I.  CONSONANT  ALPHABET — IST  SEC. 
II.      "        "     2ND  SEC.  . 

III.  WORD-SIGNS 

IV.  RAY,  AND  PHRASEOGRAPHY 

V.    LONG  VOWELS     ...... 

VI.    DIPHTHONGS  AND  THE  S-CIRCLE 

VII.    SHORT  VOWELS 

VIII.    CONSONANT  POSITION          .... 
IX.    S-CIRCLE  JUNCTIONS  .... 

X.    PHRASEOGRAPHY 

XI.    SEZ-CIRCLE,  EMP,  AND  COALESCENTS 
XII.    DOUBLE  CONSONANTS — THE  L-HooK 
•   XIII.    THE  R-HOOK  SERIES— IST  SEC. 
XIV.        "          "  "         2ND  SEC. 

XV.    TRIPLE  CONSONANTS  ; 

XVI.     THE  REL-HOOK,  AND  THE  ASPIRATE  TICK 

DOT 

XVII.    THE  W-HOOK       .  ... 

XVIII.     THE  F-HOOK 

XIX.    THE  N-HooK  SERIES — IST  SEC. 
XX.        "          "  "        2ND  SEC. 

XXI.    THE  SHUN-HOOK 

XXII.    THE  S-SnuN  AND  INITIAL  N  HOOKS     . 

XXIII.    THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS 

(5) 


69 
71 
74 

77 
79 
82 
85 


CONTENTS. 


LESSON. 

XXIV.    TH**:  LENGTHENED  CURVE 
XXV.    THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE 
XXVI.       "  "  " 

XXVII.        "  "  " 

CONSONANTS 


91 
93 

ADDED  D    .  96 

SHORTENED    DOUBLE 

100 


XXVIII.    THE    HALVING  PRINCIPLE — SHORTENED  FINAL- 
HOOK  CONSONANTS  .        .        .          103 
XXIX.    THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE — SHORTENED  LIQUIDS  107 


XXX.  INTERVOCALIZATION       . 

XXXI.  PREFIXES 

XXXII.  AFFIXES 

XXXIII.  EXPEDIENTS  AND  PUNCTUATION 

XXXIV.  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 

XXXV.  PROPER  NAMES 

XXXVI.  SPECIAL  RULES 

XXXVII.  AMANUENSIS  REPORTING 
XXXVIII.  "  "  CONTINUED 

XXXIX.  SPEECH  REPORTING       . 

XL.  CONVENTION  REPORTING 


110 
113 
117 
119 
122 
125 
127 
130 
134 
139 
143 


XLI.     LAW  REPORTING— CAPTION,  QUESTION  AND  AN-. 

SWER 148 

XLII.     LAW    REPORTING — OBJECTIONS,    RULINGS,     AND 


EXCEPTIONS         . 

XLIII.    LAW  REPORTING — EXHIBITS  AND  INDICES    . 
XLIV.        "  "  TRANSCRIPTS 

XLV.        "  "  PROFESSIONAL  CONDUCT 

SUGGESTIONS  „ 

VOCABULARY  .  

VERBATIM  REPORTING  SPEED  , 

NOTE  TO  THE  THIRD  EDITION 


INTRODUCTION. 


This  Science  is  still  much  younger  than  many  of  its  practitioners. 
The  advancement  made  in  a  few  decades  is  truly  astonishing.  But 
years  of  experiment  and  elabora'tion  are  still  needed  to  thoroughly 
unify  and  complete  the  system.  The  physician's  art,  old  as  the 
race,  continues  to  be  enriched  by  discoveries,  and  the  methods  of 
instruction  in  its  principles  improved  by  the  enlargement  of  hos- 
pitals, the  increase  of  clinical  facilities,  and  the  publication  of  better 
illustrated  and  more  methodic  text  books.  But  scientific  short- 
hand is  only  in  its  infancy,  and  it  would  be  sheer  folly  to  disregard 
the  suggestions  of  the  ingenious  minds  assidiously  at  work  in  every 
corner  of  this  field.  The  standard  systems,  so  called,  which  admit 
of  no  modification,  are  fast  falling  into  disuse.  The  notion  given 
out  by  some,  that  further  improvement  is  impossible  or  useless,  is 
absurd.  Development  gradually  goes  on,  and  the  method  of  teach- 
ing has  been  so  far  perfected  that  the  skill  which  once  demanded 
two  years  to  gain,  may  now  be  acquired  in  four  months. 

The  method  of  instruction  hen;  employed  is  practical  and  pro- 
gressive. The  principles  of  the  system  are  taken  up  and  explained 
in  logical  order,  and  tiie  student  directed  how  to  apply  them  cor- 
rectly in  the  work  of  forming  the  characters  rapidly  and  artistically. 
Two  or  three  new  principles  only  are  introduced  in  a  single  lesson, 
and  a  list  of  words  inserted  which  are  to  be  written  in  accordance 
therewith.  The  words  ciioscn  for  this  purpose  are  those  in  common 
use.  The  drill  which  enables  the  student  to  write  and  read 
them  with  the  required  speed,  fixes  the  characters  firmly  in  his 
memory.  This  makes  an  extended  vocabulary  unnecessary,  since  an 
outline,  once  well  learned,  will  be  remembered.  No  word  or  phrase 
is  introduced  which  the  learner  has  not  been  fully  directed  how  to 
write  in  the  proper  manner.  It  is  a  loss  instead  of  gain  to  practice 
writing  words  not  found  in  the  regular  lists,  since  in  most  cases 


Vili  INTRODUCTION. 

the  outlines  will  necessarily  be  formed  incorrectly.  The 
vantage.of  attempting  words  too  soon  may  be  illustrated  by  an  en- 
graving of  the  characters  produced  by  successive  trial  to  write  Sep- 
tember : 


When  two  lessons  only  are  learned,  the  first  character  will  be 
produced;  when  six  lessons  are  learned,  the  second  character; 
eleven  lessons,  the  third;  thirteen  lessons,  the  fourth;  twenty-four 
lessons,  the  fifth;  and  twenty-five  lessons,  the  sixth.  The  last  only 
is  correct.  The  practice  of  representing  this  word  by  five  different 
and  erroneous  outlines,  makes  it  the  more  difficult  afterwards  to 
impress  the  right  one  upon  the  mind;  and  when  the  word  is  to  be 
written,  the  reporter  is  confused  and  bewildered  by  the  jumble  of 
forms  his  recollection  calls  up.  It  has  been  the  aim  in  preparing 
this  work  to  entire]}'  do  away  all  cause  for  the  criticism  justly  pass- 
ed on  other  instruction  books,  that  words  and  phrases  were  intro- 
duced merely  for  the  student's  practice,  and  written  in  a  dozen 
erroneous  ways  before  the  proper  outlines  were  taught. 

The  Reporting  Fi<:ld.  Although  this  art  was  originally  devised 
as  a  means  of  preserving,  word  for  word,  the  speeches  of  great 
orators,  and  the  proceedings  of  legislatures  and  courts,  it  has  been 
found  far  more  valuable  as  a  means  of  expediting  commercial 
transactions.  While  the  services  of  an  expert  reporter  are  always 
in  demand,  there  are  at  present  more  frequent  calls  for  secretaries 
who  are  able  to  write  with  a  moderate  degree  of  speed  only.  The 
verbatim  stenographer  inu-t  be  able  to  write  one  hundred  and  sev- 
enty-live to  two  hundred  words  a  minute,  and  it  is  his  business  to 
report  speeches,  ami  record  the  proceedings  of  courts  and  the 
various  kinds  of  public  assemblies.  His  annual  income  ranges 
from  one  to  four  thousand  dollars.  Short-hand  secretaries  are  em- 
ploved  by  all  kinds  of  business  houses,  companies,  and  corporations; 
also,  by  authors,  ministers,  lawyers,  and  professional  men  gener- 
ally. Amanuenses  must  be  able  to  write  one  hundred  to  one  hun- 
dred and  tifty  word>  a  minute ;  and  they  receive  as  compensation 


INTRODUCTION.  Ix 

from  sixty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars  a  month.  Ladies  are 
frequently  employed  in  this  capacity.  There  is  a  large  and  ever 
increasing  demand  for  skilled  short-hand  writers.  They  succeed 
best  who  are  gifted  with  mental  quickness,  and  who  have  good 
memories,  the  kind  especially  which  enables  them  to  recognize  old 
faces.  These  faculties,  with  perseverance,  will  enable  any  intelli- 
gent young  person  to  acquire  skill  enough  in  a  few  months  for 
amanuensis  work. 

Experience  shows  that  this  art  can  be  successfully  learned  by 
both  old  and  young.  Those  receiving  instruction  at  the  University 
School  of  Short-hand  range  in  age  from  twelve  to  fifty. 

Students  who  wish  to  perfect  themselves  in  the  shortest  time 
possible,  may  do  so  by  applying  to  the  author,  who  will  furnish 
personal  instruction  by  mail,  and  assist  them,  when  competent,  in 
obtaining  situations. 

Short-hand  is  not  only  valuable  as  a  profession;  it  is  equally  use- 
ful as  an  accomplishment.  No  thinking  man  can  afford  to  be  with- 
out this  rapid  method  of  transferring  his  thoughts  to  paper.  By 
means  of  it,  first  draughts  of  letters  and  articles  are  made,  and 
notes  of  lectures,  business  transactions,  and  private  memoranda 
recorded,  much  more  fully  and  in  but  a  fraction  of  the  time  other- 
wise required.  Its  great  utility,  both  as  a  discipline  and  personal 
convenience,  is  abundantly  attested  by  literary  men  of  note  who  are 
skilled  in  its  use. 

The  learner  must  bear  in  mind  at  the  outset,  that  short-hand  is 
something  practical,  and  that  no  matter  how  carefully  the  theory  is 
studied,  he  will  gain  but  little  proficiency  if  he  does  not  at  the 
same  time  learn  to  form  the  characters  quickly  and  well,  and  read 
his  note**  fluently.  The  common  method  of  learning  all  the  princi- 
ples before  any  effort  is  made  at  rapid  writing,  is  but  a  waste  of 
time.  It  is  more  difficult  to  execute  than  to  memorize  the  charac- 
ters; hence,  directions  as  to  the  work  of  getting  up  speed  are  given 
enrh'  in  the  course.  Those  who  intend  making  this  art  a  business, 
should  practice  upon  each  exercise  until  it  can  be  written  in  the 
tinu'  specified.  The  skill  gained  in  this  way  will  be  suffi- 
cient for  ordinary  amanuensis  work.  Some  will  rise  above,  and 
others,  especially  if  under  sixteen,  will  necessarily  fall  below  the 
speed  here  indicated. 


X  INTRODUCTION.  0 

Reading  Practice.  The  amount  of  this  that  may  be  necessary  win 
depend  on  yourself.  If  you  read  your  own  writing  with  difficulty, 
you  should  practice  only  so  much  the  more.  Those  who  emploj 
their  time  mainly  in  writing,  with  a  view  of  gaining  speed,  produc- 
ing inaccurate  and  misshapen  characters  which  they  rarely  attempt 
to  read,  may  rest  assured  that  they  are  making  progress  backward 
instead  of  forward.  When  all  the  list  words  of  a  single  lesson  have 
been  carefully  written,  they  should  then  be  read  over  and  over 
again,  until  the  whole  can  be  rendered  in  the  time  indicated  by  the 
following  table : 


LESSON   I.—  1m. 

LESSON  XII.—  4Km. 

LESSON 

XXIII.—  2m. 

II.—  1m. 

XIII.—  5m. 

" 

XXIV.—  1m. 

"         III.—  3m. 

"         XIV.—  2Km. 

" 

XXV.—  4m. 

IV.—  2m. 

"          XV.—  IKm. 

" 

XXVI.—  5m. 

V.—  5m. 

XVI.—  2m. 

" 

XXVII.—  3m. 

"    |     VI.  —  (jm. 

"         XVII.—  Km. 

•• 

XXVIII.—  4K 

VII.—  4m. 

XVIII.—  %m. 

" 

XXIX.—  Km. 

"          VIII.—  3m. 

"         XIX.—  3m. 

" 

XXX.—  4m. 

IX.—  3m. 

41          XX.  —  3!^m. 

" 

XXXI.—  5m. 

•'          X.—  2m. 

"          XXI.—  4m. 

» 

XXXII.—  Km. 

"         XI.—  2Km. 

XXII.—  IKm. 

LONG  AND  SHORT  HAND  COMPARED. 

One  is  written  six  times  faster  than  the  other;  and  there  are  six 
general  principles  by  which  the  common  method  of  writing  is 
abbreviated,  six  steps,  so  to  speak,  in  the  ladder  leading  from  the 
long  up  to  the  short-hand  system. 

I.  .4  li'tdT  for  a  sound.     In  di.nujh  but  two  sounds  are  heard,  those 
of   d  and  <>;  nevertheless  live  letters,  d-o-u-g-h,  are  employed  to 
express  them.     In  short-hand  but  two  letters  are  required,  one  for 

each  sound,  thus  |-  dnurjli. 

II.  -1  xini/li'  xtrokr.  for  a  letter.    The  long-hand     e/  is   written 
with  five  strokes  of  the  pen,  while  the  short-hand  |  d  requires  but 
one;  the  long-hand   ^  requires  four  strokes,  the  short-hand  -  o 
but  one. 


INTRODUCTION.  Xl 

III.  Omission  of  vowels.  In  short-hand,  much  less  than  one 
per  cent,  of  the  vowels  are  actually  written,  but  a  number  sufficient 
to  secure  legibility  are  indicated  by  the  manner  of  writing  the  con- 
sonant signs.  The  consonant  elements  of  a  word  maybe  expressed 
by  several  different  outlines,  the  particular  one  selected  being  de- 
termined by  the  number  of  vowels  contained,  and  the  order  in  which 
they  occur.  Hence,  in  reading  short-hand,  it  becomes  an  easy 
matter  to  supply  those  vowels  upon  which  the  choice  of  the  char- 
acters made  use  of  directly  depended.  Each  of  the  following  char- 
acters, for  example,  express  the  consonants  s-p-r-t,  being  the  same 
which  occur  in  the  corresponding  words : 

Sprite,        spirit,    •        sprout,  sprat,  sport,        separate, 


V 

...VL    ..;  J>  i.. 

support, 

) 

Sparta,            aspirate,            asperity,        sea-port. 

In  sprite,  sprout,  sport,  and  Sparta,  the  vowels  are  written.  Spirit 
and  sprat,  although  written  alike,  are  distinguished  by  the  positions 
which  they  occupy  with  reference  to  the  base  line.  The  characters 
for  the  remaining  words  all  differ  from  each  other,  the  particular 
outline  chosen  in  each  case  indicating  the  number  and  position  of 
vowels  to  be  supplied.  Thus  each  character  is  rendered  legible, 
although  the  consonants  only  are  actually  written.  This  principle 
may  be  illustrated  in  part  by  omitting  the  vowels  from  a  printed 
sentence,  which  Mill  nevertheless  be  found  easily  decipherable: 
G-d  s--d  1-t  th-r-  b-  1-ght,  -nd  th-r-  w-s  1-ght. 

IV.  Tli'  use  <>f  lirii'f  v:nrd  signs.  A  large  number  of  abbrevia- 
tions are  vised  in  long-hand,  as  Dec.,  U>.,  $,  Dr.,  U.  S.,  Hon.,  etc. 
Likewise  in  short-hand,  brief  characters,  called  word-signs,  are  em- 
ployed; e.  g.  which  is  siLrni1i<id  by  the  sign  for  ,  ch  simply,  think 
by  the  sign  for  {  th,  etc.  These  short-hand  signs  are  provided  for 
the  most  frequently  recurring  words  only,  as  ^_  have.,  |  before, 
(^  Will,  ^-^  thing,  h«x,  and  3  what,  which  is  not  true  of  long- 
hand abbreviations. 


Xli  INTRODUCTION. 

V.  Phraseography,  or  joining  words  together.  In  long-hand,  the 
pen  is  lifted  from  the  paper  upon  the  completion  of  each  word.  In 
short-hand,  from  three  to  ten  words  are  written  before  this  is  nec- 
essary; e.  g.: 

It-is-better        to-have-a      lion         at-the-head    of-an-army    of  sheep 


•{• 


•(,-•••  .........  H  ...... 

than-:t      sheep         at-the-head          of-an-army  of-lions 

VI.  The  use  of  expedients.  The  most  frequently  recurring 
phrases  are  represented  by  brief  signs  which  express  two  or  more 
of  the  principal  words  of  each,  thus: 


In-order-to,  haiul-in-luuul,  on-tlie-other-liand,  from-tlme-to-tlmc,  day-after-day. 

G  EN  E  K  A  L  1 )  I KECTIONS . 

1.  Hold  your  pen  in  a  position  very  nearly  upright. 

2.  Always  write-  on  ruled  paper. 

8.  Use  a  short-nibbed  pen  with  moderately  sharp  point.  Gillott, 
Nos.  30;i  and  4>i4  the  E-terbrook  school  pen,  and  some  JS'os.  of  the 
Spenceriau,  are  recommended.  The  pen  with  which  you  can  pro- 
duce the  most  satisfactory  work  is  the  one  best  suited  to  your  hand 
and  style  of  writing.  .Jet  black,  ca.-ily  flowing  ink  should  be  used, 
and  the  bottle  ki  pi  corked.  Carter'--  koal  black  ink  is  recommended. 

4.  Read  over  at.  lea^t  once  everything  you  write. 

5.  bo  not  aiio\v  a  day  to  pass  without  devoting  some  time  to 
practice,  if  only  a  lew  minutes. 

(I.  Rigidly  abstain  from  practicing  on  words  and  sentences  not 
found  in  the  le<>'ins  which  have  been  learned. 

7.  Ii  is  very  important  that  you  write  the  exercises  as  they  are 
distinct Iv  read  to  you.  A  fellow  student,  who  has  an  interest  in  the 
work  himsi-lf,will  generally  prove  most  serviceable  for  this  purpose. 
The  habit  of  \\riting  by  sound,  that  is,  recording  words  that  are 


INTRODUCTION.  XU1 

heard  rather  than  merely  seen,  is  simply  indispensable  to  the  student 
who  intends  using  short-hand  for  reporting  purposes. 

8.  About  one-third  of  the  time  set  apart  for  reading  should  be 
spent  in  translating  exercises  written  one  or  two  weeks  previously. 

9.  In  writing  an  exercise  for  the  first  time  you  should  form  the 
characters  slowly.     When  you  have  executed  the  whole  in  a  proper 
manner,  copy  it  over  and  over  again  until  you  can  write  it  at  the 
specified  rate  of  speed. 

10.  The  learner  cannot  become  too  familiar  with  the  manner  of 
writing  the  words  given  in  these  lists,  as  they  are  always  expressed 
by  the  same  characters  which  here  denote  them.    The  word  and 
phrase  signs  given  in  the  vocabulary  should  be  thoroughly  learned. 

11.  The  student  should  give  especial  attention  to  phraseography, 
as  this  important  part  of  the  system  is  often  neglected. 

12.  Beginners  commonly  write  the  characters  too  large.     The 
standard,  one-sixth  of  an  inch,  should  be  as  closely  adhered  to  as 
possible.     This  size  of  writing  can  best  be  secured  by  making  use 
of  stenographic  practice  books  such  as  are  supplied  by  the  Report- 
ers' Bureau. 

13.  When  practicing,  the  note-book  or  paper  should  be  held  firm 
by  placing  the  thumb  and  first  fingers  of  the  left  hand  one  or  two 
inches  above  the  line  of  writing. 

14.  After  thirty-six  lessons  are  learned  the   student's  practice 
need  not  be  limited  to  the  exercises  here  given,  but  easy  news- 
paper articles,  the  prose  part  of  school  readers,  printed  collections 
of  business  letters,  and  published  reports  of  law  and  convention 
proceedings,  may  be  profitably  used  for  this  purpose.     Great  care 
should  be  taken  to  write  each  article  properly  the  first  time,  and  to 
rewrite  it  afterwards  not  less  than  three  or  four  times  with  gradu- 
ally increased  speed. 

15.  Carry  a  list  of  word  and  phrase  signs,  and  a  copy  of  your 
last  written  exercise,  in  your  pocket,  to  read  over  and  memorize  at 
leisure  moments. 

1G.  In  making  memoranda,  or  in  corresponding  with  those  who 
understand  them,  you  should  employ  the  short-hand  characters  as 
fast  as  learned. 

17.     You  will  find  the  study  more  interesting,  and  progress  faster, 


XiV  INTRODUCTION. 

by  having  a  fellow  student  with  whom  to  meet  at  stated  times  for 
practice. 

18.  Not  only  can  a  more  lively  interest  in  the  work  be  kept  up, 
but  real  advantage  is  gained,  by  students  corresponding  with  each 
other  in  the  stenographic  characters.  The  author,  when  applied 
to,  will  be  pleased  to  introduce  those  wishing  to  enter  into  such  an 
arrangement 


DEFINITION  OF  TERMS. 

Stenography. — A  system  of  rapid  writing;  Short-hand. 

Phonography. — Sound-writing;  a  phonetic  system  of  Short-hand. 

Word-Sign. — An  abbreviated  outline  in  which  some  of  the  consonants 
are  omitted. 

Sign-Word. — A  word  which  is  provided  with  a  sign,  or  abbreviated  out- 
line. 

Phraseograph. — A  character  expressing  more  words  than  one,  formed  by 
writing  a  number  of  words  without  lifting  the  pen. 

Phrase-Sign. — An  abbreviated  phraseograph. 

Phraseogram. — An  assemblage  of  words  which  are  expressed  by  a  phrase- 
sign. 

Consonant  Stem.— Any  letter  of  the  consonant  alphabet,  whether  stan- 
dard length,  shortened  or  lengthened. 

Adjunctive  Sign. — Any  character  or  expedient,  other  than  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  which  is  employed  to  express  a  consonant  sound;  e.  g.,  the 
s-circle,  n-hook,  st-loop,  emp,  etc. 

Verbatim, — Word  for  word. 

Notes.—  Matter  written  in  Short-hand;  Stenographic  manuscript. 

List-  Words. — Series  of  words  to  be  written  according  to  the  rules  which 
just  precede  them.  The  list-words  of  some  lessons  are  distributed  into 
several  paragraphs;  e.  ,<;.,  see  lesson  XI,  sections  164,  166,  169,  and  171. 

Speed  Sentence. — The  sentence  which  is  to  be  written  a  given  number  of 
times  in  so  many  minutes;  e.  g.,  see  sec.  270. 

NOTE. — The  attention  of  the  student  is  called  to  the  explanation  of  our 
method  of  giving  lessons  by  mail  and  of  Instructing  correspondence 
classes,  found  at  the  close  of  the  book. 


THE  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON     I. 


!• 


CONSONANT  ALPHABET,  SEC.  x. 

1.  pe    \    pit,  lip. 

2.  be    \    boat,  tub. 


3.  te 

4.  de 


top,   mat. 
do,  sad. 


6.    chaj    f     choice,  each. 
*•    Jay      /      joy,  gem,   edge. 


7.  kay 

8.  gay 


kite,  lack. 
go,  log. 


2.  Each  of  the  short-hand  letters  here  given  represents  an  ele- 
mentary consonant  sound,  and  has  a  force  equivalent  to  the  full- 
faced  type  in  the  corresponding  words.    Each  is  to  be  used  when- 
ever,  and  only  when,  its  particular  sound  is  heard.    The  character 

\  pe,  for  example,  signifies  the  breath  sound  of  p  in  pie  or  ape, 
and  is  employed  only  when  this  occurs.  It  will  be  observed,  how- 
ever, that  this  sound  does  not  recur  as  frequently  as  the  common  or 
long-hand  p.  In  sophist,  for  example,  this  element  is  not  found, 
the  long-hand  p  being  taken  with  h  to  represent  the  force  of  /.  In 
copper,  this  sound  occurs  but  once,  the  first  p  being  used  merely  to 
indicate  that  o  is  short. 

3.  In  sound-writing,  only  as  many  letters  are  employed  as  there 
are  distinct  sounds  heard;  thus  fo,  foe,  na,  nay;  lo,  low;  felo,  fel- 
low; do,  dough;  fabl,  fable;  fonograf,  phonograph;  mikst,  mixed; 
kwil,  quill;  hwen,  when.    There  are  no  silent  letters,  as  b  in  lamb; 
no  unnecessary  letters,  as  x  and  c,  which  could  be  dispensed  with, 
x  having  the  force  as  ks,  as  in  tax,  or  of  gz,  as  in  example,  and  c 
that  commonly  of  either  s,  as  in  face,  or  k,  as  in  come ;  sometimes 

(15) 


16  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT  -HAND. 

of  sh,  as  in  vicious.  Hence  the  usual  manner  of  spelling  a  word  has 
nothing  whatever  to  do  in  determining  the  way  in  which  it  is  written 
in  short-hand. 

4.  The  characters  which  express  the  consonant  sounds  of  a 
word,  when  written  in  the  order  in  which  they  occur,  are  called  its 
consonant  delineation.    For  example,  for  take,  te-kay  is  the  delinea- 
tion; for  jug,  jay-gay;  for  keg,  kay-gay;  etc. 

5.  These,  when  joined  or  written  together,  are  called  a  conso- 
nant outline,  as  in  betake,  or  digit.    This  should  be  executed  with- 
out lif.ing  the  pen  from  the  paper,  each  successive  letter  being 
written  in  its  proper  direction,  beginning  where  the  preceding  ends, 
thus, 

Book      deck      copy        betake          dig:t        cook 

\^     L     77^    \ 


jug   cage   check   dod^e   jacket   judge 

6.  The  rule  for  placing  outlines  is  that  the  jl-'xt  descending  letter 
should  rest  on  the  line.  This  requires  that  some  letters  be  written 
one  space  above,  as  —  kay  in  copy,  which  is  necessary  in  this  case,  in 
order  that  \  pe,  the  first  downward  letter,  may  rest  upon  it. 

1  .  Write  each  letter  longer  or  shorter  with  reference  to  a  lixed 
standard,  which  should  not  vary  much  from  the  sixth  of  an  inch. 
Assuming  te  to  be  the  standard,  all  other  vertical  letters  should 
be  the  same  heitrh  t  .  Kay,  al  -o,  should  be  the  same  length,  and  other 
horizontal  consonants  should  occupy  an  equal  space  along  the  lino. 
All  slantimr  letters  are  written  the  same  height  as  te,  their  length 
depending  on  the  degree  of  inclination. 

8.  The.  side  of  a  square  in  the  stenographic  practice  book  is  one- 
sixth  of  an  inch.  Tiie  proper  length  for  letters  is  secured  by 
writing  each  only  as  long  ;  ;  the  square  will  allow,  as  shown  by  the 
figure  : 


CONSONANT    ALPHABET.  17 

9.  CAUTION. — The  student  is  apt,  at  first,  to  incline  te  and  de 
somewhat  to  the  right,  and  to  give  too  little  slant  to  inclined  letters. 
This  fault  may  be  overcome  by  writing  te,  and  other  upright  letlers, 
so  as  to  correspond  with  the  vertical  lines  in  the  practice  book; 
also,  by  writing  pe,  chay,  and  other  slanting  letters  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  extend  diagonally  across  the  square. 

10.  The  first  six  letters  are  always  written  down  ward;  but  hori- 
zontal letters,  as kay  and gay,    are  executed   from   left  to 

right. 

11.  Give  each  letter  its  proper  attitude,  as  follows:    |  te  and 
|  de,  vertical ;  \  pe  and  \^  be,  right  slant;  /    chay  and /  jay, 
left  slant,  at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  with  the  horizontal. 
Care  should  be  taken  to  make  the  light  letters  thin  as  possible,  and 
the  heavy  ones  thick  enough  only  to  be  readily  distinguished  from 
the  light. 

12.  Each  letter,  when  standing  alone,  should  rest  on  the  line. 

13.  The  pen  should  be  held  between  the  thumb  and  first  and 
second  fingers,  not  far  from  the  nib,  and  in  a  nearly  upright  posi- 
tion, as  shown  in  the  first  figure.     The  practical  stenographer  will, 
however,  derive  rest  from  an  occasional  change   to  the  position 
shown  in  the  second  figure . 


14.  Copy  Sec.  1  of  the  alphabet  forty  to  fifty  times,  or  until  you 
can  make  every  character  accurately  soon  as  read  to  you. 

15.  The  student  will  observe  that  several  different  words  may 
have  the  same  outline,  as  te-kay  for  both  take  and  took,  gay-de  for 
guide  and  giddy,  be-gay  for  big  and  beg.    But  this  is  merely  acci- 
dental, and  no  ambiguity  results  from  it.     In  the  sentence,  for  in- 
stance, "Those  \.        boys\^         bread"  the  context  enables  the 

2 


18 


REPORTING   STYLK   OF    SHORT-HAND. 


reader  to  determine  when  this  character  signifies  big  and  \\hen  beg. 
Here  be-gay  denotes  first  an  adjective,  then  a  verb;  and  it  is  a  rule 
that  the  same  character  may  represent  two  or  more  different  parts 
of  speech  without  danger  of  ambiguity. 

EXERCISE  1. 

16.  Write  the  consonant  outlines  for  the  following  v/ords : 
Take,  deck,  pick,  check,  keep,  took,  deep,  guide,  dog,  jug,  do,  pay, 
up,  it,  be,  go,  cage,  ditch,  pig,  budge,  dodge,  pitch,  judge,  page, 
betake,  bedeck,  touch,  copy,  pity,  abate,  abode,  giddy,  body,  edit, 
book,  deputy,  jacket,  pocket,  bucket,  ducat.  (Twice  in  3  min.) 


LESSON  II. 


CONSONANT  ALPHABET,   SEC.  2. 

17.  9.     ef     V__    fan,  laugb,  physic. 

10.  ve    V         vine,  love. 

11.  ith    i          think,  both. 

12.  the  (  them,  soothe. 

13.  es      "\  so,  face. 

14.  ze     }  zeal,  was. 

15.  ish   _^J  shall,  vicious. 

16.  zhe     _J    seizure,  pleasure. 

c 

18.  Table  showing  directions  in  which  all  the  alphabetic  letters 
are  to  be  written: 

Downward :  \    \  /    / 

To  the  right: <~ ^  **-s  - 


17. 

lay  ( 

light,  bell. 

18. 

ar          \ 

arm,  furrow. 

19. 

em  >"    •> 

me,  him. 

20. 

en    >»  's 

no,  in. 

21. 

ing  ^_, 

ing:,  ink. 

22. 

way    ^ 

woe,  away. 

23. 

yea  X^ 

your. 

24. 

hay    / 

he. 

(  (   J  )  J  J  " 
Upward:    (~ 


CONSONANT   ALPH.VBKT.  19 

19.  Straight  letters  should  be  made  without  crook  or  curvature. 
Curves  should  be  bent  uniformly  throughout,  aud  the  thickened 
ones  allowed  to  taper  at  the  extremities. 

20.  The  student  should  spend  at  least  fifteen  minutes  a  day  for 
one  or  two  weeks  in  the  oral  outlining  of  words.     Beginning  with 
any  list  found  in  this  book,  first  pronounce  the  word  aloud,  and 
then  name  the  letters  in  the  order,  which,  if  written,  would  consti- 
tute  its  consonant  delineation.    Thus,   system  would  be    spelled, 
es-es-te-em;  short-hand,  ish-ar-te-hay-en-de;  stenography,  es-te- 
en-gay-ar-ef ;    tax,   te-kay-es;    example,   gay-ze-em-pe-lay;    quill, 
kay- way-lay;  white,  hay-way-te;  erasure,  ar-zhe-ar. 

21.  Short-hand  is  very  different  from  a  mere  abbreviated  long- 
hand.    In  writing  it  you  should  not  attempt  to  spell  out  words,  as 
you  do  in  long-hand,  but  simply  write  the  consonant  sounds  that 
are  actually  heard.     In  lodge  (lay- jay),  for  example,  there  is  no 
de ;    in  bell  (be-lay) ,  there  is  but  one  lay ;  in  arrow,  but  one  ar. 
Final  y  is  never  yea,  but  always  a  vowel.    (Vowels  will  be  explained 
in  a  subsequent  lesson.) 

22.  In  common  long-hand  an  elementary  sound  is  sometimes 
represented  by  one  letter  and  sometimes  by  another;  as,  for  exam- 
ple, the  force  of  f  is  also  given  to  ph.    But  in  short-hand  each 
distinct  sound  is  provided  with  a  separate  character,  which  always 
denotes  that  particular  sound,  and  can  never  denote  any  other. 

•23.  The  perfect  adaptation  of  the  written  characters  to  the 
sounds  which  they  express  is  shown  in  part  by  the  following  exam- 
ples :  The  two  similar  and  cognate  sounds,  \  pe  and  >y  be,  are 
denoted  by  two  similar  characters,  the  aspirate  pe  being  appropri- 
ately expressed  by  a  light,  and  the  subvocal  be  by  a  shaded,  stroke. 
Be  differs  from  pe  only  in  point  of  shade,  which  is  sufficient  dis- 
tinction, since,  should  pe  be  shaded  too  much,  or  be  too  little,  no 
uncertainty  of  meaning  would  result;  e.  g.,  the  sentence,  "It  is 
pest  to  bay  as  you  go,"  is  of  no  doubtful  signification.  The  same 
principle  applies  in  the  case  of  each  other  pair  of  cognates:  te  and 
de,  kay  and  gay,  ef  and  ve,  etc.  Also,  observe  that  the  exploclents 
are  appropriately  expressed  by  straight  letters,  while  the  continu- 
ents  and  liquids  are  indicated  by  curves. 

24.    Copy  Sec.   2  of  the  alphabet  many  times,  until  you  can 


20 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 


write  all  the  characters  readily  at  dictation.  Then  practice  on  the 
entire  alphabet  until  you  can  write  all  the  letters  in  proper  order 
from  memory. 

25.     Words  whose  outlines  are  horizontal,  as  make  (em-kay),  or 
mimic  (em-em -kay),  should  be  written  on  the  line. 


26. 


EXERCISE  2. 


hotel 


bank 


deluge        anthem        demolish      behead      Chicago      Louisiana. 

Arm,  mail,  neck,  early,  fail,  daily,  bill,  being,  bell,  lay,  may,  no, 
show,  own,  say,  so,  way,  became,  came,  deluge,  demolish,  avenge, 
mimic,  money,  name,  thick,  wake,  picnic,  polish,  shame,  among, 
ask,  death.  Ascending  letters,  when  initial,  should  begin  on  the 
line :  Lady,  love,  head,  heavy,  lake,  alarm,  also,  length,  long,  live. 
(2  min) . 


LESSON     III. 


WORD-SIGNS. 

Lay       el      ish    shay    hay  (not  thus)  Alabama  behead  duet  keg  annul  period 


anatomy    nothing    asylum    fail    gypsy    ink    thumb    Asiatic    bishop 

27.  Proper   names   are   underscored   with  a  double   dash,  as  in 
Alnbarnn. 

28.  The    initial   tick   of   hay  should  be  written  in  a  horizontal 
position,  and  not  allowed   to  incline  in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  a 


WORD-SIGNS.  21 

hook.  It  is  sometimes  inconvenient  to  write  this  tick  when  hay  is 
medial.  In  such  cases  it  is  indicated  merely,  by  retracing  the  pre- 
ceding letter,  as  in  behead. 

29.  Such  words  as  duet  and  keg  are  written  with  a  single  stroke 
of  the  pen,  and  should  taper  or  thicken  gradually. 

30.  The  liquid  I  is  sometimes  written  downward,  and  is  then 
called  el  to  distinguish  it  from  lay  (upward).     Ish,  when  struck 
upward,  is  called  shay.    The  student  should  always  use  lay  and  ish, 
unless  el  or  shay  is  specified- 

31.  One  of  the  purposes  in   sometimes  using  el  instead  of  lay, 
and  shay  instead  of  ish,  is  to  secure  better  angles  at  their  junctures 
with  other  letters.    The  legibility  of  an  outline  depends  to  a  large 
extent  upon  its  angularity.     For  this  reason,  a  distinct  angle  should 
be  made  in  joining  ith  and  ef,  of  and  en,  ith  and  ing,  as  in  nothing, 
and  other  letters  making  similar  junctions. 

32.  The  participial  ending,  i-n-g,  is  denoted  by  the  consonant 
^_^ing. 

33.  Bern.    Legibility  in  short-hand  is    even    more  important 
than  speed ;  for  of  what  consequence  is  rapid  writing,  if  the  char- 
acters cannot  afterwards  be  read?     Legibility  depends  in  part  upon 
the  accurate  formation  of  the  characters ;  but  in  order  that  a  char- 
acter may  be  formed  accurately,  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  it  slow- 
ly; on  the  contrary,  experienced   stenographers  produce  the   more 
perfect  outlines   with   -i  somewhat  rapid  movement,    just   as  an 
ornamental  penman  executes  the  most  graceful   curve   or  flourish 
with  a  quick  stroke,  rather  than  by  tediously  drawing  it.     The  stu- 
dent should  learn  from  the  first  to  write  the  characters  rather  than 
draw   them.     It  is  a  loss  instead  of   gain  to  continue  forming  them 
slowly  in  order  to  secure  mathematical  precision. 

34.  The  learner's  method    should  be,   to   write   a  given   word 
slowly  several  times,  until  its  outline    is  well  fixed  in  the  mind; 
then  write  it  rapidly,  and  continue  doing  so  until  it  can  be  formed 
both  accurately  and  quickly. 

EXERCISE  3. 

35.  Wait,    botany,  bulk,  behead,  bar,  damage,,  depth,  deviate, 
dialogue,  effect,  efficacy,  ettigy,  epitome,  error,  escape,  wade,  fare, 


22 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHOUT-HAND. 


farm,  obviate,  remedy,  policy,  agency,  apology,  milk,  army,  eclectic, 
delay,  am,  waking,  embody,  engage;,  enough,  envy,  image,  inch,  in- 
demnify, inform,  ingenuity,  intimacy,  unto,  invoke,  involve,  shape, 
know,  month,  nominate,  nothing,  comic,  shadow,  share,  adore, 
allopathy,  arc,  assassin,  asylum,  azure,  bachelor,  baggage,  bath, 
below,  beneath,  betime,  both,  buffalo,  colleague,  cab,  cabbage, 
chaos,  delay,  demagogue,  detach,  detail,  dialect,  dig,  dilemma,  dish, 
dogma,  effeminate,  enigma,  dull,  epidemic,  aesthetic,  fair,  far,  fel- 
low, fetch,  flsh,  gash,  gum,  gush,  gypsy,  hack,  hedge,  hitch,  honey, 
hook,  hush,  infect,  ink,  lavish,  levity,  link,  lodge,  log,  monk,  omit, 
pair,  pang,  pathetic,  ramify,  remove,  shake,  sham,  shove,  going, 
tank,  thief,  thumb,  tick,  timid,  top,  topic,  vacate,  fatigue,  Anthony, 
Jacob,  Lewis,  Matthew,  Timothy,  Fanny,  Lilly,  Lucy,  Dakota,  Dick, 
Jack,  Tennessee,  Alabama,  Louisiana,  Asiatic.  Using  shay  (up- 
ward), bishop;  using  el  (downward),  along,  denial,  vowel,  manual, 
annul.  (5  in.) 

36.  A  large  number  of  the  commonest  words  are  indicated  by 
brief  characters,  called  Word-siynx.     These  are  merely  abbreviated 
forms  expressing  one  or  more  of  the  .principal  sounds  of  the  words 
they  are  used  to  represent, — as  in  long-hand  are   the   abbreviations 
Rev.,  A.  D.,  P.  M.,  Co.,  Ans.,  etc.     These  are  not  arbitrary  charac- 
ters, but;  express  some  of  the-  leading  consonant  or  vowel  sounds  of 
the  words  for  which  they  st:uul. 

37.  Word-signs:  which,         come,  \     for,  V    have,  (  they, 

)/  \ 

was,   ^)   shall,    J  usual-ly,  ("    will,  ,— -,lrim,  [     your, 

__  together,      think,  \  object. 

Advantage 
language  s 

change  ..f....^rS., 


he 

help 
never 


38.  The  wonl-^igns  cannot  be  too  thoroughly  committed  to 
memory,  since  t.he  wonl<  they  represent  are  those  which  recur  the 
most  frequently.  Remember  always  to  use  the  proper  word-sign, 


PHHA8EOGRAPHY. 


23 


and  not  the  full  outline,  whenever  any  sign-word  occurs;  e.  g. 
use  kay,  never  kay-em,  for  come;  chay,  not  hay-way-chay,  for 
which. 

39.     Write : 


Will    your   big   hack  fetch    my   bulky     baggage  ? 

(6  times  in  1m.) 

40.  TRANSLATE. 


REMARK. — The  engraving  in  this  work  is  not  perfect,  particularly  as  to 
shading.  A  number  of  the  light  lines  are  too  heavy.  This,  however,  is 
not  a  serious  fault;  the  same  variance  from  an  exact  standard  character- 
izes all  actual  reporting  notes.  The  pupil  may  find  the  exercise  a  little 
more  difficult  to  translate,  but  the  training  will  be  appreciated  when,  in 
after  years,  it  becomes  his  duty  to  decipher  characters  which  have  been 
formed  at  verbatim  speed. 

SUGGESTION. — In  learning  lists  a  good  plan  is  to  write  the  words  in  a 
column  at  the  left  margin  of  a  sheet  of  practice  paper,  afterwards  filling 
each  line  by  writing  the  word  over  and  over  rapidly.  Always  carry  in 
your  pocket  some  Short-hand  book,  manuscript  or  exercise  to  read  at 
leisure  moments,  while  traveling,  waiting  for  cars  or  steamboats,  for  lazy 
people  to  keep  appointments,  or  whenever  an  opportunity  for  a  few  min- 
utes study  may  be  had.  The  sign-book  is  suitable  for  this  purpose. 


REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON     IV. 


RAY  (or  upward  R),  AND  PHRASEOGRAPHY 


41. 

Arc 

wrecfe 
ferry 

forehead 
tyranny 
are-inany 

he-has-no 

will-you-cnme 

ue-may-think 


42.  For  the  purpose   of   securing  greater  speed,  angularity  of 
outline,  and  also  to   prevent  the  too  great  downward  tendency  of 
many  words,  the  liquid  11   is  also  written  with  an  upward  stroke, 
called  Kay.    This  character  is  precisely  like   hay  with  the  initial 
tick  omitted. 

43.  The   student   should  use  ray  in  all   cases  where   ar  is  not 
specified. 

44.  Using   ray,    write:     King,    road,    revive,    reveal,    revenue, 
tvady,  repeal,  rash,  rate,  range,    wreck,  wrong,  abhor,  apothecary, v 
birth,  bureau,  arrive,  earth,  heretic,  march,  mark,  marry,  marriage, 
married,  memorial  (el),  merry,  admire,  memory,  mirror,  narrow, 
notary,  period,  perish,  rare,  rarify,  injury,  theory,  thorough,  torna- 
do, tyranny,  variety,  victory,  hurry,  ferry,  poetry,  Ari/ona,  dare, 
allegory  (el),  arch,  arduous,  burial  (el),  bury,  carry,  cherry,  cohere, 
forehead,   forge,    h:ir<h,  horror,  inferior,  morrow,  ravage,  red,  re- 
pair, repel,  retire,  revenge,  revoke,  revolve,  rich,  rush,  tardy,  ter- 
ror, torch,  upright,  urge,  vary,  verify,  votary,  wrath,  wretch,  noto- 
riety,  Darius,    E/.ra,  Mark,  Theodore,  Marion,  Mary,  Rachel,  Rosa, 
Ruth,    Barrett. 

4.">.  lli 'ii,.  Kay  is  more  quickly  written,  and  much  oftener  used 
than  ar,  and  it.-.,  employment  more  frequently  secures  angularity  of 
out  line. 

4(>.  Ar  is  always  used  before  em,  never  before  fe  or  de,  and 
rarely  after  kay.  \\hiie  ray  is  used  after  em,  and  before  en  and  ing. 

47.     In    be'/i •iiiiuu'  an  outline,   it   is  evident  that  either  ar  or  ray 


PHRASEOGKAPI1Y. 


25 


makes  a  distinct  angle  by  junction  with  a  following  kay  or  gay. 
The  choice  in  such  cases  is  determined  in  favor  of  ar  by  the  fact  of 
a  preceding  vowel,  as  in  arc ;  but  in  the  absence  of  such  vowel,  ray 
is  used,  as  in  icreck.  Ray  is  employed,  when  final,  if  followed  by  a 
vowel,  as  in  ferry. 
48.  WORD-SIGNS. 


In,   any 


that 


is,  his 


as,  has 


notwithstanding 


rather 

«g    /\^ 

/    ^/             \                   represent-nd 

regular 

^^^^^       j                 irrejrular.  argue 

legible     ( 

J_  {^~                            illeeible 

/ 


perform 


magnanimous 


New  York 


republic 


_..__         peculiar-ity 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


49.  In  short-hand,  two  or  more  commonly  recurring  words  are 
often  written  together,  without  the  pen  being  lifted  from  the  pa- 
per. An  assi'inbH.tre  of  words  which  ina v  be  thus  joined,  is  called  a 


26  KEPOKTING    STYLE    OK    SHOKT-HXXD. 

phraseogram,  and  the  character  which  expresses  them,  a  phraseo- 
graph. 

Much  speed  is  gained  by  phrasing,  with  no  sacrifice  of  legibility. 

60.  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 


I-say  * 1 I-gulde 

I T-»m 


I-do 


he-became  >      .  / ^  '  he-will 


you-wtll  <•>        ^'Ss^v' you-know 

51.  In  phraseography,   only  half  the  sign  for  I  is  commonly 
written,  whichever  "tick"  makes  the  best  angle  with  the  word  to 
which  it  is  joined;  e.  g .,  in  I-yuide,  the  downward  stroke  is  used; 
but  when  the  second  tick  is  employed,  it  is  invariably  struck  upward, 
as  in  I-do.     With  es,  y.e,  ish,   and  zhe,  the  whole  sign  for  I  should 
be  written,  as  in  7-sa//. 

52.  Tin;  si u;n  for  7,  when  standing   alone,    or   when    it  begins  a 
phraseograph,  is  always  written  above  the  line,  and  the  words  com- 
bined with  it  must  adapt  themselves  to  its  position.     E.  g.,  I-am  is 
written  above  the  line,  although  am,  when  it  stands  alone,  is  placed 
upon  it. 

53.  Jf'-,   in   phraseography,  is   indicated  by  a  tick  precisely  like 
the  second  stroke  of  the  siirn  for  /,  excepting  that  it  is  ahcan»  struck 
downward,  &*  in  >:>•->,>•(•(!  me. 

54.  When  ihis  stroke  doe>  not  make  an  angle  with  the  following 
word,  Ao  may  be  expressed  by  the  joined  hay,  written  half  its  usual 
length,  as  in  li<'-]<n.rrii  <{. 

55.  Jf'',  different  from   /.  has  no  position  of  its  own,  but  adapts 
itself  to  that  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined.     E.    <J.,    he-may  is 
written  on  the  line,  while  in  hc-iras    the    tick    is    necessarily  above 
the  line. 

T>6.     The  si^n  for  >/n><  is  inverted  in  phraseography,   when  ueccs- 
sarv  to  secure  n  n'ood  anu'le,  as  in  tjnit-know 


PHKASEOGKAPHY.  27 

57.  Are  is  expressed  by  ar  instead  of  rayt  when  angularity  re- 
quires, as  in  are-many. 

EXERCISE  4. 

68.  Join  the  words  connected  by  a  hyphen.  I-think,  you-are, 
I-am-going,  he-will-be,  hc-has-no,  you-will-have-them,  he-may- 
arrive,  I-abhor,  I-perish,  I-delay,  you-represent,  do-you-have, 
will-you-come. 

1.  He-may-think  he-is-wrong.  2.  Are-you-ready?  3.  I-am- 
hurrying  notwithstanding  your  delay.  4.  I-am-going-into  New- 
York.  5.  He-will  argue  it.  6.  I-shall  reform-them.  7.  I-think 
he-will-be  popular  enough  as  deputy.  8.  I-say  Tom  will-do 
nothing  for-them.  9.  I-will-iiiform-you  that-it-may-do  for-March, 
never  for-November.  10.  His  daily  income  will-make-him  rich 
enough.  11.  I- judge  that  Theodore  will  go-up  into  Dakota, 
Wyoming,  especially  Nevada.  12.  Amoug-so-many,  your  book 
will-have-no  advantage.  13.  Ezra  Barrett  is  rather  peculiar. 
14.  They-may-never  do-so.  15.  Darius  will-never-march  any  reg- 
ular army  into  Arizoua.  16.  As-you-may  know,  his  help,  as-usual, 
is  efficient.  (4  m.) 

59.  Will-you-keep-your  November-magazine  for  Mark   Mere- 
dith ?     (4  times  in  1  in.) 

60.  TRANSLATE 


.a 


61. 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

LESSON    V. 


LONG  VOWELS. 

SCALE. 


e  in  me 

"*    aw  in  law 

•    o  "  make 

~"    o      "     op» 

•     a  "  father 

—    oo    ••    boot 

•1 

o»k                        i  |                                          ant 

key 


hoe 


peak 


coach 


park 


pshaw 


62.  The  six  long  vowels  are  denoted  by  a  shaded  dot  and  dash, 
placed  beside  the  consonant  siirns  at  three   different   points,  called 
the  .///>•/,  .-n-nnii  and  tiiird  vowel   places,  being   respectively  at  the 
beiiiniiing,  middle,  and  end  of  the  consonant  stem.     The  long  sound 
of  c  is  expressed  by  placing  the  large  dot  in  the  first  place,  or  at  tlie 
begiiniiiiii   of  the   consonant,  as  in  cat  or  key;  the  sound   of   o,  by 
writing  the  dash  in  the  tc.cohd  place,  or  at  the  middle  of  the  letter,  as 
in  auk. 

63.  These  are  denominated  firxt,  second,  and  third  place  vowels, 
according  as  they  occupy  the  first,  second,  or  third  vowel  positions. 


LONG  VOWELS.  29 

64.  Vowels  placed  above  the  horizontal,  or  at  the  left  of  the 
upright  and  slanting  signs,  are  read  before  them,  as  in  oak  and  eat. 
When  placed  below,  or  at  the  right  of  them,  they  are  read  after- 
ward, as  in  key  and  hoe.  , 

65 .  Dash  vowels  should  invariably  be  written  perpendicularly  to 
the  consonants  beside  which  they  are  placed,  as  in  oak  and  rare. 

66.  A  word  is  said  to  be  vocalized  when  the  vowel  signs  are  add- 
ed to  its  outline.    The  Nominal   Consonant  is  any  letter,  as  te  or 
chay,  cancelled,  its  office  being  simply  to  indicate  position,  when 
words  having  no  consonant  are  to  be  written,  as  ah  and  awe. 

67.  Vocalize:     Eat,  ate,  tea',  toe,  ace,  saw,  sea,  low,  oaf,  foe, 
oak,  ache,  key,  coo,  gay,   aid,   dough,   awl,  ale,  lea,  ape,  Poe,  paw, 
Joe,  shoe,  eve,  thaw,  pshaw,   jaw,   fee,  aim,  ma,  woe,  hoe,  gnaw, 
knee,  nay,  Esau,  row,  raw,  oar,  em,  ado,  age,  ah,  aught,  awe,  bay, 
bee,  fee,  hay,  Jew,  low,  oat,  ode,  stjw,  sue. 

68.  In  the  following  words  the  vowel  occurs  between  two  con- 
sonants, and  should  be  placed  beside  the  tirst,  as  in  peak  and  coach. 

First  place  vowels  :  Beat,  cheek,  chalk,  heap,  heed,  tall,  leaf, 
league,  leap,  meal,  peal,  ball,  beach,  beak,  beam,  beer,  hawk, 
kneel  (el),  leak,  peach,  peak,  reap,  sheep,  team,  teeth,  wreath, 
wreathe,  Neal  (el),  Paul,  Maud. 

60.  Second  place  :  Cake,  coach,  coal,  comb,  dale,  dame,  bail, 
bowl,  cape,  joke,  fame,  gale,  game,  jail,  choke,  knave,  lame,  loaf, 
nail  (el),  pole,  porch,  tale,  tame,  vale,  j'oke,  abate,  bore,  roam  (ar), 
rogue,  rope,  babe,  bait,  pale,  dome,  goal,  loathe,  mail,  pail,  poke, 
pope,  rake,  robe,  tail,  tape,  vague,  Job. 

70.  Third-place  vowels  should  be  written  beside  the  second  of 
the  two  consonants  between  which  they  occur,  as  in  coop  :    Pool, 
tool,  root,  balm,  boom,  calm,  rood,  tomb;  (using  ar)  lark,  tar,  czar, 
tour,  jar. 

71.  Using  only  the  long  vowels:     Antique,  aurora  (ar),  bouquet, 
foliage,   elate,   jubilee,  oatmeal,  parade,  pillow,  pony,  potato,  up- 
roar, yellow,  Ada,  Cora,  Edith,  Eva,  Laura,  Nora,  lower  (ar). 

72.  The  lists  of  words  given  in  this  book  as  a  rule  should  not 
be  vocalized,  except  in  special  cases  where  one  or  two  vowels  are 
required  to  render  an  outline  unambiguous.     Isolated  words  com- 
monly require  vocalization. 

73.  .Re//;.     Only  one  out  of   many  hundred   vowels  is  actually 


80  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

written  in  short-hand;  but  enough  more  are  indicated  by  the  man- 
ner of  combining  the  consonant  signs  to  make  the  system  entirely 
legible. 

The  possibility  of  reading  from  the  consonants  alone  may  be 
shown  by  the  fact  that  a  page  of  print  is  easily  decipherable,  all  the 
vowels  having  been  previously  blotted  out;  for  not  only  would  the 
spaces  remain  which  set  off  the  words,  but  those  also  which  indi- 
cate where  vowels  are  to  be  supplied.  This  crudely  illustrates  the 
method  employed  in  short-hand. 

74.  A  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  vowel  signs  is  essential, 
nevertheless ;  that  they  may  be  written  quickly  in  the  few  instances 
in  which  they  are  used,  and  that  the  principles  of  consonant  combi- 
nation by  which  they  are  indicated,  may  be  understood.    The  long 
vowels,  especially,  should  be  well  memorized,  since  they  are  em- 
ployed much  more  frequently  than  the  short. 

75.  The  rule  for  placing  vowels  between  two  consecutive  con- 
sonants must  not  be  neglected;    otherwise  a  vowel  might  be  placed 
at  the  angle  of  two  letters,  which  would  occasion  ambiguity;  e.g., 
pe-ray,  with  a  large  dot  written   within  the  angle,  thus  \y,  may 
be  read  either  par  or  peer. 

76.  CAUTION.    The  student  must  not  forget  that  short-hand  is 
written  &//   sound.     Vowels,  in  the  sense  here  used,  do  not  refer  to 
the  letters  a,  e,  i,  etc.,  but  to  the  vocal  sounds  that  are  actually 
heard  in  tho  distinct  utterance  of  any   word.     Hence,  to  write  a 
word  properly,  no   regard   whatever  should   be  had  to  its  spelling. 
In  yoke,  for  instance,  there  is  but  one  vowel,  that  of  o  long;  tinal  e, 
being  silent,  is  not  represented.     A  good  plan  is  to  speak  each  word 
aloud  before  writing  it;  or,  better  still,  to  have  the  lists  distinctly 
pronounced  to  you  by  another  person. 

77.  The  first  vowel  position  being  at  the  beginning  of   the  con- 
sonant, first-place  vowels  should  be  written  at  the  top  of  downward 
letters,  as  in  pts/tuw,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  upward,  as  in  raw. 

78-  As  a  rule,  the  vocalized  words  given  in  this  and  the  two 
following  lessons  should  always  be  written  with  the  vowels. 

79.  To  this,  however,  exceptions  are  sometimes  made,  especial- 
ly in  verbatim  reporting,  where  time  does  not  allow;  also,  in  cases 
where  any  particular  word  occurs  frequently  in  the  same  report, 
and  for  which  the  simple  outline  would  be  unmistakable. 


LONG  VOWELS.  31 

80.  WORD-SIGNS. 

The  *          *  already 

a  •     «  an,  and 

all  *           *  ought 

too,  two  %          i  before,  oh 

of  \          i  or 

who  j ,  but 

on  (upward) 

should  (upward  ^ \  to 


81.  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 

the-loaf  y^     V —         \^/         the-porcn 


and-a 


a-book-and  \          |          a-guide 

82.  Any  one  of  the  three  ticks  which  denote  /  or  lie  may  be  used 
to  indicate  the,  that  one  always  being  selected  which   secures  the 
best  angle.    This  sign,  when  it  represents  the,  invariably  adapts 
itself  to  the  position  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined;  e.  g.,  in 
the-loaf,   it  rests  on  the  line,  while  in  the-porch,  it  is  one  space 
above.    No  ambiguity  can  result  from  the  use  of  the  same  sign  for 
the  article  the,  and  the  pronouns  /  and.  he. 

83.  A,  an,  and,  are  all  denoted  in  phraseography  by  a  brief  tick, 
written  horizontally  or  vertically  (downward),  as  angle  may  re- 
quire, as  in  a-book-and  a-guide. 

84.  The  dot,  or  vowel  word-signs  for  a,  and,  an,   and   the  are 
rarely  used;  only  when  the  tick  does  not  make  a  good  angle. 

EXERCISE  5. 

85.  The-day,  the-object,  the -usual,  the-many,  the-name,  the- 
bishop,    the-shadow,   the-chapter,    the-cssential,   and-it,  and-do, 


32  REPORTING   STYLE   OP   SHOUT-HAND. 

and-go,  and-make,  and-will,  and-know,  and-represent,  and-be, 
and-tlie,  and-never,  a-chauge,  a-chapter,  a-tornado,  a-rather,  an- 
illegible,  and-you-may,  and-he-may,  and-I-may,  and-I-will, 
a-lake-and-a-farm,  a-long-delay,  iie-lias-come-to  take-the-maga- 
zine. 

1.  The-day  is  coming,  and-you-may-look-for-a  victory  before- 
long.  2.  Should-you-come-to-day,  Maud  aud-Laura  \vLU-maku- 
a  bouquet  and-an  antique  foliage  wreath  for-you.  3.  Are-vou- 
going-to-go-to  sea  to-day?  4.  Paul,  take-your  oar  and-go-and 
row  a-league.  5.  The-knave  is-taking  coal  into-the  coach. 
6.  They-have-a  tall  coop  in-the  park.  (4  m.) 

86.  Cora,  you-may-go-and  help  Laura  make  oatmeal  cake  for 
tea.     (6  times  in  2m.) 

87.  TRANSLATE. 


.>  .....  /^\..\/^~..  ...VTT  .*>...<??.  .............  ..(....  I..  Wa^rr. 


NOTE. — The  vowels  are  used- rarely;  nevertheless  they  must  be  thor- 
oughly mattered,  in  order  that  they  may  be  inserted  without  a  moment's 
hesitation  when  a  rapid  report  is  being  made.  The  pupil  is  cautioned 
against  forming  the  long-vowel  signs  too  small,  a  common  error,  which 

results  in  confusing  them  with  the  short-vowels. 

SUGGESTION. — It  is  well  to  encourage  the  iendency,  which  is  quite  nat- 
ural, of  picturing  in  one's  mind  the  characters  which  represent  words 
you  hear  spoken  in  conversation;  also  to  cultivate  the  habit  of  mentally 
outlining  and  phrasing  words  and  sentences.  Word  and  phrase  signs 
must,  be  so  thoroughly  learned  as  to  be  written  and  read  instantly.  Spare 
hours  may  be  given  with  advantage  to  writing  and  reading  these  abbrevi- 
ations over  and  over  man3r  times. 


DIPHTHONGS   ANO   THE   S-CIRCLE.  81 

LESSON    VI. 


DIPHTHONGS  AND  THE  S-CIRCLE. 

88. 


cow  ,rrr./y.          on 


zeal 


.CL..JL 


type  I          \ boy 

TV; 

vow  X^A.          \  wire 

sense  3. ^>  \f  spell 

search         _O^/ 


r 


Tom's  bells  ring. 


89.  Write  the  following  exercise,  using  the  diphthongs  I,  as  in 
type,  01,  as  in  boy,  ow,  as  in  voio,  and  the  triphthong  wi,  as  in 
wire. 

Tie,  type,  pipe,  vile,  knife,  mile,  defy,  boy,  boil,  coil,  oil,  Illinois 
(t'1-en-oi),  foil,  row,  vow,  wire,  toy,  vouch,  Guy,  buy,  chime,  couch, 
cow,  coy,  dike,  foul,  hide,  nigh,  owl,  fowl,  pike,  pile,  rhyme,  shy, 
sigh,  spike,  dye,  thigh,  tire,  toil,  annoy,  diet,  envoy,  loyal,  royal, 


34  REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 

Isaac,  sour  (ar).    Using  long  vowels  also:     assignee,  voyage,  Ely, 
Elijah,  Eliza,  Ida,  Myra,  Viola. 

THE   S-CIRCLE. 

90.  Es  and  ze  are  denoted  in  outlines  by  a  small  circle.    This, 
when  joined  to  curved  letters,  is  written  within,  or  following  the 
direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  sense. 

91.  When  joined  to  straight  letters,  the  circle  is  always  written 
upon  the  ri^ht  of  downward  letters,    as  in  spell;  on    the  left  of 
upward  letters,  as  in  search;  and  upper  side  of  horizontal  letters, 
as  iu  guvs.    When  the  circle  is  initial,  it  is  read  before  the  vowels, 
as  in  seed,  and  when  llual,  after  them,  as  in  voice. 

92.  TABLE    OF    S-CIRCLE   JOININGS, 


^^  _     , 

This  table  should  be  copied  many  times,  until  the  student  can 
without  taking  thought,  join  the  circle  properly.  Written  exercises 
should  also  be  compared  with  it  every  day,  until  errors  cease  to  be 
found.  When  joined  to  straight  letters,  the  circle  is  executed 
from  right  to  left,  as  the  letter  o  is  written  in  long-hand.  This 
rule  will  enable  the  student  to  test  the  accuracy  of  his  own  work. 
For  convenience  in  teaching,  these  characters  are  sometimes  named, 
spe,  pes,  seb,  bes,  ste,  tes,  sed,  des,  sef,  efs,  sev,  sith,  sel,  sem, 
ways,  &c. 

Es  and  ze,  being  cognates,  are  both  represented  by  a  single  sign, 
namely,  the  circle,  with  no  danger  of  ambiguity. 

93.  The  circle  is  not  employed,  however,  to  denote  ze,  when 
initial,  as  in  ze.ul,  zinc,  z«ulu<j'j,  the  full  length  consonant  being  u&ed 
instead. 

94.  The   possessive  or   plural  of   a  word,   which  is  formed  in 
long-hand  by  the  addition  of  s  or  es,  is  formed  in  short-hand  by 
allixing  the  s-circle  to  its  word-sign  or  outline;  e.g.,  Tom^s  bells 
ring. 

95.  Es  and  ze,  when  standing  alone,  as  In  ooze  or  sea,  cannot 
be  represented  by  the  circle,  which  it  is  impossible  to  vocalize. 

9G.     Using  the  s-circlc,  write:  Case,  face,  save,  safe,  sale,  sake. 


DIPHTHONGS    AM)    TIIK    S-CIRCI.E.        ^  35 

said,  same,  eminence,  endorse,  famous,  fix,  harness,  immense, 
less,  Sabbath,  safety,  savage,  scale,  sell,  senate,  sense,  sketch, 
small,  smith,  son,  smoke,  solid,  slave,  suppose,  spell,  study,  sin, 
Sunday,  space,  this,  yes,  honesty,  Saturday,  alliance,  announce, 
apologize,  assets,  audacious,  avarice,  cell,  cemetery,  debase,  deli- 
cious, depose,  devise,  diffuse,  dubious,  factious,  fictitious,  notice, 
obvious,  paradise,  sex,  sink,  skip,  sledge,  slim,  sling,  slip,  spare, 
spark,  spool,  such,  sun,  surface,  surge,  surpass,  survey,  surveyor, 
survive,  swallow,  swing,  Swiss,  switch,  twice,  valise,  various,  vase, 
vex,  wages,  wax,  Horace,  James,  Marcus,  Nicholas,  Rufus,  Samuel, 
Thomas,  Stella;  (using  ar)  cellar,  circuitous,  severe,  Caesar, 
enforce,  force. 

97.  Vocalize:     Lace,  seal,  seat,  site,  slow,  snow,  sail,  choose, 
dose,  abase,  choice,  geese,  gaze,  score,  spoil,  stay,   vice,  pause, 
voice,  invoice,  nice,  noise,  spy,  ail,  soul,  chase,  cheese,  dice,  entice, 
race,  sage,  sauce,  siege,  sky,  slay,  sleeve,  slope,  sly,  snail,  snake, 
soap,  sole,  spire,  stale,    sty,  repose,  sway,  Maurice,  Miles,  Saul, 
Sarah;  (using  ar)  soar,  sore. 

98.  WORD-SIGNS. 

A  How,  high,  ^  its,  \^  several,  Savior,  \  special,  \  subject, 
£  advantageous. 

EXERCISE  6. 

99.  1.  That  boy  of-yours  makes  enough  noise.     2.  Do-you-say 
he-is  going-to  tie  the-rope  to-the  cow's  neck?    3.  He-ought-to- 
make    less    noise,  so-that-he-may-keep   his    seat    in-the-Senatc. 
4.  May  honesty  be-your    policy  notwithstanding    your  name-may 
become   less  famous.     5.  I-will-help-you   take-an  invoice  of  all- 
your-stock.     6.  You-should-never  for-any  reason,  or -on -any -clay, 
make-a  foolish   vow.     7.    Do-you   indorse  thc-study    of-such-a- 
subject  as-this?    8.  Yes,   and-I-think-you-should  study  it  thor- 
oughly on-all-days  but  Sundays.     1).  I-suppose  you-will-make-it- 
your  special  object  to  know  it  all  before-the-month  of  November. 
10.  Several  boys  have-come   to-day  to-sell  milk.     11.  You -will- 
have-no  magazine  for  sale  in-this-language  for-several-days.    12. 


36  REPORTING   STVI.K   OK    SHORT-HAND. 

It-was-said  in-the-Senate  of-Illinois  that-for-the  space-of  two- 
days  all  bells  should  ring  the-alarm.  13.  The-Senate  of-this- 
republic  will-long-be  famous  for  its  safe  and-dignifled  policy. 
(4m  30s). 

100.  How-many-days  do-you-suppose  he-will-be  in-surveying 
enough-space  for-the-cemetery?     (10  times  in  2  m). 

101.  TRANSLATE. 


NOTE. — The  pupil  is  cautioned  against  the  error  of  forming  the  s-circle 
too  large.  There  is  little  danger  of  getting  it  too  small.  Imitate  the  char- 
acters in  the  Table  in  section  92.  The  lines  composing  the  diphthongal 
Signs  should  invariably  be  made  light,  and  the  angle  acute.  It  is  the  ten- 
dency of  pupils  to  form  these  characters  considerably  larger  than  neces- 
sary. 

SUGGESTION. — The  student  can  in  no  case  make  real  progress  unless  he 
accustoms  himself  to  writing  sentences  he  hears  actually  spoken.  It  is 
indispensable  that  the  exercises  be  written  as  they  are  read  aloud  by  some 
other  person.  As  it  is  not  always  an  ea?y  matter  to  find  a  person  suffi- 
ciently patient  and  reliable  to  serve  the  purpose,  it  is  very  desirable  that 
two  or  more  persons  pursue  the  study  together.  Each  then  becomes  In- 
terested in  the  other's  progress,  and  the  assistance  and  encouragement 
afforded  by  mutual  study  are  well  known. 


SHOUT    VOWKLS,  37 

LESSON  VII. 


SHORT  VOWELS. 


102.  i-  SCALE. 

i   in 


Pit  I  "~  o  in  cot 

«    "pet  —  t*  "  cut 

a    "  pat  |_  oo  "   to*k 

Big  \  _                                  tuck 


beg 


assail  .J^^ f      ) 

rose-  ^\  ^X%   y 


lazy 


The  short-vowel  siirns  differ  from  tlic  Ions  only  i11  point  of 
•sliiide.  the  dot  and  dasli  being  made  large  or  small  according  as 
Joiiiz;  o/  «hort.  vowels  are  to  be  expressed. 

103.  Write:  Big,  fill,  ill,  job,  kick,  kill,  knock,  lock,  rock, 
chorus,  echo,  edge,  egg,  elbow,  el>e,  guess,  kiss,  mass,  haughty, 
enemy,  --das,  A--ia. 

10-4-.  The  following  third-place  vowels,  coming  between  two 
consecutive  consonants,  should  be  placed  beside  the  second,  as  in 
Inrk  :  Tack,  valley,  malice. 

105.  Second-place  short  vowels,  coinum;  between  two  consecu- 
tive consonants,  are  placed  beside  the  second,  (  unlike 
second-place;  long  vowels,  which  arc  written  with  the  lirst) .  Beg, 
vup,  gem,  autumn,  lion. 


38  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT -HAND. 

106.  When  two  vowels,  either  long  or  short,  occur  between  two 
consecutive  consonants,  the  first  is  placed  beside  the  first  conso- 
nant, and  the  other  beside  the  second,  as  in  poem.     Idiom,  idiot, 
poem,  maniac. 

107.  The  entire  rule  for  placing  vowels,  both  long  and  short, 
between  two  consecutive  consonants  is,  briefly : 

Write  beside  the  first  consonant ; 
First-place  long  vowels, 
First-place  short  vowels, 
Second-place  long  vowels. 

108.  Beside  the  second  consonant; 

Second- place  short  vowels, 

Third-place  short  vowels, 

Third-place  long  vowels. 

,.-v^\         Diagram   showing  the   assignment  of    vowels    when 
r~  i  ij1       occurring  between  two  consecutive  consonants. 

100.  Besides  keeping  vowels  out  of  angles,  a  further  advantage 
of  this  rule  is  that  second-place  vowels,  though  they  be  insufficient- 
ly or  wrongly  shaded,  are  known  by  the  position  which  they  occupy 
beside  the  first  or  second  consonant. 

No  symbol  is  provided  for  the  sound  of  e  in  sermon,  which  should 
be  indicated  by  the  sign  for  c.  in  met  (not  by  that  for  u  in  up~) . 

Some  other  shades  of  vowel  sound  are  not  provided  for  in  the 
short-hand  vowel  scale;  but  these,  for  all  practical  purposes,  are 
clearly  enough  indicated  by  the  signs  for  those  vowels  which  most 
nearly  approach  them. 

110.  When   two  vowels  arc  to  be  placed  beside  one  consonant, 
they   are    written   at   unequal   distances   from   it,  according  to  the 
order  in  which  the  sounds  occur,  as  in   j  -  Dio. 

INITIAL     AXD     FINAL    KS     AND    ZE. 

111.  Since  the  circle  cannot  be   vocalized,   when  es  follows  an 
initial,  or  es  or  z«  precede  a  final  vowel,  the  stroke  and  not  the  circle 
KS  or  ZK  is  used;  as  in  atituiil  or  luzij.     This  rule  holds  good   in  all 
cases,  whether  the  vowels  are  actually  written  or  not,  since  the  use 
of  the  stroke  consonant  in  these  circumstances  indicates  where  the 
vowels  are  1o  be  supplied;  e.  g.,   the  alphabetic  letters  are  used  in 


SHORT    VOWELS. 


39 


essence  and  ea>s?/,  and  the  circle  in  sense  and  rose.     Vocalize:     Racy, 
mazy,  dozy,  posy,  daisy,  gauzy,  dizzy,  hazy,  noisy,  essence,  espy. 

112.  In  the  following  list,  write  both  long  and  short  vowels. 
Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  proper  placing  of  them  be- 
side the  consonants. 

Acme,  agony,  alimony,  allure,  ally,  alto,  apathy,  apex,  appal, 
appease,  Arab,  array,  audit,  bang,  barrow,  botch,  buggy,  cameo, 
chip,  chop,  cob,  coffee,  cog,  dairy,  duck,  dumb,  Dutch,  epic,  essay, 
ethics,  flat,  fogy,  gang,  gas,  gaudy,  hiatus,  hobby,  job,  lag,  lap, 
lash,  latch,  lath,  leg,  lip,  luck,  lung,  mellow,  melodious,  mess,  mob, 
odd,  opera,  palace,  palm,  parody,  pith,  rack,  shock,  silk,  solemn, 
Stoic,  tally,  tear,  Adam,  Amos,  Caleb,  Ellis,  Emory,  Enoch,  Jesse, 
Agnes,  Alice,  Anna,  Ella,  Emily,  Emma,  Hannah;  (using ar)  arrow, 
attire,  err. 

113.  Without  vowels:     Veracious,  custom,  device,  disengage, 
fallacious,  auspicious,  hasten,  swell,  visit,  celerity,  paradox,  reason, 
receive,   restore,  race,  raise,  summer,  service;    (using  ar)  circus, 
erroneous,  resume. 


114. 


WORD-SIGNS. 


Acknowledge 

catholic 

disadvantage 

exchange 

expect 

forsake,  for-the-sake-of 


New  York  City 
public-ish-ed 


for-the-purpose-ol 


EXEECISE  7. 

115.      1.    What-do-you    guess    Is -in-the -post- office    for-you? 
2.  I-think-it-is-a  sketch,  "Thc-Lion  on-the  Rock"  beiug-the-sub- 


40  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND 

ject,  and-a  poem  on  "The-Idiot  and-the  Maniac, K  wmch  I-sh*. 
receive  and-take-to-the  notary.     3.  Will-you-acknowledge  that, 
the  valley  is  hazy  in  autumn?  4.  Yes,  but  it-is-never  so  in  summer. 

5.  I-have-no-memory-of    any-such    tale    as-that-in-your   book. 

6.  To  edit  such-a-book  is-a-big  job.    7.  It-is-in-no-way  sufficient, 
so-you-will-have-to  exchange  it  for-somethirig-else  (el).      8.  The- 
enemy  has  knowledge-and-reason,  but  it-is  erroneous  to  say-that- 
he-has  riches.    9.    Shall  we-take-the  team  and-buggy  and-hasten 
to-visit-the  circus  to-day?     10.  It-is-the-custom  with-them  to  eat 
nothing  but-milk-and-eggs  on-Sunday.     11.    All-the  ships  of-the 
navy  will  soon   sail  into-the   sea  aud-engage  with-the    haughty 
enemy.     (4  in.) 

116.  Wliat-would-be-the-advantage   in  restoring  the-domestic 
customs    of-a-race    of-which-we-have    scarcely    any-knowledge  ? 
(8  times  in  2m.) 

117.  TRANSLATE 


SUGGESTION. — Whoa  the  pupil  has  arrived  at  this  point  the  most  advis- 
able thing  for  him  to  do  next  is  to  turn  back  and  learn  lesson  VII  over 
again.  A  knowledge  of  the  vowels  is  much  more  important  than  the 

space  here  given  would  seem  to  indicate . 


CONSONANT    POSITION.  41 

LESSON     VIII. 


CONSONANT   POSITION. 
118. 


L 


King  • -\-    deep 


music J attack 


occupy        . / I      allowed 


leave         L_V^__    love 


1 


nigh 


touch 


awake  ~"\ -/^—  July 


119.  Araoiig  tlie  contrivances  made  use  of  to  indicate  vowels 
without  actually  writing  them,  one  of  the  most  simple  and  import- 
ant is  that  of  consonant  position.    By  means  of  this,  the  leading 
vowel  of  any  word,  that  is,  the  vowel  contained  in  the  accented 
syllable,  is  denoted  by  the  position  given  its  outline. 

120.  With  reference  to  the  line  of  writing,  words  occupy  three 
different  places,  known  as  the  first,  second,  and  third  consonant 
positions. 

121.  Second-position  words  rest  on  the  line,  where  all  words 
heretofore  introduced  are  written. 

122.  First-position    horizontal   words    are   written  one    space 
above  the  line,  as  king. 

123.  Other  first-position  words  are  written  half  a  space  above 


42  REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 

the  line;  c.  g.,  in  deep,  dc,  the  first  descending  letter,   rests  half 
a  space  above  the  line,  pe  being  bisected  by  it. 

124.  Third- position  horizontal  words  are  written  just  below 
the  line,  as  music. 

125.  Other  third-position  words  rest  half  a  space  below  the  line; 
e.  g.,  in  attack,  te,  instead  of  resting  on  the  line  is  bisected  by  it. 

126.  The  place  of  the  accented  vowel  is  signified  by  the  position 
of    the    outline.      Writing  a   word  iu  the   first-position   signifies 
that  its  accented  vowel  is  first-place  (as  ee,  aw,  oi,  etc.).     E.  g., 
short  o,  the  accented  vowel  in  occupy,  is  implied  by  the  position  of 
the  word  above  the  line.     Writing  it  in  the  third  position  signifies 
that  its  accented  vowel  is   tiiir.i-place  (ah,  o\v,  oo,  etc.).     E.  g., 
ow,  the  accented  vowel  in  allowed,  is  signified  by  the  position  of 
the  word  through  the  line. 

127.  Write  iu  first-position:     Deal,  abide,  by,  body,  time,  deep, 
deny,  die,  dime,  she,   ease,  easy,  easily,   enjoy,  fall,  feel,  female, 
joy,  joyous    (jay-es),   king,   law,    leave,   lie,   life,  life-time,   like, 
me,    meek,  avoid,  mill,  my,   occupy,  thy,   thee,  if,  off,  pity,  see, 
talk,    teach,    week,    weak,   assign,    write,   right,    reach,   alleviate, 
cheap,    Deity,   dock,   dominate,    miss,   mock,    nick,    seam,    series, 
size,  speedy;  (ar)  fear,  form,  lire,  sphere. 

128.  Third-jHixition:     Allow,   assume,   at,    out,     atom,    attach, 
attack,  beauty,  back,  cap,  catch,  cash,  cavity,  cool,  aloud,  allowed, 
few,  hat,  hiiu-e,  Jewish,  jury,  lack,  lad,  laugh,  map,  match,  month, 
move,  path,  view,  abuse,  academy,  academic,  eulogy  (el-jay),  fool, 
loose,  factory,  outrage,    pure,  renew,  review,  ruin,    add,    adduce, 
ensue,    lose,  pack,    purity,   purify,    salute,  sat,    suit;    (ar)    power, 
poor,  room,   our,  hour. 

Exceptional  words,  :-!rd.  pos. :    Away,  awake,  await,  July,  advice. 

12!).  Evidently  t  he  greatest  speed  is  attainable  when  one  posi- 
tion only  is  observed  in  writing.  For  this  reason,  words  are 
commonly  placed  on  the  line,  and  are  put  in  other  positions  only 
when  speed  is  actually  .rained  by  it,  that  is  to  say,  when  they 
would  otherwise  have  to  be  vocalized,  which  would  require  more 
time  than  the  oilier.  It  must  not,  be  supposed  that  all  words 
which  contain  first,  or  third  place  accented  vowels,  are  to  be 
written  in  the  lirsf,  or  third  positions.  These  are  made  use  of 
onlv  when  the  writing  of  vowels  can  thereby  be  saved.  It  is  a 


CONSONANT   POSITION.  43 

tix^uent  case  of  two  or  more  words  having  the  same  consonant 
outline,  none  of  which  need  vocalizing,  if  all  are  different  parts 
of  speech  But  ambiguity  would  result  from  the  use  of  lay-ve  to 
represent  the  two  verbs  love  and  leave.  In  this  case,  the  writing 
of  vowels,  otherwise  necessary,  is  saved  by  placing  leave,  which 
contains  the  first-place  vowel,  in  the  first  position.  The  use  of 
te-chay  for  both  touch  and  teach  would  also  be  ambiguous;  hence, 
to  denote  teach,  this  outline  is  also  written  in  the  first  position. 

130.  But  it  sometimes  transpires  that  the  accented  vowels  of 
both  words  are  second  place,  as  in  the  case  of  ivait  and  await. 
This  would  determine  both  for  the  second  position;  but  neverthe- 
less, as  a  matter  of  convenience  in  such  cases,  one  of  the  words  is 
written  in  either  the  first  or  third  position,  according  as  some 
unaccented  first  or  third  place  vowel  which  it  may  contain,  would 
indicate.    E.g.,  await  and  awake  are  written  in  the  third  position, 
in  order  to  be  distinguished  from  the  second  position  words,  wait 
and  wake,  which  have  the  same  outlines. 

131.  In  all  such  cases  the  most  commonly  recurring   word  is 
given  the  second  position. 

132.  Vocalized  words^commonly  occupy  the  second  position; 
but  the  legibility  of  short-hand  writing  is  increased  by  occasionally 
giving  these  also  the  positions  indicated  by  their  accented  vowels. 
This  is  more  especially  practiced  in  the  case  of  words  with  hori- 
zontal outlines,  as  nigh,  sky,  etc. 

133.  WORD-SIGNS — 1ST  POS. 

Common,      each,     watch,     ear,     hear,     her,     ever,      give-n,     dollar,      thing. 


EXERCISE  8. 

134.  1.  You-may-write-a  review  of  all-our  doings  at^the- 
academy  on-the  fourth  Sunday  of-February.  2.  We-all  know-that 
fire  ruins  many  factories  and-mills.  3.  You-may-copy  off-the 
eulogy  on-the-life,  laws,  and-power  of-the  Jewish  king.  4.  Talks 
on-the-subject  of-electricity  will-bci  given-in-both  academies  in- 


44  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

the-month  of  July.  5.  It-is-a-common-thing-to  hear  her  laugh 
aloud  at-that  huge  fool's-cap.  6.  I-will  carry  that  small  watch 
this-vveek,  and-if-the-right  time  it-keeps,  I-will-give-you  $25.00 
for-the-same.  7.  The-judge  said-that  the-jury  should  occupy  this 
cool  room,  and-at  no-time  be  allowed  to-leave-it  before  -they  say 
what-the  damages  in-this-case  shall-be.  8.  It-is-our-castom  to- 
sell-for  cash,  but-you-will-be  allowed  to-exchange  your-map  for- 
a  hat  or  cap,  or  anything-else  (el)  that-you-may  lack.  9.  The- 
huge  earth  moves  along-its  path  many-miles  an-hour.  (4m) . 

135.  To-study  the-lives-and  laws  of-the  Jewish  kings    is-a- 
common-thing  in-our  day-and-age.     (9  times  in  2m). 

136.  TRANSLATE. 


REMARK. — It  is  a  common  misapprehension  that  every  word  whose  ac- 
cented vowel  ie  first  or  third  place,  ought  on  this  account  to  be  written 
in  the  first  or  third  position.  The  great  mass  of  words  are  written  in  the 
second  position,  that  is,  on  the  line.  The  writing  of  words  elsewhere  than 
on  the  line  is  a  contrivance,  the  principal  use  of  which  is  to  save  writing 
the  vowels  in  the  case  of  a  limited  number  of  frequently  recurring1 
words,  whose  outlines  would  be  ambiguous  if  written  in  the  second  posi- 
tion, and  left  unvocalized.  If  necessary  to  prevent  ambiguity  it  is  better 
to  vocalize  an  uncommon  word  rather  than  to  attempt  to  indicate  the 
vowels  by  placing  its  outline  in  the  first  or  third  position. 


S-CIKCLK  JUNCTIONS.  45 

LESSON  IX. 


137.  S-CIRCLE  JUNCTIONS. 


Desk  C7 —      !Q ^ lesson 


facility          NS      I  " and-his-life 

it-is-of-advantage 


/ 


138.  The  rule  laid  down  in  Lesson  VI.  for  joining  the  s-circie, 
applies  only  when  it  occurs  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  words. 

139.  But  when  the  circle  occurs  at  the  juncture  of  two  conso- 
nants, it  should  be  written  according  to  the  following  directions : 

140.  When  the  circle  is  to  be  written — 

1.     At  the  juncture  of  two  straight  letters,  it  should  be  placed 
outside  the  angle,  as  in  desk. 

141.  2.    At  the  juncture  of  a  straight  letter  and  a  curve,  it 
should  follow  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  maxim. 

142.  3.     At  the  juncture  of  two  curves,  if  it  cannot  follow  the 
direction  of  both,  as  it  does  in  lesson,  it  should  be  written  in  the 
manner  found  most  convenient,  as  in  facility. 

143.  These  directions  apply  also  to  phraseographs ;  e.  g.,  it-is- 
to,  and-his-life,  ii-ix-of-advantage. 

144.  In  the  following  list,   the    s-circle  occurs  between    two 
straight  letters :    Custody,  deposit,  desk,  dispatch,  discuss,  disobey, 
dispose,  exhibit,  dispel,  expel,  gazette,  gospel,  indispose,  justice, 
succeed,   capacity,  Mexico,   Tuesday,    audacity,  besiege,   bestow, 
caustic,  chastise,  luxury,  depository,  disguise,  despair,  dusk,  exodus, 
expire,  extinguish,  gasp,  gossip,  hostile,  outside,  parasite,  receipt, 
restless,  upset,  et-cetcra,  Augustus,  Justus,  Augusta. 


4Jo  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

145.  Between  a  straight    and  curved  letter:     Citizen,  desire, 
desirous,  disarm,  dislike,  dismal,  dismay,  dissolve,  egotism,  excel, 
Harrison,  immensity,  maxim,  maximum,  message,  music,  resolve, 
cohesive,  instil,  musical,  pacific,    society,  solicit,  specify,  vestige, 
veracity,  Massachusetts,  Minnesota,  axiom,  answer,  castle,  casualty, 
decimal,   dismiss,   dissolve,  elastic,  exile,  felicity,  garrison,  offset, 
pacify,  parasol,  spasm,  specify,  tenacity,  velocity,  visitor,  Absalom, 
Erastus  (ar),  Joseph,  Missouri. 

146.  Between  two  curves:     Atheism,  counsel  (el),  facility,  in- 
cendiary, innocence,  insanity,  lesson  (el),  mason,  muscle,  pencil  (el), 
vessel    (el),  Cincinnati,    officer,    despair,    exterior,    risk,    rustic, 
cancel  (el),  sarcasm  (ar),  chancellor  (el),  counsellor  (el),  damsel, 
denizen,  domicile,  fasten,  gymnasium,  license,  lyceum,  offensive, 
submissive;    (also)    salary,    search,  decorus,  solitary,  sophomore, 
sorrow,   story,  sir   (ar),    scarce  (ar),    genius,  malicious,  science, 
select,  sublime,  Minneapolis. 

147.  WORD-SIGNS — 3  POS. 


However 
issue 
home,  whom 

•t^' 

11^  

advertise-ed-ment 
had,  due 
half,  few 

large 
much 
thank,  youth 

.././..(., 

<-rtr- 

though,  thou 
whole,  allow 
young 

us,  use   (noun) 
whose,  use  (verb) 
hope,  happy 

_^...v 

•*=---v= 

salvation 
to-be 

EXERCISE  9. 

148.  1 .  The-Gazotte  says  that  Harrison's  army  will-leave  Mex- 
ico on-Saturday  of-this-week,  ami-march  all-the-way-to  Minneap- 
olis, Minnesota,  i)\ -\vay-of-Missouri.  2.  The-citizen  deposits  his 
.-alary  in-the-bank-of  Massachusetts  with-scarcely  any  risk. 
:;.  The-ruslic,  taking-counsel  with-the  judge  for  half-an-hour,  says 
nothing,  but  for-some  purpose  dispatches  his  son  to-Cincinnati. 
4.  Thc-justice  informs  counsel  that-they-may,  !f-they  wish,  discuss- 
the-case  before -the- jury  for-two-hours.  o.  Do-you-think-that- 
tlie  jury  will-say  the-youth  is  insane?  C.  Yes,  they-have  already 
said-so;  ho-reccives-the-message  in  despair,  and-many  also  re- 


S-CIKCLK    jrXCTIOXS.  47 

celve-it  with  sorrow  and-dismay.  7.  The-offlcers  are-taking  him 
into-custody,  and-will  kei-p-him  safely  in-a  solitary  room.  8.  The- 
young  sophomore,  they-say,  has-a  rare  genius  for  poetry  and- 
music.  9.  I-hope  the-sa}-ing  has-no  sarcasm  in-it.  10.  I-know, 
however,  that-he-excels  in-science,  aud-never  fails  to  exhibit 
vivacity  in-society.  11.  Iiistil  right  maxims  into-the  soul  of-a- 
youth,  and-you-will  see  that-his  life  wi31-be-the  purer.  (4m.  30  s.) 
149.  I-hope,  however,  that- j-ou- will  give-the-ycmth  whom-you 
teach  the-whole  story  of  young  Absalom.  (B  times  in  2  m.) 

160.  TRANSLATE. 


DICTATION  PRACTICE. — When  two  or  more  persons  meet  together  for 
dictation  practice  the  following1  plan  may  be  adopted:  Be  seated  all  at 
one  table.  Limit  your  attention  to  the  lesson  upon  which  you  may  be  en- 
gaged. Do  not  practice  for  speed  upo  n  any  exercise  until  you  have  first 
learned  to  phrase  and  outline  it  correctly.  Each  student  should  in  turn 
read  to  the  other  members  of  the  group.  Write  the  list-words  a  number 
of  times,  reading  them  as  often.  Dictate  slow  ly  at  first,  gradually  in- 
creasing the  speed.  Afterwards  determine  which  student  is  able  to  read 
the  entire  list  in  the  shortest  time.  In  dictating  an  exercise,  read  the 
sentences  in  the  natural  way,  as  they  would  be  delivered  by  a  public 
speaker,  allowing  the  intervals  to  occur  between  clauses  rather  than  be- 
tween words. 


48  REPORTING   STYLE   OF    SHOUT-HAND. 


LESSON  X. 


151.  PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

I-die  f     / I-do 

I-had  A   ^ — -^  I-know-you 


I-think-that 


r  give-me 


pay-him  \__^  1  PCS.  altogether 

152.  Every  stenographer  must  determine  for  himself  the  precise 
extent  to  which  he  can  apply  phraseography  to  advantage.     Many 
do    not  phrase    enough;    while,    possibly,   some    do    too    much. 
Students,  accustomed  in  long-hand  to  disjoin  words*,  invariably  find 
phraseography  a  hindrance  at  first;  but  the  practice,  once  acquired, 
lessens  the  labor  of  reporting,  and  adds  to  both  speed  and  legibility. 
Three  words  can  be  phrased  while  two   of   them  are  being  written 
separately ;  hence  the  gain  in  speed.     But  tcords  separated  by  the 
slightest  rhetorical  pause,  or    mark  of  punctuation,  should  not   be 
joined  together.  This  adaptation  of  phraseography  to  syntax,  renders 
short-hand  notes  far  more  legible  than  they  would  otherwise  be. 

153.  The  first  word,  which  is  called  the  Leader,  should  be  written 
in    its  proper  position,  and  the  others  allowed  to  occupy  whatever 
place  the   phraseograph,  in  due  course,  may  give  them.     E.  g.,  /  is 
the  leader  of  the  phrase,  I-think-that;  give,  the  leader  in  give-me,  etc. 

151.  T5nt  many  phraseographs  can  be  so  written  that  both  the 
letii!>'r  and  word  to  which  it  is  joined,  shall  occupy  their  appropriate 
positions,  as  in  I-hnd. 

155.  The  necessity  phraseography  imposes  upon  the  writer  of 
locating  words  out  of  their  proper  positions,  occasions  no  draw- 
back upon  legibility.  The  reader  does  not  regard  the  position  of 


PHKASEOGHAPHY. 


4'J 


words  after  the  first  or  second,  but  relies  upon  the  context,  which 
is  a  sure  guide. 

156.  The  phraseograph  should  be  discontinued  when  an  unusual 
word  occurs,  or  one  which  must  be  written  in  its  proper  position  in 
order  to  be  unambiguous.    E.  g.,  give  him,  and  pay  me,  should  not 
be  joined,  for  fear  of  conflict  with  give-me,  and  _pay-hiin. 

157.  1  po.s.  (using  the  s-circle) :     Cause,  cease,    city,    office, 
oppose,  peace,  rise,  seen,  scene,  sing,  accede,  seem,  seed,  seek,  side, 
sight,  since,  police,    these,  wise,  song,   besides,  disease,   deceit, 
deceive,   decide,   design,  despise,   decease,   excite,   exceed,  false, 
insight,   incite,  inside,  likewise,  business,  mix,   offence,   scheme, 
Scotch,   sleep,  sweep,  epistle,  alike  (el),  misery,   reside,   resign, 
revise,  righteous,  sincere,  recite,  rejoice,  arise  (ar). 

158.  3  pos.:    Amuse,  soon,  accuse,  pass,  passage,  passive,  sad, 
sagacity,  anxiety,  nuisance,   induce,   excuse,   anxious,   animosity, 
atlas,  casual,  beauteous  (be-tes),  absence,  apostle,  south,  subdue, 
task,  tax,  absorb,  refuse,  house,  refusal,  rescue,  reduce. 

Also  write  (3  pos.),  anatomy,  animate;   (ar),  affair,  argue. 


159. 


WORD-SIGNS. 


Lawyer 
influence                       f    ~\    x_s?  g  —  N 
similar 

*-s\^-\ 

similarity 
mistake 
speech,  speak 

because 
sifjniticant-ance           .  °  o  ..    N  —  &  
insign  iflcan  t-ance 

v^^  U 

post-mark 
justice-of-the-peace 
continue 

falsehood 
company                         ,   ^n  , 
hence                            M  7  \        v  —  9 

U/-^ 

witness 
testimony 
spoke 

mostly 
December                               ^_  i 
those,  thus                      i^~P      (J~^  ( 

.v-...^^.>-. 

happiness 
holiness 
.  .  enlarge 

EXERCISE  10. 

160.  1.  A -rogue,  whose  name  is  Esau,  takes-away  the-cow  of 
Paul  the-rustic.  2.  lie-also  carries  off  some  of  Paul's  sheep,  and- 
designs  taking-his  dog  too.  3.  But-the  dog  barks,  and-Esau  fear- 
ing he-will-be-seen,  hastens  home.  4.  Paul  iuforms-an-officer, 


50  REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 

who,  with-the-help  of-the-police,  soon-succeeds  in  arresting-the 
rogue.  5.  The}— take -the  anxious  Esau  to-the  city,  and-lock  him 
in-the-south  room  of-the  jail.  6.  Esau  is  accused  by  Paul  of- 
having  carried  off-his  live-stock.  7.  Esau  denies  all  knowledge  of- 
the  affair,  and-goes  to  seek-the  advice  of  counsel.  8.  He-goes-to- 
the  office  of-the  sagacious  Scotch  lawyer,  Jackson,  who,  sitting 
pensive  in-his  chair,  asks-him  what  he-wishes.  9.  I-have  come, 
says  Esau,  to  induce  you  to-argue  in-my  behalf  in-the-cause  in- 
which  I-am-accused  by  Paul.  10.  But-the  lawyer,  refusing  to- 
help-him,  says,  I-think-you- will-never  pay  me.  11.  At-the  sight, 
however,  of-the  rogue's  pile  of-money,  Jackson  informs-him  that- 
his  side  of-the-case  is-the-right-side.  12.  Esau,  rejoicing  exceed- 
ing]}^ says  he-hopes  it-is-no-mistake.  13.  The-cause  comes  on 
for  hearing  before-a-jury  and-a  justice-of-the-peace,  whose-name 
is  Isaac.  14.  The  -la  wyer  Jackson  thinks  because  both-the  Justice 
and-the-accused  are  Jews,  that-it-would-be-a  wise  scheme  to- 
have-the  Squire  dismiss-the-jury,  and-with-no-help  to  hear  and- 
decide  the-cause.  15.  Hence  the-accused,  by-his-lawyer,  moves- 
the  Squire  that-this-be-carried  out;  aud-the- Justice  so  deciding, 
thc-jury  goes.  1(J.  The-Justice  sits  aud-hcars  the -testimony  of- 
each  witness  in-the-case,  which-is  altogether  insufficient  to  show 
that-the-accused  is-the  thief.  17.  Tlie-lawyer  thinks-it  useless  to- 
make-a  speech,  aud-so  leaves-the-case  wholly  at-the  disposal  of- 
the-Squire.  18.  The-Justice  says  the-accused  may  rise  up,  and- 
Esuu  does-so  with-no-1'ear.  10.  The-Justice  also  sa}*s:  "The- 
bulk  of-the  testimony  is  insufficient  to  show-you  to-be-the  th  ef ; 
but  I-rather  think-that- the  testimony  is  mostly  wrong,  20.  Hence, 
what-I-decide  in-tliis-case  is-this;  that-you  continue  in-jail  for- 
two-weeks,  and-also  that-you  pass  two-weeks  ou-the  public  rock- 
pile!"  (8rn.;;os.) 

161.  As-to-liis  design  in-seeking-the  house  of-the  justice-of- 
the-peace,  the-witness  spoke-a-falsehood  iu-giviug-his  testimony 
to-the-jury.  (7  times  in  2  in.) 


— When  practicing  write  the  characters  as  closely  together  as  con- 
venient, forming-  them  somewhat  smaller  than  is  natural  for  you.  This 
practice  contributes  both  to  speed  and  ease. 


162. 


THK    SliZ-CIHCLK. 
TRANSLATE 


51 


LESSON     XL 


THE  SEZ-CIRCLE,  EMP,  AND  COALESCENTS. 


163. 


System 

enthusiast 

successes 

ambiguous 

weave 

wife 


camp 

ambitious 

sympathize 

endow 

wing 

Quebec 

barrier 

exquisite 

walk. 

164.  The  syllables  sis,  sys,  so/.,  ccs,  sus,  and  others  similar. 
arc  denoted  by  a  hirme  circle,  as  in  sijxti'in  and  successes. 

Write:  Cases,  paces,  necessary,  success,  sncci-ssor,  subsist, 
decisive,  desist,  excess,  excessive,  exercise,  exist,  hypothesis, 
necessity,  insist,  system,  emphasis,  emphasize,  analysis  (el). 
Mississippi,  Texas,  Jesus,  exercises,  successes,  accessory,  axis, 


52  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 

diagnosis,  enthusiast,  recess,  suspicious,  thesis,  possessor,  Moses; 
1  pos.,  exhaust. 

^-^  EMP. 

165.  The  cognates  pe  and  be,  when  occurring  after  em,  are 
sometimes  indicated  by  a  shading  of  this  consonant,  as  in  camp,  or 
ambitious.    This  thickened  em  is  called  emp,  and  has  the  force  of 
em-pe,  or  em-be. 

166.  Write:     Pump,  ample,  camp,   campaign,   damp,    encamp, 
example,    lamp,   lump,    sample,    sympathy,    sympathize,    temple, 
ambitious,  imbecile,  ambassador,  ambiguity,  ambiguous,  embark, 
embellish,    embezzle,    empire,     limp,    pomp,     symbol,    symptom, 
thump. 

TABLE    OF    COALESCENTS. 

167.  The  signs  here  given  have  the  force  of  the  full-faced  type 

in  the  corresponding  words. 

i 

LONG.  SHORT. 

W  SERIES.  We  !i         walk         with  '!         wot 

If  I! 

ci>*  cib 

•wave          *•*          woke         wet  :!         worst 


was  <>*  •woo  twang       *•"'       wool 

T  T 

ye  i'l  yawn         yi  1!         yon 

•'•'  fl 

•*:  J"  u;  !rt 

yea  •£-'  yoke         yet  ii        young 


you  yam  •***" 

TRIPHTHONGS.  wife  H      wound 

MNEMONIC    FIGURES. 

W  dash  coalesces ts  bow  to  right.      yT/'    "©)/      Y  dash  coalescents  bow  upward. 
"   dot  "     "     left.      Yi         Jy      "  dot  "  "   downward. 


COALESCKXTS.  53 

168.  The    unobstructed   consonants   w   and    y    are    commonly 
called  coalesct-nts,  from  the  quality  \vhich  they  possess  of  readily 
uniting,  or  coalescing,  with  the  vowel  sounds.     The  double  sounds 
ice,  ye,   yon,  etc.,  formed  by  combining  w  or  y  with  a  succeeding 
vowel,  are  frequently  expressed  by  a  small  semi-circle  written  in 
the  three  vowel  places,  as  wa  in  wace,  ya  in  yarn. 

169.  Write:     Dwell,   wade,   duke,   hew,   mule,    muse,    quack, 
^squeeze,    wed,   wet,    wood,    Hugh,   Julius,    Luke,    Celia,    Delia, 
Eugenia,  Utah. 

170.  When  convenient,  first  and  third  place   coalescents  and 
diphthongs  are  joined  to  the  consonant  stems  in  connection  with 
which  they  occur,  as  in  weave,  wife,  endoic,  highly. 

171.  Write:     Walk,   wash,  equip,   ice,    endow,    Irish    (shay), 
irony   (ar),   item,    liquid,   war,    weave,    wife,   wit,   wing,    Idaho, 
Quebec,  ague,  dew,  nephew,  weed,  widow,  wipe. 

Omitting  the  coalescents:  Acquiesce,  anguish,  annual  (el), 
avenue,  barrier,  exquisite,  genial  (el),  ingenious,  languish, 
luxurious,  requisite,  tedious;  3  pos.,  cube,  cubic,  duel. 

PHRASEOGKAPHY. 

172.  The  principles  of  abbreviation  explained  in  this  lesson  are 
also  made  use  of  in  phraseography.     In-^v  may-be,  for  example, 
^— -,  the  sign  for  may,  is  shaded  to  denote  the  following  ^^  be. 
i— -N  Emp  iu  this  case  is  in  reality  an  abbreviated  phraseograph,  and 

is  called  a  phrase-sign.  The  words  "is-said"  are  expressed  by 
the  phrase-sign  sezde,  which  is  obtained  by  enlarging  the  circle  in 
said.  A  phrase-sign  is  a  contracted  outline  representing  a  number 
of  words  as  though  they  were  but  so  many  syllables ;  whereas  a 
phraseograph  is  obtained  by  merely  linking  a  number  of  words 
together. 

173.  The  coalescent  and  diphthongal  signs  are  always  written 
in  a  vertical  or  horizontal  position,  and  do  not,   like  the  dash 
vowels,    adapt  themselves  to  their  consonant    stems  by  always 
being  written  at  right  angles  with  them. 

174.  The  sez-circle  should  be  written  several  times  larger  than 
the  simple  s-circle,  so  as  to  be  readily  distinguishable  from  it. 


54                               REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

175.                                 WORD    AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 

/  Important-ce 
improve-d-ment                                             ^^               _             Impossible 
simple-y                         x^s              (f  S      *o     1         Oi   "s     temperance-ate 

quiet 
acquit                              1 
acute                                    |    1  

senior 
^-^"N      x        /    x--\  junior 
L£.je>^...J  failure 

—United  States                                       I 
high,  eye                                               .. 
height                                 Of 

higher 
ir\       v^v          M      highway,  Iowa 
./  /.  /„.  idea 

,.-  howsoever 
white 
yet                                        H 
^      ..L.Y.... 

uniform 
unite-ity 
«rf»«««»7f<(c/£V(««a  Europe 

„    water                               |T 
quick 

^^^           /-\         ye,  year-s 
^              A      ^eiV    beyond 
is-seen 

what 

is-said                                     | 
highly                              x-\  /    ^s  — 
it-is-simply                    j-^        '       sj-*. 

is-his,  his-is,  is-as 
as-has,  as-is,  as-his,     ^~\ 
has-his                                      f. 
as-soon-as                               .  O_  V-V 

_^        this-is 
6X"         ^  ^       this-system 
,.,.\-?.  gives-us 

./•\                            ls-such 

/^    1    (~)  flf~\     takes-us 
/          L-VX^(..VL^_  loves-us 

EXERCISE  11. 

176.  1.  You-raay-write-this  and-all-succeeding  exercises  with 
red  ink,  if-you-wish,  but-we-would-rather  j'ou-would-use  simply 
tlic'-cominon  ink.  2.  The-Yankee's  Irish  wife  said  she  saw-a-large 
lamp  sitting  on-the  top  of  the  white  temple.  3.  Our  temperance- 
speaker  possesses  a-yenius  for  war,  aud-is-quick  in-wit,  with- 
wliieli  he-unites  much  irony.  4.  Ile-has-an  idea  of  uniting  Texas, 
Iowa,  Idaho,  ami-Utah  by-a-comuum  highway,  but-the-thing  is- 
simply-impo.ssible.  5.  This-is-our  regular  summer  uniform,  and- 
is-seen-in-the  Uniteil-States-camps  always  at-this-time  of  year, 
but-is-never-to-be  seen-in  Europe.  (!.  lie-loves-us,  and-it-may- 
be  that-t hat-is  why  he-wouhl-have  us  enjoy  so-many  of-the 
exijuisite  views  in  Utah.  7.  Hugh  takes-us  to  see-many  sample 
dwellings  on-the  avenue,  but  1-think-that-many-of-them  lack- 
some  necessary  improvements.  8.  How-many-years  will-it-be, 
(lo-yon-thinU,  ln'1'ore-this-system  will-have  come-into  common 
use  iu-the  United-States,  especially  in-the  large  cities?  9.  Our 
sagacious  j list ice-of-the- peace  subsists  by  hearing  and-deciding 
various  petty  cases.  (5  m). 


DOUBLE   CONSONANTS.  55 

.177.  That-the-health  of-the  United-States  army  may-be-im- 
proved,  it-is-important-that  all-officers  should  set-an  example  of- 
temperance  to  inferiors.  (11  times  in  3  m). 

178.  TRANSLATE. 


^"See  page  184  for  the  sign  for  "  nevertheless." 


LESSON  XII. 


DOUBLE  CONSONANTS.— THE  L-HOOK. 

179.  The  liquids  I  and  /•,  by  reason  of  the  vowel  element  which 
they  possess,  partially  coalesce  with  other  consonants  which 
immediately  precede  them:  e.  g.,  I  unites  very  nearly  with  p  in 
play,  and  .with  /in  fly;  r  unites  closely  with  p  in  pry,  and  with  /  in 
offer.  These  consonant  double-sounds  are  of  very  frequent  occur- 
rence in  our  language,  and  are  usually  expressed  by  a  modification 
of  the  stem  of  the  first  consonant. 


56  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

THE    L-HOOK. 

180.     The  consonants  of  the  1-hook  series  are: 

Pel  bel  tel  del  chel  jel    kel  gel    fel   vel    thl  thel    shel    (upward). 


=•_  V.  .  . 


blow  bowl  glass  settle  sickle  playful  ankle    nickel  bushel  collegiate 

181.  To   express  the   added  I,   straight  consonant  letters  are 
written  with  a  small  hook  at  the  beginning,  placed  on  the  right, 
or  s-circle  side:  e.  g.,  this  character  \  ,  called  pel,  has  the  force  of 
pe-lay,  as  in  playful.    This  hook  is  written  within,   or  following 
the  direction  of  curved  letters. 

182.  These  hooked,  or  double  letters,  are  vocalized  like  other 
consonant  stems,  as  in  blow,  or  glass.     But  the  double  letter  is  not 
used   if  the   vowel    occurs  between    the   two    consonant    sounds 
denoted   by  it;  e.  (/.,  in  bowl,  the  hook  cannot  be  employed,  the 
vowel   o  coming  between   be   and   lay;  but   in   blow,   the   double 
consonant  bei    is   used,  no   vowel  occurring  between  be   and  the 
liquid,  o,  the  only  vowel  in  the  word,  being-final. 

183.  The    s-circle   is    prefixed    to   double   consonants    of    the 
1-hook   series  by  being  written  within  the  hook,  as  in   settle  and 
sickle. 

184.  The    adjective   ending  ful   is    usually   expressed  by    the 
double  consonant/^-/,  as  \i\  playful. 

185.  All  hooked  consonants  should  be  written  with  one  stroke 
of  th<j.  pfii.     This  practice  not  only  increases  the  speed  of  writing, 
but  lessens  the  liability  to  form  the  hook  too  large  or  too  cramped. 

186.  AVriU::      Ankle,    angle,    assemble,    assembly,    available, 
batik-,  black,  blame,  blameless,  blank,  blush,  chapel,  circle,  claim, 
cla<-,  clergy,  climax,  close,  club,  clumsy,  clothe,  declaim,  diploma, 
double,  emblem,  employ,   enclose,  English,  entitle,  fable,  faculty, 
festival,  imply,    implicit,  globe,  legal,  illegal  (el),  inflame,   level, 
local,  minulc,   admirable,  novelty,  noble,  oblige,  obstacle,  parable, 
place,    pieti'ie,    poetical,     radical,    reflect,    stable,    staple,    table, 
technical,  tenable,   total,  dimple,   unable,  social,   syllable,  delicacy, 


THE   I.-KOOK.  5? 

uncle,  variable,  vital,  vocal,  ability,  Florida,  display,  disclaim, 
uisclose,  exclaim,  invisible,  possible,  visible,  academical,  acclim- 
atize, amiable,  amicable,  bashful,  Bible,  blemish,  bliss,  block, 
blossom,  cattle,  chemical,  classify,  closet,  coeval,  collegiate,  couple, 
culpable,  declivity,  despicable,  devil,  displace,  dissemble,  Episcopal, 
fallible,  fatal,  flesh,  fling,  flour,  fluency,  foretell  (ar),  gable, 
glimpse,  gloom,  horrible,  invariable,  inviolable,  jingle,  joyful, 
label,  miserable,  naval,  nimble,  pistol,  placid,  plague,  plank, 
plastic,  plausible,  pliable,  pliant,  plum,  plump,  plus,  ply,  rival, 
shelf,  shingle,  smuggle,  stubble,  subtile,  survival,  tackle,  tangle, 
terrible,  tickle,  tumble,  typical,  village",  vehicle,  wrinkle,  Clarence, 
Hannibal,  Clara,  Flora,  Florence ;  (using  ar)  clear,  clerk,  declare, 
implore,  deplore,  desirable,  ramble,  irresistible  (sez) ;  (vocalize) 
applause,  bleak,  clay,  clue,  fleece,  glue,  plume,  ply,  Abel,  Michael, 
Mabel,  blue;  1  pos.  audible,  awful,  clock,  clog,  gloss,  clause, 
climb,  calling,  evil,  feeble,  initial,  liable,  likely,  official,  please, 
reply,  title,  idle;  3  pos.  allowable,  anatomical,  clash,  clasp, 
pupil,  suitable,  affable. 


187 


WORD  AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 
1  Pos.  till,  2  tell,  it-will,  3  until,  at-alL 

1  comply,  2  people,  3  apply. 

I  belong,  2  able,  3  blew. 

1  follow,  awful,  2  full,  3  flew.. 


t  each-will,  2  ,7hich-will,  children,  3  much-will. 


I  call,  equal,  2  difficult-?,  3  clew. 


A! 

*'      must-be. 


58 


KEPOKTIXG   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


devetop-ment 
glory,  <__eglorl 
bumble 

recollect 

respect-able 

quality 

respectability 

collect 

influential. 


188 


EXERCISE  12. 


1.  Philosophy  will  clip-an angel's  wtn?»s.    2.  It-will  never-do  at- 

ull  ior-you  lo-cinpluisize  the-v.Toug  syllable  in-class.  3.  Official 
people  say  they -will  in-time  become-respectable  anti-influential, 
which-vvill-be  a-glorious-thing,  if  each-will  at-the  same-time  be 
humble,  4.  You-should  use  this-system  as-soou-as  you-are-able; 
much-will-be-the-time-that  it-will-save-you,  because-it-is-as 
speedy  as-any,  besides  being-far  easier.  (1m  45s). 


189.  TIIK-ASl'     A.ND-TIIE     KAGLK. — yESOP. 

1.  This-fable  tells  of-a  snake  declaring  war  on-an-eagle,  and- 
how  they-engage  in-fearful  battle.  2.  They-display  no  delicacy, 
nevertheless  they-never-make-the  air  vocal  with-the-clash  of-arms 
or-the  thump  of-clnmsy  clubs.  3.  The-snake  has -the -ad  vantage, 
and-will-likely  kill-tlie-poor  eagle.  4.  Bnt-a  rustic  sees  them, 
and-hnrryiiig,  he-comes-up  and -looses  the-coil  of -the-snake,  and- 
aliows  the-cagle  to  ny  away.  5.  The-escape  of-the  eagle  inflames 
the-snake,  so-that.-be  allows  his  poison  to  fly  into-the  water 
bottle  of-tlie  rustic.  »J.  Tlie-rustie,  knowing-nothing  of-thc- 
possibh;  v'vil,  -u>|)lies  the-bottle  to-his  lips.  7.  But-the  eagle, 
living  back,  delivers  him,  by-giving  his  right-arm  a-blow  with-his 
wing,  -.nid-by  sei/.mg  the-bottle  with-his  claws,  and-canying  it- 
up  iulo-tlie  sky,  (">iu  ;>i')s). 

190.  They- \vill-continne   to-corne    uutil-you    tell-him-that   it- 
vvil!    most-likcly-ljo     unnecessary    to-collect-the-class    together. 
',Q>  times  in  '^m). 


HIE    L-HOOK. 


TRANSLATE. 


*  X  N    ^          7       I"       "^ 

.yl  ............  -^..-r/r./b  .......  \. 


...l^  -----  .....  <<. 


LESSON  XIII. 


THE     R-HOOK     SERIES    OF     DOUBLE    CONSONANTS- 

SEC.  I. 


'- 


Per         ber         ter         der         oher         jer        ker        jer 


praf       gray     destroy    exaggerate      criticism       programme 


SO  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD 

193.  Another  initial  hook,  written  on  the  left  of  the  consonant, 
or  side  opposite  the  1-hook,  indicates  the  added  r  as  in  pray,  or 
gray.    The  alphabetic  letters,  modified  by  the  attachment  of  this 
hook,  are  denominated  per,  ber,  ter,  etc.,   and  have  the  force  of 
pe-ar,  be-ar,  etc.    This  hook  is  joined  to  all  the  consonants  except 
3S,  ze,  ar,  ing,  way,  yea,  hay,  ray,  and  emp. 

194.  In  order  that  the  r-hook  may  be  prefixed  to  a  medial  con- 
sonant, a  preceding  s-circle  is  written  out  of  its  usual  position : 
e.  (/.,  in  destroy,  the  circle  is  placed  on  the  left  side  of  de  in  order 
that  the   r-hook  may  appear  to  be  attached  to  te.    The  hook  is 
sometimes   expressed,  also,  by  retracing  a  preceding  consonant, 
as  in  programme. 

195.  Write,  using  the  r-hook  and  vowels :     Brace,  breech,  bribe, 
broil,   gray,  grow,  brake,   praise,  pray,   tribe,  utter,  acre,  brawl, 
brow,  caprice,   crape,   crawl,   crevy,  cross-eyed,  crow,  dray,  grape, 
grass,  growl,   loiter,   odor,  oyster,  pauper,  powder,  prize,  prose, 
pry,  quaker,  slaughter,  taper,  trace,  trail,  turmoil,  ultra,  Beatrice, 
Bertha,    Grace;     1  pos.  Greece,  cry,  creek,  Greek.      Without  the 
vowels:       Abbreviate,    approach,    appropriate,     attorney,    break, 
baker,  broke,  breathe,  brevitv,  breach,  bring,  courage,  crazy,  create, 
creator,  critic,  cruel,  crusade,  crystal,  currency  decrease,  democra- 
cy, depress,  destroy,   diagram,   distress,  disturb,  drug,  dress,  drill, 
drink,  drop,  drum,  drunk,  educator,  embrace,  encourage,  exagger- 
ate, extra,    extreme,  criticism,    proceed,    trump,    gradual,    grasp, 
gravity,   grocer,    impress,    industry,   industrious,    keeper,    labor, 
laborious,  ledger,  liberal,  lucre,  ludicrous,  major,  maker,  matrimo- 
ny, microscope,  mistress,  Nebraska,  neighbor,  operate,  operator, 
paper,   parallel,  precious,   presence,  press,  pearl,  prepare,  pretty, 
precede,    process   (sex.),  produce,    programme,  progress,   propose, 
prosper,  provoke,  redress,  reproach,  soldier,  treason,  triumph,  va- 
por, vigor,  abridge,  aggregate,  altar,  alternate,  apostrophe,    April, 
arbitrary,  alter,  ardor,  aristocracy,  ascribe,  astrology,  banker,  bar- 
ber,   beggar,    betray,    produce,    brass,   broker,  broom,  brush,  bur- 
lesque,   butcher,  cathedral,  charter,  chemistry,  cherish,  chronome- 
ter,   copper,  courageous,    courtesy,    cracker,   grub,     crayon,   crib, 
crimson,  criticise,   crook,  crop,  crucify,  crumb,  crush,  crutch,  cy- 
press,   deter,   Deuteronomy,   dexterous,    dictator,  digress,  dipper, 
cream,  Lrespas.s,  fibre,  Peter,  garter,  gracious,  grass,  grumble,  bar- 


THE   R-HOOK. 


61 


bor,  Hebrew,  inebriate,  ingratiate,  intrigue,  laboratory,  literary, 
messenger,  ministry,  monogram,  mutter,  nectar,  obtrusive,  patiol, 
pernicious,  personate,  poker,  trustee,  trap,  trick,  trim,  tropic, 
trunk,  Ambrose,  Andrew,  Edgar,  Patrick;  1  pos.  agree,  crime, 
cross,  daughter,  draw,  dream,  dry,  across,  eager,  increase,  preach. 


196.  WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

<\        f 

1  Pos.  appear,  2  principle-al,  3  practice-al. 

1  liberty,  2  re-member,  3  brother,  number. 

1  try,  2  truth,  3  true. 

1  doctor,  2  dear,  3  during,  dark. 

1  each-are,  2  which-are,  3  much-are. 

1  Christian-ity,  2  care,  occur,  3  cure. 

2  danger,  3  larger. 


Correct 

character 

degree 

liberty-of  -the-peo- 

ple 

Hberty-of-the-press 
Member  -  of  -  Con- 
gress 


EXERCISE  13. 


accuracy 

Inaccurate 

Dear-Sir 

Member-of-the 

Bar 
Member-of  -the 

legislature 
practicable. 


197.  1.  He-that-takes-a  wife  takes  care.  2.  If-you- would 
create  something,  you-must-be-something.  3.  Prayer  is-the  voice 
of-faith.  4.  All  things  with-which  we-deal  preach  to-us.  5.  What 
vigor  absence  adds  to-love!  G.  Characters  never  change.  7.  The- 
drama  is-the-book  of-the  people.  8.  The  eye  sees  what-it  brings 


•62  REPORTING  STYLE  OF   SHORT-HAND. 

the-power  to  see.  9.  Genius  is-the  faculty  of  growth.  10.  Life 
is-a  comedy  to-lum  who  thinks,  and-a  tragedy  to-him  who  feels. 
11.  The-truth  of-truths  is  love.  (2  m). 

THE-CROW   AND-THE    PITCHER. — ^SOP. 

198.  1.    A-crow,  perishing  for-lack  of- water,   sees-a  pitcher, 
and-hoping  that-it  possesses  some  of-the  liquid,  flies  to-it  with- 
much  joy.    2.    On  reaching  it  he-sees,   to-his  sorrow,   that-the- 
water  is-of  so-small  depth  that-he-is  totally  unable  to-reach  it,  so- 
that  all-his  industry  avails  nothing.    3.  Later,  he-collects  as-many 
rocks  as-it-is-possible  for-him  to-carry,  and-with-his  beak  drops 
them  slowly  into-the-pitcher,  until  he-brings-the-water  up  so  high 
that-it-is-possible  for-him  to-reach  it,  and-in-this-way  saves-his 
life.     (2m  30  s). 

199.  A-member-of-the-bar,     on-becoming    a-Member-of-Con- 
gress,    spoke  in  praise  of-the  liberty-of-the-press,   and-said-that 
as-long-as-it  published  but-the  simple-truth,   the-liberty-of-the- 
people  would-be  in-no-danger.     (5  times  in  2  m) . 

200.  TRANSLATE. 


THK   R-HOOK.  63 


LESSON   XIV. 


201.  THE  R-HOOK  SERIES— SEC.  2. 

Fer         ver         thr         ther          sher       zhr         mer 


202.  Since  a  hook  can  be  attached  to  but  one  side  of  a  curved 
letter,  and  since  the  r  and  1  hooks  are  written  on  opposite  sides 
of  consonant  stems,  the  natural  positions  of  certain  curves  are 
reversed  in  order  to  render  these  hooks  distinguishable.     These 
curves  are  ef,  ve,  ith,  and  the,  which,  when  the  r-hook  is  prefixed, 
are  written  fer,  ver,  thr,  and  ther,  as  shown  in  the  engraving,  and 
appear  like  ar,  way,  es,   and  ze,  with  an  initial  hook.    But  these 
characters,  it  will  be  observed,  are  obtained  by  reversing  fel,  vel, 
thl,  and  thel,  which  is  done  in  order  that  the  hook  may  be  brought 
to  the  left  side.    This  practice  gives  rise  to  no  ambiguity,  since, 
as  has    been  stated,  the   r-hook  is  not  attached  to    ar,  way,  es, 
and  ze. 

203.  To  express  the  added  ar,  em  and  en  are  modified  by  both  pre- 
fixing the  hook,  and  thickening  the  stem,  thus  f— Mner,  and  <*_^ner. 
No  ambiguity  results  from  this  shading  of  the  consonants  em  and 
en,  since  no  hook  is  attached  to  either  emp  or  ing. 

204.  In  some  outlines,  where  it  cannot  be  conveniently  joined, 
the  hook  is  omitted,  the  shaded  em  simplj'  being  used  in  lieu  of 
mer,  as  in  farmer. 

205.  Write :     Rumor,   tremor,  Homer,   energy,  dinner,  banner, 
exhonorate,    lunar,    over,    farmer,    generous,    numerous,  tanner, 
merge,  offer,  philosopher,  phrase,  camphor,  Christopher,  Francis, 
Frank,  average,  Denver,   favor,  oversight,  Friday,  silver,  traverse, 


REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 


leisure,  measure,  pressure,  treasure,  censure,  exposure,  machinery, 
aniversary,  diverge,  diverse,  liver}',  mauceuver,  Luther,  Lutheran, 
dishonor,  perverse,  thresh,  throng,  verb,  verge,  verse,  Oliver,  Vir- 
ginia, wager,  Arthur,  Bertram,  Oscar,  Frank,  Roger,  Victor,  treach- 
erous, favorite,  proverb,  tributary,  gather,  sheriff,  umbrella,  re- 
press, slipper,  spider,  sugar  (shay),  tiger,  tragedy,  tragic,  traitor, 
probate,  problem,  profess,  professor,  prolong,  propriety,  recur, 
prairie,  preface,  premier,  premise,  premium,  primary,  prior. 
Vocalize,  throw;  1  pos.  authorize,  authority,  crisis  (sez),  decree, 
former,  fever,  free,  preside,  prime,  minor,  oppress,  oppressive, 
precise  (sez),  price,  Christmas;  3  pos.  abstruse,  address,  adverse, 
affirm,  apprehend,  apprehensive,  presume,  scatter,  assure,  grew, 
troop. 

206.  WORD   AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 

f\        I  Pos.  author,  2  three,  3  through. 


1  either,  2  their,  there,  they-are,  3  other. 


1  Mr.,  mere,  remark-able,  2  more,  mercy,   3  humor. 


1  near,  nor,  honor,  '2  manner,    3   owner. 


From 

every, very 
pleasure 

in-referenoo-to 

in-respect-to 
honorable 


commercial 
University 
San  Francisco. 


EXERCISE   H. 

207.     1.  He-remarks  tn-liis  brother-members  that-to  encourage 

such-pleasures  is-in-a-high  derive  dangerous  to-every-principie 
of-Christia'.i-libiTty.  L'.  Thc-doctor's  practice  in-San-Francisco 
gradually  incivasi-s,  and-his  skill  lm>-no  parallel .  3.  The-author 
of-thc  ludicrous  ''Pivam  of-the  Major's  Daughter"  exaggerates 
boyund-mcasiir*!  in -speaking  of -the-criines  of-Avar.  (1  m  15s) 


THE   R-HOOK.  65 

THE-DOG   AXD-THE    SHADOW. — jESOP. 

208.  1.  A-dog  crossing-a  bridge  over-a-creek  with-a  piece  of- 
flesli  in-his  mouth,  sees  his  own  shadow  in-the-water,  and-takes- 
it  for  that  of-some-other  dog,  with-a  piece-of  game  double  his 
own  in  size.  2.  He  -therefore  drops  his  own  piece,  and-furiously 
attacks-the-other  dog  with-the  view  of-taking-his  larger  piece 
from-him.  3.  He-thus  looses  both;  that-which  he-grasps  for  in- 
the-water,  because-it-was-a  shadow;  and-his  own,  because -the- 
creek  washes  it-away.  (2m). 

209-  1.  So  sad,  so  fresh,  the-days  that-are  no-more.  2.  You- 
arrive  at  truth  through  poetry,  and-I  arrive  at  poetry  through 
truth.  3.  Lay  a-bridge  of-silver  for-a  flying  enemy.  4.  What-is 
becoming  is  honorable,  aud-what-is  honorable  is  becoming. 
5.  The-eyes  of-other  people  are-the  eyes  that  ruin  us.  6.  Wise 
judges  are-we  of -each-other.  (1  in  30  s). 

210.  It-is-the-more  remarkable,  for  I-supposed  that-he-had 
too-much  honor  to-be  anthor-of-such-a  rumor  as-this  in-refer- 
euce-to  Oliver  the-philosopher.  (lu  times  in  3  m). 


TRANSLATE. 


66  REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  XV. 


212  THE    TRIPLE-CONSONANT  SERIES. 

8-pr         s-br  s-tr        s-dr         s-chr      B-jr       s-kr  s-gr 


Spree 

soaker 

cider 

suffer 

discourage 

subscrbe 


cradle 
enclosure 

shelter 

secrecy 

sister 

prescribe. 


213.  When  the  s-circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to  per,  the  hook  is 
omitted,  and  the  circle  written  oil  the  r-hook  side  of  the  consonant; 
thus,  the  character  \  sper  has  the  force  of  es-pe-ar,  as  in  spree. 

211.  The  triple  consonant  sper  is  more  easily  written  than 
though  the  circle  were  placed  within  the  hook;  and  it  wilf  not  be 
mistaken  for  \  spe  simply,  since  in  sper  the  circle  is  placed  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  consonant.  All  other  straight  steins  of 
the  r-hook  series  are  moditied  in  the  same  manner  to  express  a 
preceding'  s,  as  in  suakcr  and  cider. 

215.  But  when  the  circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to      ^\fer,  it  must 
be   written  within  the   hook,  as  in  suffer;  otherwise  it  would   be 
written     ^  so;  and  have  the  force  of  es-ar,  instead  of  es-ef-ar. 
The   same  principle   holds  true  of   all  curved  double  consonants, 
ver,  ther,  etc. 

216.  In  the  outlines  for   a  few  such  words  as  discourage  and 
xnliKi-riltf;  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  the  r-hook,  it  is  entirely 
omitted,  r  being  readily  supplied  from  the  context. 

217.  Write:     String,   spring,    struck,    strong,  scourge,    scribe, 
secrecy,   sober,  sister,  'suffer,  discourage,    discriminate,  disgrace, 
subscribe,    sacrifice,     scrub,    separate,     skirmish,    strap,     stress, 
stretch,    succor,     supercede,    superstitious,     supper,    supremacy, 


TRIPLE    CONSONANTS. 


67 


supreme;  1  pos.  strike,  prescribe,  scream;  3  pos.  scrap, 
scratch,  strew.  Vocalize,  strow,  stray,  streak.  Using  both  the 
1  aud  r  hooks:  agreeable,  brutal,  clamor,  clatter,  flatter,  flavor, 
proclaim,  travel,  triangle,  trouble,  verbal,  calibre,  chronicle, 
clapper,  clever,  clover,  cradle,  flutter,  girdle,  glitter,  grapple, 
inclosure,  perplex,  propel,  shelter,  trifle,  triple,  tropical,  scruple, 
struggle. 

218. 


WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


Merciful 
mortgage 
neighborhood 

proper-ty 
universal 
New-Hampshire 

West-Virginia 

disappear 

disagree 

express 
surprise 
suppress 


£^ 


overwhelm 
probable-ly 
probability 

forgive 

North-America 
South- America 

everlasting 
Strength  ,  exter- 
nal 
as-lt-were 

Scripture,  de- 
scribe 
secure 

such-are,  3  such 
were 


EXERCISE  15. 

219.  1.  Their-sisters  in-South- America  subscribe  for-the  Uni- 
versity papers  published  in  New-Hampshire  and-West-Virginia. 
2.  The-philosopher  expresses  surprise  at-the-large  number  ar- 
sacriflces  which-the  Scriptures  describe.  3.  America,  in-hci- 
is-fair  and-honorable,  and-has-no  troubles  with-other 
4.  Such-were-their  brutal  clamors for-more  of-the  silver 
that-we-had-to  suffer,  as-it-were,  a-cruel  scourge. 


dealings, 
peoples, 
treasure, 
(1m  30s). 

220.         THE-CEDAR    TREE    AND-THE    BRAMBLE. - 


-.ESOP. 


1.  A-cedar  tree,  bragging,  says-to-the  bramble,  "You-are 
useful  for-nothing  at -all,  but  in-all-places  people  use  me  for 
houses  and-stables."  2.  The-bramble  answers:  "You  poor  thing, 
if-you-would-but  remember-the  axes  and-saws  which-are  soon-to 
hew  you  to  pieces,  you-would-have-reason  to  wish  that-you-were- 
a  bramble  also,  as-I-am.  3.  Riches  bring  cares.  (1m  30s). 


68  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD 

4.  The-devil  can  cite  Scripture  for-his-purpose.  5.  Know  lion- 
sublime  it-is  to-suffer  and-be  strong.  6.  All  cruelty  springs  from 
weakness. 

221.  They-  will-set  out  on-the  fourth  Thursday  of-  April,  and- 
travel  from-North  to-South-America    for-pleasure  merely.      (15 
times  in  3m)  . 

222.  TRANSLATE. 


REMARK.— The  learner  is  liable  to  confound  these  two  hook8,  writing  I 
for  r  and  r  for  I.  A  mnemonic  aid  commonly  made  use  of  is  the  follow- 
ing: The  proper  side  of  the  consonant  stem  for  placing  the  l-hook  is  indi- 
cated by  bending  the  index  finger  of  the  left  hand;  and  for  placing  the 
r-7iook,  by  bending  the  same  finger  of  the  right  hand.  It  will  be  observed, 
too,  that  not  only  is  the  right  hand  (B-hand)  used  more  frequently  than 
the  left  (L-hand),  but  the  r-hook  is  used  more  frequently  than  the  I. 

NOTE. — To  the  professional  stenographer  a  knowledge  of  spelling  is  ab- 
solutely indispensable.  So  many  good  Short-hand  writers  fail  to  hold  a 
situation  on  account  of  deflcie  ncy  in  this  much  neglected  art,  that  it  is  a 
matter  of  prudence,  if  your  knowledge  is  imperfect  in  this  regard,  to  be- 
gin improving  it  at  once.  Learn  to  spell  words  with  your  pert  rather  than 
your  toutjue.  Written  spelling  is  more  important  to  the  reporter,  and  quite 
distinct  from  oral  spelling. 


THE  REL-HOOK,    ASPIRATE   TICK   AND   DOT. 


69 


LESSON  XVI. 


THE  REL-HOOK,  AND  THE  ASPIRATE  TICK  AND  DOT. 
223. 

Mel     nel        rel          ler      hw         hi          hr        hm  bn        hng 


224.  The  liquid  I  occurs  so  frequently  in  connection  with  ray, 
em,    and  en,    as  in    choral,    camel,  and  tunnel,    that  it  has  been 
found  expedient  to  denote  the  double   sounds  rl,  ml,  and  nl,  by 
attaching  a  large  initial  hook  to  the  stems  ray,  em,  and  en,  the 
double  letters  thus  obtained  being  named  mel,  nel,  and  rel. 

225.  A  large  initial  hook  attached  to  lay  signifies  that  ar  is  to 
be  added,  the  character  ler  being  equivalent  to  lay-ar,  as  in  color. 

226.  Write:     Animal,    tunnel,    signal,    penal,   color,   diagonal, 
finally,  family,  nominal,  original,  Colorado,  relish,  paternal,  relic, 
globular,     criminal,     colonel,     scholar,     necessarily,     centennial, 
abdominal,  analyze,  arsenal  (ar),  autumnal,   barrel,  canal,  chron- 
ology,   gallery,   jocular,   millennial,    millennium,   polar,    sentinel, 
spinal,   relate,   temporal  (emp),   tribunal,   venal,   Daniel.     1  pos. 
collar,   rely,    release,  reliance.     3  pos.  plural,  analogy. 

THE     ASPIRATE     TICK. 

227.  A  short   initial  tick,    derived  from  hay,    signifying   the 
aspirate  h,  and  so  written  as  to  form  an  acute  angle  with  the 


70  REPORTING  STYLE  OP   SHORT-HAND. 

consonant  to  which  it  is  joined,  is  prefixed  to  way,  el,  ar,  en,  em, 
ing,  kay  and  gay,  as  in  hale,  or  whisper. 

228.  Write:     Hang,  harp,   harm,  holiday,   whisper,    whiskey, 
hell,  hem,  homicide,   wheel,   whip,  whistle,   hair;    1  pos.  horse. 
Vocalize,  hare,  heal,  whale,  hum,  hale,  hall,  hire,  hollow. 

THE    ASPIRATE    DOT. 

229.  Hay,  when  medial,  sometimes  fails  to  make  a  good  angle 
by  its  junction  with  other  letters;  as,  for  instance,  when  it  occur* 
before  em.     In  such  cases  the  aspirate  is  signified  by  a  small  dot 
written  just  before  the  vowel,  as  in  Abraham,  mayhem. 

Using  the  dot:     Abraham,  Henry,  mayhem.     Omitting  the  dot: 
liither,  likelihood,  alcohol,  adhere. 

230.  WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


231.  EXERCISE  16. 

1.  A-thing-of  beauty  is-a  joy  forever.  2.  Custom  is-the-law  of 
fools.  3.  Faith  is-necessary  to  victory.  4.  Fear  has-many  eyes. 
5.  Gaiety  is-the  soul's  health;  sadness  is-its  poison.  6.  Her 
ample  page  rich  wilh-tlie  spoils  of-time.  7.  For  hope  is  but-the 
dream  of-those-that  Avake.  8.  Unto-the-pure  all  things  are  pure, 
9.  Innocence  is  always  unsuspicious.  10.  Kings  ought-to-be  kings 
in-all  things.  11.  Knowledge  is  power.  12.  Laugh  if-you-are 
wise.  13.  Ami-he  that-lives  to-live-forever  never  fears  dying. 
H.  To-live-long,  it-is-necessary  to-live  slowly.  15.  Study  to-be 
quiet.  (2iu  30s). 

232.  While-ihe  railway-car  is  traveling-to  Denver,  he -thinks- 
it-possiblc   for-the  colonel  to-ride  there  on  horse-back.     (15  times 
in  3m) . 


233. 


THE   W-IIOOK. 
TRANSLATE 


71 


LESSON    XVII. 


{34. 


THE  W-HOOK. 


,,  ^^C    O  s~*\          Wednesday 
.73.?;     S»R     wilderaess. 


235.  A  small  initial  hook,  representing  the  consonant  w,  is  at- 
tached to  lay,  ray,  em,  and  en,  the  characters  thus  formed  being 
named  wel,  wer,  wem,  and  wen. 

236.  The  w-hook  is  derived  from  the  coalescent  semi-circle 
c  weh,  which,  when  prefixed  to  these  consonants,  is  so  adapted  as 

to  form  a  hook.  The  w-hook  differs  essentially  from  the  r,  I,  and 
»W  hook  series.  The  w-hook  itself,  after  the  analogjr  of  the  s-cir- 
cle,  denotes  the  consonant  way;  e.  g.,  in  saz7  and  icail,  both  the 
circle  and  hook  are  read  before  lay.  Whereas,  in  the  other  series 
above  named,  the  hook  itself  does  not  represent  I  or  r,  -but  is  sim- 


72 


REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-ELAND. 


ply  a  modification  of  the  consonant  stem  to  denote  that  one  or  the 
other  of  these  liquids  is  to  be  added;  e.  g.,  the  character <_^_-  acre 
is  not  read  rake,  as  it  would  be  did  the  hook  itself,  which  is  formed 
first,  denote  r.  The  w-hook  is  itself  the  sign  for  w,  while  in  the 
double  consonant  (the  1,  r,  and  rel  hook)  series,  each  hooked  letter 
is  an  indivisible  character  representing  pi,  pr,  ler,  etc. 

237.  Write:  Quill,  quire,  quorum,  "swim,  ware,  wealth, 
Wednesday,  welfare,  wilderness,  wolf,  worm,  Edwin,  Walter,  Wil- 
liam, work,  worth,  worth}',  well,  willing,  window,  one,  wear,  warm, 
swear,  acquire,  beware.  Vocalize,  choir,  weary,  quail,  wall,  wine, 
wool. 


238. 


WORD   AND   PHRASE    SIGNS. 


1  Pos.  we-are,  2  where,  3  aware. 


1  while,  we-will,  2  well,  3  awhile. 


1  with-me,  2  we-may,  with-him,  3  with-whom. 


1  anywhere,  inquire-y,  2  nowhere,  3  unaware. 


we-mny-be 
as-well-as 
may-as-well,  in 
"iy 


welcome 

whensoever 

commonwealth 

with-reference-to 

with-respect-to 

for-the-sake-of. 


KXERCISK   17. 


230.     1.  Necessity  does  everything  well.   2.  We-are  near  wakinj 

when-we  dream  that-\v<-  dream.  3.  When-you-give,  give  with-* 
joy  ami-smiling.  4.  Hope  is-u-willin:r  slave.  5.  They  laugh  that- 
win.  i).  Law  should-be-like  de.'ith,  which  spares  no-one.  7.  Love 
may  hope,  \vliere  reason  wmild-de^pair.  8.  The-scholarly  colonel 
give^-us  rdialik1  iie\vs  witli-reference-to-the  Colorado  railroads. 
',).  The-pri/e  thi'-teaclier  offers  for-a  really  correct  exercise  is-a 
family  hor-e  of  hay  color,  aml-every  pupil  should  try  to  win-it  if- 


THE    W-IIOOK. 


73 


possible.  10.  There-is-no  harm  in-having-a  holiday  once-in-a 
while,  but  it-would-be  well  if-the  scholar  should-take-them  only 
rarely.  (2m  30s). 

THE    HARE    AXD-THE    TORTOISE. —  KSOT. 

240.  1.  Tlie  haro  one-day  laughs  at-the  stubby  legs  and-slow 
pace   of-the  tortoise.     2.  The-latter,  laughing,  said,  "Though-you 
travel  like-a  railway-car  I-will-win  iu-a-race  with-you."    3.  The 
hare,  deciniug  what-she  affirms  to-be-simply-impossible,  agrees  to- 
the  proposal.    4.   They-also  agree  that-the  fox  shall  choose  the- 
race-track,  and-fix  the-goal.    5.    On  Wednesday,  the-clay  which- 
the  fox  selects  for-the-race,  they-sct  out  together.     t>.    The-tor- 
toise  never  pauses  at-all,  but-travels  on-with-a  slow  and-uniform 
pace  until  she  finally  reaches  the-tree.     7.  The  hare,  relying  ou-his 
original  quickness,  has -no -anxiety  as-to-the  outcome  of-the-race, 
but  leisurely  eats    his  dinner  by-the   wayside    and -falls    asleep. 
8.   Finally,  waking  up,  and-moving  quickly  as-possible,  he-sees 
the-tortoise  already  at-the  goal,  and-quietly  dozing  there.     (3  m). 

241.  Beware  of -sitting  by-the  railway-car  window  while-we- 
are  crossing  over-the  dangerous  bridge.     (12  times  in  2  m). 

242.  TRANSLATE. 


74 


REPOUTIXG   STYLE   OP    SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON    XVIII. 


243. 

Pef 


THE  F-HOOK. 


bef       tef      def       chef    jef     kef      gef         hef 


Cough 

cave 

hoofs 

knave 

grief-ve 

dwarf 


strives 

rove 

heave 

prophesy 

havoc 

provincial. 


244.  A  final  hook,  signifying  ef  or  ve,  is  written  on  the  s-circle 

side  of  all  straight  letters;  e.  g.  the  character  A-e/ signifies  kay-ef,  as 
in  cough,  and  kay-ve,  as  in  care.  A  following  s-circle  is  written 
within  the  hook,  as  in  hoofs  or  strives. 

245.  Using  the  f-hook  and  vowels:     Cuff,  cough,   beer,  cave, 
Jove,  devout,  crave,  hive.     Without  vowels:     Bereave,  beverage, 
cuff,  bluff,  cavalry,  cavil,  deaf,  dwarf,  gave,  glove,  gruff,  incentive, 
lithograph,  octave,  primitive,  prophesy,  havoc,  province,  provincial, 
puff,  river,    roof,  rouirh,  relief  (rel),  scoff,  sensitive,  staff,  strife, 
strive,  tough,  David,  Stephen;     1  pos.  drive,  grieve,  grief. 

24(J.  Ei-ni.  The  fact  that  either  one  of  any  two  cognate  sounds 
may  be  represented  by  the  ,-ame  sign  without  danger  of  ambiguity, 
has  been  fully  shown  in  the  case  of  the  s  and  z  circle.  The  same 
principle  applies  in  the  c;i<i;  of  the  f-hook,  which  is  used  for  either 
of  the  two  sound-;,  /  and  c,  without  ambiguity,  as  in  the  sentence, 

"They  may  well  ' ',  considering  their  cause  ofc — ?"     The  student 

will  observe  that  the,  f-iioi-k,  which  is  always  written  on  the 
s-circle  side  of  con-unain^,  appears  on  the  left  side  of  hay  and  ray, 
as  in  mi-p.  and  hcurp.  As  thi-  hook  i's  attached  to  straight  letters  only, 
the  alphabetic  ef  and  ^  ve  inii.-t  be  used  whenever  a  curve 


THE   F-HOOK. 


75 


immediately  precedes  them.  E.  g.  knave  is  written  with  the  full- 
length  eii-ve,  since  the  hook  cannot  be  used  for  ve  after  the 
curve  en. 


247. 


WORD   AND    PHRASE  SIGNS. 


I          1  Pos.  ought-to-have,  it-oughHo-have,  2 -whatever,  3  out-of, it-would- have. 
1  which-ought-to-have,  2  whichever,  which-have,  3  which-would-have. 
1  such-ought-to-have,  2  such-have,  3  such-would-have. 
1  perfect,  2  proof,  prove,  3  approve. 
1  each-will-have,  2  which-will-have,  3  much-will-have. 


^..L 


Careful-ly 

iJetyef-ve 

tfiffer^nt-ce 

everlasting-life         /  /**    ^~ 
just-had                     W        /^-^ 
must-give  ,.. ;! — 

laws-of-life 

laws-of-health 

must-have 

must-do 
must-be 
must-come 


try-to-have 

ever-and-ever 

for-ever-and-ever 

poverty 

derive 

twelve,  it-will-have 

set-off,  2  set-forth 


e_        {}         which-are-to-hv,  3  wch- 
S     /  were-to-have. 

.... ..(-?..,  .V-. .....   such-are-to-hv.,  3  sucli- 


were-to-hv. 


said-to-have 
whoever,  who-have. 


EXERCISE  18. 

248  THE    WIDOW    AXD-THE    SHEEP.  —  ^ESOP. 

1.  A-poor  widow  had-one  solitary  sheep.     2.  At  shearing-time, 


its  flt'ece  n'.i'i-to  avoid  pajTing  out-a-very  large 
sum  of-money,  she-took-it  with  her  shears  so  unskillfully,  that- 
writh-the  fleece  she-took-the  flesh.  3.  The-sheep,  wri  thing  because- 
of-the  injury,  said,  "Why  do-you  do  me  so-much  harm?  4.  What- 
weight  does-my-life  add  to-the  wool?  5.  If-you-wish  my  flesh, 


76  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

there-is-the  butcher  who-will  kill  me  in-a  trice,  fi.  But  if-you- 
wish  to-take  my  fleece  only,  there-is-the  shearer,  who-will  shear 
me  and-do  no  harm."  7.  Much  loss  may-be-caused  by-making 
too-small  an-outlay.  (2m). 

249.  You-should  obey    the -laws-of -health  if-you-would-have 
relief  now;  and-be  governed  by  wise  proverbs,  if-you-would-have 
everlasting-life.     (8  times  in  2m). 

250.  TRANSLATE. 


O       V^x     f  //       O 

•W-^ t-.o^..*.^...... 


NOTE. — Most  pupils  make  the  light  lines  heavier  than  is  proper,  the  re- 
sult of  too  much  pressure  of  the  pen  upon  the  paper.  It  is  an  excellent 
plan  to  cultivate  lightness  of  touch  by  frequent  practice  in  writing  the 
thin  stems  as  line  as  possible,  executing  them  rapidly,  touching  the  paper 
very  lightly  with  the  pen. 

THE  TYPE-WHITER. — Type -writing  is  much  more  rapid,  and  in  various 
ways  far  superior  to  pen  work.  A  knowledge  of  this  art  itself  in  very 
valuable,  and  has  become  entirely  indispensable  to  the  professional  Sten- 
ographer. The  Private  Secretary  is  almost  invariably  required  to  make 
use  of  a  writing-  machine  in  preparing  transcripts  and  copies.  He  18, 
moreover,  expected  to  be  familiar  with  its  operation  before  he  accepts  a 
situation,  and  skill  in  manipulating-  it  should,  if  practicable,  be  gained 
while  the  course  in  Stenography  is  being  taken. 


THE   N-HOOK. 


77 


LESSON  XIX. 


251. 


Pen        ben 


THE  N-HOOK. 

ten    den    chen    jen      ken      gen 


ben 


chagrin 
cistern 
strain 


< 


252.  Another  final  hook,  signifying  w,  is  annexed  to  both  straight 
and  curved  letters.    When  joined  to  straight  stems,  it  is  written  on 
the  side  opposite  the  f-hook,  as  in  tone  or  roan. 

253.  Vocalize:    Cane,  chain,  dawn,  dine,  pain,  rainbow,  stain, 
tone,  canopy,  acorn,  bane,  bean,  bone,  dean,  deign,  drone,  pan,  pin, 
pine,   twine,  reign,   Eugene,  Jane,  Jean;   1  pos.  keen,  coin,  queen. 
Without  vowels  :     Again,  been,  can,  run,  stone,  ten,  gain,  abandon, 
abstain,   abstinence,  chaplain,  adjourn,  branch,  bunch,  burn,  corn, 
cotton,  deacon,  denounce,  detain,   libertine,    discipline,    disdain, 
economy,  kitchen,  Latin,  mechanic,   mourn,  obtain,   train,   candy, 
ordain,  organ  (ar),  origin,  pagan,  reckon,  retain,   scorn,   southern, 
drench,   planet,  Spanish,  sudden,   sustain,   taken,  turn,   obstinate, 
torn,  vacancy,  beacon,  propound,  denote,  wagon,  Michigan,  Oregon 
(ar),  banish,  barbarian,  barn,  beckon,  bench,  blown,  born,  bounty, 
canton,   canvass,   stricken,  captain,  cavern,  chagrin,  chicken,  chin, 
cistern,   county,   cunning,   dainty,  den,  din,  disjoin,  expunge,  for- 
eign, gentile,  glen,  groan,  grown,  hinge,  hurricane,  laconic,  maiden, 
marine,  mitten,  panic,  pen,  pinch,  plunge,  retrench,  ribbon,   san- 


78 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 


guine,  skin,  span,  sponge,  strain,  surgeon,  tangible,  tenacious, 
tinge,  ton,  trench,  Unitarian,  virgin,  waken,  weapon,  wrench, 
Austin,  Conrad,  Dan,  John,  Blanch;  1  pos.  spine,  tin,  join,  enjoin^ 
chronic;  3  pos.  attune,  attain,  brown,  June,  town,  spoon. 


254. 


WORD   AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 


Upon 

happen,  punish-ed- 

r\ 

__ 

begin,  gone 

ment 
spoken 

\..\\. 

—  ? 

again,  begun 
began 

den  ominate-tion 
dune 
down,  providential 

AA, 

•™..^»y  

religion,  join 
general-ly 
imagine 

doctrine 
darken 
eternal 

3  J    3 

P 

determine 
magniticent-ence 
question 

benevolent-ence 

/°  n 

European 
such-a-one 

North-western 

>  2r     <? 

/\.<s....\  

at-length 

Washington 
beneficial 
larger-than 

••Xr" 

/ 

rather-than 
again-and-again 
over-and-over-agaln 

255. 


EXERCISE  19. 
1.    Pain  may-be-said  to-follow  pleasure   as-its  shadow. 


2.  Peace  is  rarely  denied  to-the  peaceful.  3.  Pity  is  akin  to-love. 
4.  Pity  is  love  when-grown  into  excess.  5.  Prayer  is-to  religion 
what  thinking  is-to  philosophy.  6.  To-pray  is-to-iriake  religion. 
7.  He-that-has-no  cross  deserves  no-crown.  8.  The-Bible  is-a- 
window  in-this  prison  of  hope,  through  which-we  look  into-eter- 
niry.  (1  m  30  s). 

25(>.  It-has-been  spoken  again-and-again  by-the  chaplain  that- 
thi'-doctrine  of-the  Christian-religion  is-that-life  is  eternal,  rather- 
than-a-brief  span  only.  (7  limes  in  2  m). 


CAUTION. — Be  careful  to  make  your  hooks  and  S-circles  quite  small. 
Avoid  the  error  beginners  commonly  make  of  getting  these  on  the  wrong 
side  of  the  stem.  Vowel  word-signs  should  be  short,  and  all  "ticks"  used 
in  phraseography  both  short  and  light. 


257. 


THK   N-IIOOK. 
TRANSLATE. 


79 


^.r^ 


LESSON  XX. 


THE  N-HOOK—  CONTINUED. 


258. 


Fen  ven  thn  then  esn  zen  shen  zhen  lea  am  men  nen  wa.yn  yen 


silence 

delineation 

lantern. 


80  REPORTING   STYLE   OK    SHOUT-HAND. 

259.  Since  a  hook  can  be  conveniently  written  only  within, 
or  following  the   direction  of  curves,  but  one  linal  hook  can  be 
joined  to  these  letters.     This  is  properly  chosen  to  represent  11, 
which  occurs  much  more  frequently  than  f  and  v. 

260.  Vocalize:  Lean,  loan,  iron,  noun,  Ethan,  Julian,  Adaline. 
Without  vowels:  Man,  main,  known,  none,   Maine,  cannon,  coffin, 
cognomen,  dominion,   earn  (ar),  examine,  fancy,  finish,   infancy, 
arrange  (ar),  Italian,  learn,  lengthen,  machine,  maintain,  manage, 
manager,  minute,  saloon,  Monday,  monarch,  monotonous,  Roman, 
season,  sermon  (ar),   situation,  menace,  then,   specimen,    vanity, 
vanish,     villain,    vain,     anonymous,    German,     French,    London, 
admonish,    affront,    almanac,    amanuensis,    amen,    arraign     (ar), 
battalion,  brilliancy,   clemency,  delineation,  diminish,  diminution, 
diminutive,  domain,  feminine,  finance,  financial,  fringe,  frown,  fun, 
infringe,  lantern,  launch,  lone,  lunatic,  lunch,  minimum,  monopolize, 
monopoly,  moon,  muslin,  ocean,  omen,  orphan,  outline,  permanence, 
million  (mel),  phenomenon,  Prussian,  raven,  refine,  refrain,  shun, 
summon,  sunshine,    tavern,  thin,  throne,  tuition,   urn    (ar),   van, 
varnish,  vein,  venom,  vine,  violin,  workman,  Aaron,  Allen,  Alonzo, 
Benjamin,      Franklin,     Jonathan,     Napoleon,     Nathan,      Orlando, 
Solomon,    Helen,   Josephine,    Lillian,    Susan.     1   pos.    men,   even, 
evening,   often,    line,    mine,    mean,    meaning,    fine,    shine,    thine; 
3  pos.  than,  noon. 

261.  When   the    n-hook    is   attached    to    curves,    a   following 
s-circle  is  expressed  by  being  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  thence, 
or  means. 

262.  Write,  fence,  lance,  opulence,  pestilence,  ransom,  renounce, 
patience,  excellence,  thence,  violence,  France,   silence,  lonesome, 
specimens. 

2(5.'}.  Art  In- end  of  words,  this  consonant  is  expressed  after  straight 
letters  by  locating  the  .---circle  on  the  n-hook  side,  as  in  dense,  or 
chmic.c. 

2(>4.  Write-  C'adcnce,  credence,  decadence,  glance,  guidance, 
occurrence,  bvon/.e,  intense,  prince,  residence,  resistance,  sem- 
blance, tense,  distance,  pretense,  expense,  trance,  transitory, 
vengeance,  dense,  instance,  dispense,  abundance,  extensive. 
eloquence,  (el),  di>dain>,  detains,  Lawrence,  Kansas;  3  pos. 
chance,  dance,  towns,  appliance. 


81 


265.  But  the  circle  is  written  within  the  hook  when  medial, 
although  annexed  to  a  straight  letter,  as  in  mechanism.     In  density  , 
however,  and  a  few  words  having  similar  outlines,   the  hook  is 
implied  by  the  manner  in  which  the  circle  is  written.     The  writing 
of  the  medial  n,  when  its  hook  cannot  be   easily  expressed,   is 
often  entirely  omitted,   as  in  transpire,  this  consonant  in  such 
cases  being  readily  supplied  from  the  context. 

266.  Write:     Pennsylvania,    transpose,    transpire,    organism, 
mechanism,   Wisconsin,   density,    intrinsic,   transverse,    minstrel, 
transcribe. 


267. 


WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


Human 

audience 

providence 


.._...fL|. 


June 

obedience 
responsible 

more-than 

at-once 

every-one 


d 


.3^. 


opinion 

union 

within,  heathen 

organize 

darkens-ness 

cross-examine 

opens,  upon-his 

some-one 

our-own 

fir-instance 

in-his-situation 

human-life. 


268. 


EXERCISE  20. 


1.  To  obtain  excellence  in-any  language  requires  much  study  - 
and  patience;  especially  is-this  true  of  Latin  and-Greek.  2.  She 
receives-lessons  in  French  every  Monday,  and-in  Spanish  every 
Thursday.  3.  That -she -may  thoroughly  learn  her  lessons,  she- 
writes  every-line  over-and-over-again.  4.  She  will-make  use  of- 
these  languages  in-her  European  travels.  5.  In-his-situation,  he- 
would-be-likely-to  improve  his  health  the-more  by  sailing  to- 
London,  rather-than  going  all-the-way  in-a-wagon.  (1m  30s). 

269.  1.  Men  tire  April  when-they  woo,  December  when-they 
wed.  2.  All  of  heaven  we-have  below.  3.  Nothing  maintains  its 
bloom  forever;  age  succeeds  to-age.  4.  To-crr  is  human;  to- 
forgive,  divine.  5.  Many-men  know  how  to-flatter,  few-men 

know  how  to-praise.     G.  Learn-to-labor  aud-to  wait.     7.  No-man 
6 


82 


REPORTING    STYI.K    OF    SHOUT-HAND. 


flatters  the-woman  he-truly  loves.  8.  Love  is-a-reality  which-is 
born  in-the  fairy  regions  of  romance.  9.  Shallow  men  believe  in 
luck ;  strong  men  believe  in-cause-ancl-eff ect.  (1  m  45  s) . 

270.  Every-one  who  begins  the-study  of  human-life  will- 
believe  more-than  ever-before  in  Providential  guidance.  (5  times 
in  I  m). 


271. 


.?,,. 
.3 


TRANSLATE. 


.V.v.^..*>4.*.fc 


V_P 


LESSON  XXL 


Ambition 

occasion 
associations 

diction 
section 
missionary 

separation 

suppression 

election 


THE  SHUN-HOOK. 


remuneration 

veneration 

portion 

transgression 

translation 

assertion 


THE    SII-UN-HOOK.  83 

273.  A  large  final  hook,  corresponding  in  size  with  the  rel-hook, 
is  used  to  denote  the  frequent  endings  tion,  cion,  sion,  etc.    This 
hook  is  written  within  curves,  as  in  ambition,  and  on  the  s-circle 
side  of  straight  letters,  as  in  occasion.    Like  the  hook  for  /  and  v, 
this  also,   as  shown  by  the  examples  just  given,  represents  two 
cognate  sounds,  viz.  shn  and  zhn. 

274.  Vocalize:     Emotion;    1   pos.  auction.    Without  vowels: 
Action,  attention,  abbreviation,  animation,  dissipation,  declamation, 
definition,  depression,  dissension,  designation,  desolation,  devotion, 
discussion,  elevation,  emigration,  evasion,   expedition,  foundation, 
impression,  indignation,  intimation,  rational,  irrational  (ar),  limi- 
tation, motion,  locomotion,  nation,  notation,  occupation,  omission, 
oration  (ar),  presumption,  probation,  prosecution,  profession,  pro- 
vision, repetition,  revision,  selection,  session,  submission,  associa- 
tion, acclamation,   aggregation,   ammunition,   crucifixion,  promo- 
tion, dictation,  dimension,  amputation  (emp),  ascension,  aspiration, 
assassination,  assimilation,  celebration,  coalition,  decapitation,  de- 
lusion, digression,  discrimination,   division,  elongation,  emulation, 
erection,  erudition,  evolution,  exclamation,  exertion,   exhortation, 
expectation,   exportation,  extermination,  exultation,  inflammation, 
invasion,   involution,  isolation,  lamentation,  location,  negotiation, 
nutrition,  observation,  option,  penetration,  pension,   perpetration, 
persecution,  petition,   population,   preservation,  prevention,  pro- 
fusion,   progression,   prolongation,    recrimination,    remuneration, 
resolution,   restoration,   restriction,  resurrection,  salutation,  sepa- 
ration, solution,  subscription,  supervision,  termination,  transgres- 
sion, translation,  veneration,  violation,  volition;    1   pos.   creation, 
edition,  mission,   missionary,   occasion,   vision,    caution,    option, 
alleviation;  3  pos.  addition,  approbation,  dissolution,  passion,  rep- 
utation, allusion. 

275.  When  the  straight  letter  to  which  this  hook  is  attached  is 
preceded  by  a  hook,  circle,  or  other  consonant  sign,  on  the  s-circle 
side,  it  will  be  found  more  convenient  to  strike  the  shun-hook  on 
the  side  opposite,  as  in  education,  or  section. 

27(>.  Write :  Election,  exception,  execution,  education,  exclu- 
sion, exhibition,  fraction,  induction,  intoxication,  invocation,  obli- 
gation, plantation,  restitution,  portion,  proportion,  distribution, 
assertion,  vegetation,  reception,  reflection,  relation,  section,  station, 


84 


REPOKTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


adoration,  suspicion,  recollection,  abduction,  adjudication,  adop- 
tion, affection,  benediction,  benefaction,  classification,  dejection, 
distraction,  edification,  expiration,  exploration,  explosion,  faction, 
friction,  infection,  fiction,  projection,  seclusion,  specification,  sub- 
stitution, vacation,  variation,  visitation;  1  pos.  diction,  dictionary; 
3  pos.  agitation,  application,  attraction,  elocution  (el),  suppression, 
avocation. 


277. 


WORD-SIGNS. 


Confession 
dissatisfaction                  fit 
destruction                      .\?...Jb..Jl... 

examination                                \J      v/ 
cross-examination              ,  „         —  I 

v^  

-^°v>  L 

w              *<J? 

deliberation 
generation 
objection 

explanation 
expression 

0 
inclination                        v_^__  \_^  ^p 

injunction                                 —  J    j^->^ 

^ox^L/x^o 

invention 
reduction 

institutiun 
representation                    .x\   »      ^  / 

^-r,^^ 

reformation 
information 

temptation                        - 

perfection                                   \J)  f\ 
operation 
oppression 

/°         ? 

connection 

revelation 
revolution 
suspension. 

EXEPvCISE  21. 

278.  1.  The-two  offices  of-memory  are  collection  and-distribu- 
tion.  2.  Whatever  is  popular  deserves  attention.  3.  1-know  no- 
inaniMT  of--peakhiix  M>  offensive  as-ihat  of-ijiving  praise  and- 
clo^ino;  it  Avith-an-exocption.  4.  The-only-thmgs  in-\vlnch-\ve 
can-l)e-<ai(l  to-have-aiiy  property  are  our-actions.  5.  Strong  rea- 
sons make  stron^-acrions.  *;.  We  a>k  advice,  but  we-mean  appro- 
bation.  7.  Affectation  discovers  sooner  what  one  is  than-it-makes- 
known  what  one  \voi;ld  fain  appear  to-be.  8.  No  decking  sets- 
iorth  anytlihiLi'  so-miicli-as  affection.  'J.  We-are-never  like  angels 
till-oiir  pas-ion  dii-v.  ]i).  Charity  is-a-\vish  for-a-perfect  educa- 
tion. 11.  All-is  holy  -\\hcre  devotion  kneels.  12.  Education  is- 
the-chief  deft-use  of  nations.  13.  Love  is-the  piety  of-the  affec- 
tions. 1-1.  Take  away  ambition  and-vauity,  aiid-wkere-will-be 
your  heroes  ami-patriots?  (2  in  ;)0  s). 


Tin:  s-snrx  AND  INITIAL  x  HOOKS. 


85 


279.  The-lawyer  raises  objections  to-the  cross-examination 
for-the-reason-that-the  witness,  in-making  his  explanation  of-the 
invention,  gives-information  as-to-his-own  profession,  which-has- 
no-relation  to-his  examiuation-in-chief .  (3  times  in  1  m) . 


280. 


TRANSLATE. 


LESSON     XXII. 


281.        THE  S-SHUN  AND  INITIAL  N  HOOKS. 


Civilization 
transitions 
dispensation 

enslave 
inscribe 
inseparable 

economical 

woman,  1  pos.  women 

trance 

transmission 
qualification 
furniture 


cessation 

imposition 

demonstration 


282.  The  syllables  denoted  by  the  shun-hook,  when  they  occur 
after  an  s-circle,  are  expressed  by  continuing  the  stroke  until  a 
small  hook  is  formed  on  the  side  opposite,  as  in  civilization.  The 
plural  is  formed  by  writing  a  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in  transitions. 


86  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND  » 

283.  Write:     Deposition,     dispositions,  accession,    physician, 
position,  positions,  propositions,  sensation,  supposition,  civiliza- 
tion,  imposition,    cessation,  exposition,    procession,    requisition, 
succession,  vexation,   dispensation;    1   pos.   decision,  opposition, 
precision,   acquisition;  3  pos.   accusation,  transition,  possession, 
possessions. 

THE    INITIAL    N-HOOK. 

284.  The  prefixes  in,  en,  and  un,  when  followed  by  a  circle  and 

curve  with  which  the  alphabetic, ^en  would  not  form  a  convenient 

juncture,  are  denoted  by  a  similar  hook,  as  in  enslave.     This  is  also 
used  in  connection  with  the  triple  consonant  series,  as  in  inscnbey 
or  inseparable. 

285.  Using  the  proper  initial  and  final  hooks:  Curtain,  drain, 
drove,   engrave,   explain,  grain,  graphic,    grave,   matron,   patron, 
plain,   plenty,    pronounce,    prudence,    utterance,    restrain,    train, 
venerable,   worn,   decline,   economical,   tribune,   incline,    woman, 
criterion,   demonstration,  furniture,  paragraph,  prefer,   reference, 
transgress,    transmission;     1    pos.    qualification,    women,    clean, 
cleave,  clime,  green;  3  pos.  transcribe,  crown,  drown,  plan,  traffic, 
administration. 

286.  PHRASE   SIGNS. 

In-some  -TJ—V  s         \  I   *^  in-consideration 

in-as-many  •  i£.  D .  ^T-Vr^. \J. -•     in-his-descriptlon 


in-his-expression     Ol  ,. 
in-his-experience         \J 


EXERCISE  22. 

287.  TIIK-liKAK    AXP-TI1E     TWO     TRAVELERS. — ^ESOP. 

1.  Two-men  were  traveling  together  when-they  suddenly  came 
upon-a  bear.  2.  One-of-thein  quickly  hid  in-the-branches  of-a- 
tree;  the  other,  secing-that-he-would-be-taken,  fell  down,  and- 
whcn-the-liear  came  up  to-him,  sought  to  feign-the  appearance 
of-di-ath  as-iiuich-as-possible.  3.  The-bear  soon-took  his  leave, 
for,  it-i.s-said,  he-will-only  eat  game  that-has-been  slain.  4.  When- 


THE   S-SHUN   AND   INITIAL  N    HOOKS.  87 

he-was-gone,  the-other  traveler  came-down  from-the  tree,  and 
jocularly  said,  "What-was-it  that-the-bcar  spoke  in-your  ear?" 
5.  The-answer  was,  "He-gave-me  this-advice:  Never-travel  with- 
one  Avho-will-leavc-you  at-the  approach  of-danger."  6.  Ill  luck 
tries  one's  sincerity.  (2m). 

288.  The-physician  in-his  deposition  says,  that  in-his-experience 
he-has-had-occasion  many-times  to-prescribe  to-men-aud-women 
of  all  nationalities.     (4  times  in  1  m) . 

289.  TRANSLATE. 


SELF-RBLIANCB. — "There  is  no  surer  way  to  success  in  any  undertaking 
than  a  firm  reliance  upon  self.  This  applies  with  special  force  to  the  study 
of  Short-hand.  The  most  successful  reporters  we  have  ever  known  were 
those  who  did  not  depend  upon  the  help  of  teacher  or  friend  to  learn 
Short-hand  for  them,  but  relied  upon  their  own  ability  to  succeed.  Real 
determination  will  go  as  far,  if  not  farther,  than  natural  endowments; 
hence  he  who  will  rely  upon  the  former  may  have  as  much,  or  even  more, 
hope  of  success  than  one  who  is  otherwise  naturally  fitted  for  the  work, 
but  lacks  self-reliance." 


88  REPOKTIXO   STYLE   OF   SIIORT-IIAXD. 


LESSON  XXIII. 


290.  THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS. 

List  gestation 


stump 
disposed 

boaster 

stranger 

illustration 


.£?..    KV.~>       spinster 
digestion  S,  ^-> '\y-  '     abstraction. 


against 
justify 

gesture 

manifest 

stage 

honestly 


Tin:  ST-I.OOP. 

291.  £    is  very  often  followed  by    t,   forming  the   consonant 
double-sound  at,  of   so  frequent  occurrence  in  our  language,  and 
which   is  expressed  by  an  elongation  of   the  s-circle,  as  in  list,  or 
stump.     Z*1,  al>o,  is  sometimes  denoted  by  this  loop,  as  in  disposed. 

292.  Like  the  s-circle,  it  may  be  followed  by  the  s-shim  hook, 
as  in  gsstntkm;  and  implies  n  by  being  located  on  the  n-hook  side 
of  straight  letters,  as  in  ayainst. 

293.  Vocalize:     Beast,    boast,  coast,    feast,  ghost,   host,   post, 
toast,    taste,    steal,    wa>te,  steel,  twist;  1  pos.  moist,  steam,  steep, 
accost.     Without   vowels:     Placed,    cast,    chest,   dust,  fast,  guest, 
haste,  just,  justify,  list,  against,  arrest  (ar),  breakfast,  detest,  dis- 
gust, dishonot,  distrust,  earnest,  enlist  (el),  gesture,   harvest,  iii- 
•iisposi  d,    inlV-t,    intrust,    invest,   investigation,  manifest,  molest, 
inu^t,  uio-t,  pretext,  stage,  star  (ar),  slate,    statistics,  stead,  stole, 
.-lop,   stomach,    sioiv,  test,  testily,  text,  trust,  utmost,  vast,  west, 

'uiiip,  manifestation,  almost,  destiny,  abreast,  adjust,  bequest, 
b' •-!,  blest,  bn-ast,  bust,  crest,  dentist,  digest,  digestion,  fantastic, 
li.-:,  forest,  frost,  gri-t,  incrust,  inquest,  jest, nest,  protest,  request, 
robust,  rn-t,  state-man,  statute,  stem,  stern,  stiff,  sting,  stitch, 
storm  (an,  stubborn,  stuff,  stumble,  vest,  worst,  wrist;  1  pos. 
A'lu'.i-t,  co>t,  prir-t,  lea-t,  still,  stock,  style,  honest,  honestly; 
3  po.-.  last,  past,  stamp,  a!te-t. 


LOOPS.  89 

THE  STR-LOOP. 

294.  The  st-loop,  when  written  considerably  broader,  denotes 
the  added  r,  as  in  boaster,  or  stranger. 

295.  Write:     Cluster,    lustre,    master,    illustration,    monster, 
plaster,  Sylvester,  minister,  spinster,  register,  obstruction,  bluster, 
strange,  stranger;  3  pos.  administer,  abstraction. 

296.  Bern.    The  st-loop  should  be  made  so  slender  as  to  appear 
like  an  elongated  s-circle.     It  will  then  be  readily  distinguishable 
from  the  str-loop,  which  is  written  somewhat  longer  and  consider- 
ably broader.    The  large  loop,  however,   should  not  be  rounded 
too  much,  or  it  will  be  liable  to  be  confounded  with  the  sez-circle. 

297.  WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

To  secure  facile  outlines,    the  circle  only,  instead   of  the  loop, 
is  often  used  when  phrasing,  as  in  must-be  (ems-be). 

First  Constitution-of-the-U.  8. 


at-tirst 
by-the-flrst 

one-or-two 

wo-must 

North-west 


one-of-the-best 
one-of-the-most 


extraordinary 
mystery 


,. Baptist 


circumstances-  r  0    ^~S\   ^—^.  in-reply-to 

of-the-case  <j  V         ^  in-response-to. 


EXERCISE  l'o. 

298.  1.  The-presence  of-those  whom  we-love  is-as-a-double 
life;  absence,  iu-its-anxious  longing  aud-seuse-of  vacancy,  is-as-a- 
foretaste  of-death.  2.  We-that-live  to  please  must  please  to-live. 
3.  It-is-best  to-be  with-those  in-time  that-we-hope  to-be-with 
in-eternity.  4.  They-  that  govern  must-make  least  noise.  5.  Grace 
was  in-all  her  steps,  heaven  in  her  eye.  G.  By  gaming  we  lose 
both  our  time-and-treasure,  two  things  most  precious  to-the  life 
of  man.  7.  Genius  always  gives-its-best  at-tirst,  prudence  at-last. 
8.  Haste  is-of-the  devil,  y.  Though  I-am-always  in-haste,  I-am- 
nevur  in-a-hurry.  10.  Men  love  in-haste,  but-they  detest  at- 
leisurc.  11.  Hope  is-a  lover's  staff.  12.  That-man  lives  twice, 
that-lives  the-tirst  life  well.  13.  The-grave  is-a-common  treasury 


'0  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

to-which  we-must-all  be-taken.     14.  Choose  always  the-way-that 
seems  the -best,  however  rough  it-may-be.     (2m  30s;. 

299.  1.  To  step  aside  is  human.    2.  Music  washes  away  fmm- 
the  soul  the-dust  of-every  day  life.    3.    Obstinacy  is  ever  most- 
positive   when-it-is-most    in-the-wrong.      4.    They-who    forgive 
ttiost  shall-be-most  forgiven.     5.   Passion  costs  me  too-much  to 
oestow  it  upon  every  trifle.     6.    To-climb  steep  hills  requires  slow 
pace  at-flrst.     7.  Every  noble-work  is-at-first  impossible.   8.  Time 
te    generally    the-best    doctor.     9.    In-poetry,  which-is   all-fable, 
truth   is   still   the-perfection.     10.    Poetry  is  truth    dwelling  in- 
beauty.     11.    Ye  stars,  that  are-the  poetry  of -heaven!     12.  Praise 
is-ouly  praise  when-well  addressed.     13.    So'id  pudding    against 
empty  praise.     14.  Live-this-day  as-if-the-last.     15.  Who-makes- 
the  fairest  show  means-the-most  deceit.     1C.  Small  service,  is  true 
service  while  it-lasts.     (2  in) . 

300.  One-of-the-best  and-most  earnest  of-the  ministers  in-the- 
North-west  has-just-been    advanced  to-a   higher  post.     (5  times 
in  1  in) . 

301.  TKAXSLATE. 


JOTE. — "As  a  rule,  the  first  thing  to  fail  the  scribe  is  his  eye-Bight.  The 
nosition  from  which  the  least  injury  will  result  is  that  which  admits  the 
light  upon  the  paper  without  either  shining  directly  in  the  eyes  or  casting 
a  reflection  into  them  from  the  paper  upon  which  one  is  writing." 


THE  LENGTHENED  CURVE. 


91 


LESSON     XXIV. 


THE    LENGTHENED   CURVE. 


302. 


entrance 

furthermore 

material 


Father 

letter 

order 

lumber 

anger 

anchor 

chamber 
reporter 
murder 


303.  A  curve    written  double    its  usual  length    signifies    the 
addition  of  thr,  as  in  father;  sometimes,  also,  of  tr  or  dr,  as  in 
letter,  or  order. 

304.  The   tendency  of  the  writer  should  be  to  make  this  more, 
rather  than  less,  than  double  the  standard  length  curve,  in  order 
that  there  may  be  no  danger  of  confounding  the  two. 

305-  Write:  Alexander,  another,  center,  central,  slender, 
diameter,  eccentric,  enter,  entrance,  father,  further,  furthermore, 
hinder,  hindrance,  material,  maternal  (nel),  literal,  mother,  matter, 
order,  render,  calendar,  senator,  surrender,  tender,  thunder, 
thermometer,  whether,  wander,  wonder,  yonder;  1  pos.  entire, 
entirely  (el),  immaterial,  neither:  3  pos. neutral  (el). 

306.  By    lengthening  ing  and  emp,  the  added  r,    kr,  or  gr  is 
Bignitied,  as  in  lumber,  anger,  anchor. 

307.  Write:  Anger,    angry,  amber,   anchor,  chamber,    cumber, 
encumber,  finger,   hunger,  linger,    limber,  murder,    reporter  (ar), 
slumber,  temper. 


308. 


KXKUCISE  2-L 


THE-TIIIEF     AXD-IIIS     .MOTHER. — ^ESOP. 


1.  A-boy  steals  a-lesson-book  from-one  of-his       play -fellows 
and-takes-it  home  to-his-mother.     '2.  She-neglects  to  punish,  and- 


92  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

even  encourages  him.  3.  He-next-time  steals  a-cloak  and- 
brings-it  to-her,  when-she  praises  him  still  the-more.  4.  The- 
youth  soon-becomes-a-man,  ancl-proceeds  to  steal  things-of 
higher  value.  5.  He-is-takcn  while  riding  away  on-a  stolen  horse, 
and-with  shackles  on,  is-taken-away  to-the  place  of  public-execu- 
tion. G.  His  mother  follows  with-the-rest,  and-strikcs  her-breast 
in  sorrow;  whereupon  the-young-man  says,  7.  "I-wish-to  say- 
something-to  my-mother  in-her  ear."  8.  She  comes  near  him, 
when-he-quickly  seizes  her  ear  with-his-teeth  and-takes-it  off. 
9.  His  mother  cries  with-pain,  but-the-son  replies,  "Ah  mother, 
if-you-had-only  beaten  me  when-I  first  stole  that-lesson-book,  I 
should-never-have  come-to-this,  nor  would-the  law  oblige  me 
now  to  ignoininiously  suffer  the-punishment  of-death."  (2m  30s). 

309.  1.    Manners  are  stronger-thai!  laws.     2.  Order  is  heaven's 
first  law.     3.   He-that-will-be   angry   for-anything  will-be  angry 
fur-nothing.     4.   A-babo  is-a-mother\s  anchor.     5.   Whether  your 
time  calls  you  to-live  or  die,  do  both  like-a  prince.     G.  He-con- 
quer^   grief     who-can-take-a     firm-resolution.       7.     It-matters- 
nothing  how-a-man  dies,  but-'how  he-lives.     8.  Love  is,  I-believe, 
ail-entirely  personal  poem.     9    la-love  anger  is  always  false.  (1m). 

310.  The-Judge   calls-another   reporter    into-the    chamber  to- 
further  thi'-laking  of-testimony  in-the-case  of-the  murder  on-the 
Central-Railway.     (4  times  in  1  m). 


311. 


TRANSLATE. 


THE   HALVING   PRINCIPLE. 


93 


LESSON    XXV. 


THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 


312. 


313.  One  of  the  most  useful  contrivances  in  the  entire  system, 
called  the  Halving  Principle,  is  that  by  which  a  letter,  when  writ- 
ten half-length,  indicates  the  addition  of  t  or  d.     Thus,  N^  be, 
when  written  half  its  usual  length,  is  read  be-te,  as  in  bit,  or  be-de, 
as  in  bed  ;  —  kay,  when  halved,  has  the  force  of  kay-te,  as  in  cut, 
or  kay -de,  as  in  code.    Te  and  de  are  the  most  frequently  recurring 
consonants,  and   being  cognates,  no  ambiguity  results  from  the  ex- 
pression of  both  by  one  principle.     Ray  is  halved  only  when  com- 
bined with  otlier  consonants,  as  iu  exert,  and  written  full   length  in 
such  words  as  rate,  and  right. 

314.  In  the  following  list,  t  is  thus   indicated:    vocalize,    boat, 
boot,  coat,   cut,   gate,  quote,  cat,  bolt,  slate,  mate,  twilight,  vault, 
violet,   clolt,   giant,  nut,  saint,  gait,   dote;   1  pos.  cheat.     Without 
vowels :     Date,   get,   bet,    debt,   hate,   art,  late,  net,  let,  met,  fate, 
note,   vote,    sent,   lift,   left,   sect,  accent,  enact,  exact,  exert,  tact, 

-adopt,  better,  insect,  accept,  acceptable,  apostate,   insert,    suspect, 

little,  result,  smart,   start,   limit,   merit,   motive,    docket,   native, 
pocket,  rabbit,  recent,  arithmetic,  alphabet,  instigate,  assent,  arti- 


9*  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

flee,  agent,  intimate,  repeat,  remote,  cadet,  capital,  locomotive, 
mathematics,  ratify,  petrify,  rectify,  rusticate,  support,  uncertain 
reject,  auditor  (ar),  remit  (ar),  imitate,  report,  annotate,  magnetic, 
resolute,  resort,  adjacent,  adjudicate,  adjunct,  agitate,  cognate, 
cottage,  dogmatic,  recapitulate,  export,  extinct,  inject,  intact, 
peasant,  submit,  musket,  theft,  upstart,  captive,  certain,  circuit, 
debate,  decent,  deject,  designate,  desolate,  detect,  educate,  debtor 
(ar),  eject,  elect  (el),  except,  execute,  habit,  habitual,  eminent, 
emulate,  erect,  estate,  inhabit,  innocent,  irritate,  legislate,  origi- 
nate, sentence,  abject,  Hamlet.  (L-hook)  implicate,  pleasant,  veg- 
etable, duplicate,  fluent;  1  pos.  client,  climate.  (R-hook)  intricate, 
precept,  present,  private,  product,  promote,  prospect,  protract, 
strict,  subtract,  tract,  transmit,  translate,  attribute,  bracelet,  pre- 
cinct, project,  reciprocate,  restrict,  thrift,  tribute,  decrepit,  affirm- 
ative, aggravate,  appreciate,  October,  credit,  deprecate,  detract, 
discredit,  extract,  transcript,  preeminent,  prerogative,  approxi- 
mate. 

315.  CAUTION.  Care  should  be  taken  that  shortened  letters  are 
written  no  more  than  half  their  usual  length,  else  the  two  will  be- 
come confounded.  The  tendency  should  be  to  make  them  some- 
what less  than  half  the  standard  length. 


816. 


WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


Without 
Almighty                           V^ 
emphatic                   ( 

hei-etofore 
hesitate 
^/          ^  -""^               manuscript 

nature 
natural-Iy               ^^                \ 
posterity             •••.r.r.-VT...)Q.,. 
[/ 
afternoon                            \ 
associate                 (               ),      ~\ 
heart                    •  -?V-!>  -•«—-'•«' 

intelligence          ^       *y      *-* 
intelligible        i*£f.,..  ^-...jfij,,, 

interchange                      >y    S 

'                                after,  for-it 
-s//       V"           yesterday 
.-V*!.,..-r^/.  ...  {TT....I   Intellect-Mi 

postscript 
\             e\r~^\/^     sometime 
.«.?i.,,\,..,;.?>.V:...,    better-than 

)       ^—  P-r      n         Washington  Ter. 
j..1*"-!            \3                  in-the-second-place 
"  ^J'"                       '*   somewhat. 

THE   HALVING   PRINCIPLE.  95 

EXERCISE  25. 

317.  1.  Always  rise  from  table  with-an  appetite,  and-you  -will- 
never  sit  down  without-one.    2.  Wheu-we-feel  a-strong  desire  to- 
thrust  our  advice  upon  others,  it-is-usually  because  we  suspect 
their  weakness;  but-we  ought  rather  to  suspect  our-own.    3.  To- 
be  happy,  we-must-be-true  to  nature,   ami-carry  our  age  along- 
with  us.     4.  Beauty  is-a-possession  not  our-own.     5.  The-beauti- 
ful  are-never  desolate,  but-some-oue  always  loves-them.    6.  It-is- 
better  for-a    young-mau-to  blush   than  to-turn  pale.     7.    Every 
Christian  is  born  great  because  he-is-born  for-heaven.     8.  That- 
which-is-so  universal  as  death  must-be-a  benefit.     9.  We-speak  of 
educating  our  children.     Do-we-know  that-our  children  also  edu- 
cate us?     10.  Fortune  is-the  rod  of-the-weak  and-the  staff  of-the 
brave.     11.    Let  them  obey  who  know  how  to-rule.     12.    The- 
chains  of  habit  are  generally  too-small  to-be  felt  till  they-are-too- 
strong   to-be-broken.     13.    Keep  thy  heart  with-all  diligence,  for- 
out-of-it  are-the.  issues  of-life.     (2  m  30  s). 

318.  We-will-certainly  be-able  very-soon  to-make   verbatim- 
reports  of  -the  -eminent  speakers  in-the   debate  by-means-of-the 
stenographic  art.     (4  times  in  1  m)  . 

319.  TRANSLATE. 


REMARK  .—Shortened  curves,  In  proportion  to  their  length,  are  bent 
more  than  standard  length  letters.  Care  must  be  taken  always  to  make  a 
clear  distinction  between  letters  of  different  lengths.  Not  only  must  the 
halved  letters  not  be  too  long,  but  those  of  standard  length,  also,  should 
not  be  too  short. 


REPORTING  STY:.K  OF  SIIORT-HAXD. 


LESSON   XXVI. 


THE    ADDED    D. 


320. 


MiKht                             /->^->    r> 
mighty                                  J    \ 

o             v-x_                 stopped 
\  —  <-*v'f'                  comrade 

obliged                                        X 
date 
edit                                 /    / 
stood                  "  r  ••  'p  •  • 
void                              / 
avoid                              ^    <     , 

""     Infidel 
—             to                        quite 
\                                betide 
]v  "     swift 

fortune 
C^-v_x'  \J^_^               per-cent 

rhetoric                                 Q 
susceptible              ~*s  \j) 

(\             _..                integrity 
f      V^_^^V               prominent 

went 
awkward                    ~               ^_^ 

Presbyterian 
"^V)    /7  -x___-^.  X7      antagonism 

estimate 
ultimate                      > 
Connecticut      ,.  ..,-r~>fr^rrT^~. 

perpetual 
apart                         \   /^V  x\V 
abstract               ,,...V:.,...V.  .  \>. 

X~^          Methodist 
^~?    .           ^-^  —  y             evident 
.  .  ..-}  .Sv>»,  intentional 

[                                              didactic 

1        ^  —     ^^^              hint 

321.     Te   or  de,    when  follo\\vd  by  a   final  vowel,  cannot  be 

indicated  by  halving;  e.  ii.,  'nii'jht  is  expressed  by  the  shortened 
em,  while  mi't/i/>/,  containing  a  iinal  vowel,  is  written  em-te. 

o'2'2.  Ilalf-lrim'tli  consonants,  when  standing  alone,  are  employed 
to  denote  words  that  contain  but  one  vowel;  e.  «?.,  halved  de  is 
used  for  (?-//••.  while  in  <-<iif,  the  alphabetic  de-te  must  be  written. 
Halved  ve,  iiiM  position,  denotes  i-<>i<l,  but  in  writing  avoid,  the 
liill-leim'th  ve-ile  must  l>e  used.  The  application  of  this  rnle 

cures  uie.-iier  Iciribility,  since  the  reader  is  expected  to  supply 
lint  one  vouel  when  a  .-liortened  consonant  stands  alone. 

:j'2:J.  In  the  follou  iiiLC  list,  letters  are  shortened  to  express  the 
added  d:  lied,  could,  irootl,  shade,  stood,  decided,  comrade, 
metliod,  instead,  evi.lenee.  educated,  invade,  infidel. 

JJ21.     Words   compiled    entirely   of    horizontal   and    shortened 


THE   ADDED   D.  07 

letters,  are  written  in  the  first  position  when  the  accented  vowel  is 
first-place . 

325.  Write:   (1  pos.)  caught,  dot,  east,  bottom,  quite,  esteem, 
fight,  deed,  got,  heat,  did,  light,  bid,  enlighten,  God,  meet,  invite 
might,   night,  shot,   slight,  taught,  indeed,  speed,  Aroid,  fit,  knot, 
lightning,  lot,  soft,  sort,  spot;  vocalize,  feat,  beat,  naught,  fought, 
betide,  feed,  knight,  neat,  salt,  sheet,  slide,  spite,  steed,  swift,  tide. 

326.  In  the  following  list  both  t  and  d  are  expressed  by  halving : 
Accelerate,     elucidate,    fortune,    per-cent,    percentage,    rhetoric, 
rapid,   notify,    dispute,  active,    actual,   admit,    apart,    catalogue, 
decayed,  didactic,  covert,  cupidity,  melt,  hint,  assault,  assimilate, 
athlete,  dissect,  dissent,  dissipate,  expedite,  extort,  exult,  fanatic, 
hereditary,  hermit,  isolate,  metaphor,  oriental  (el),  ostentatious, 
perpetual,  phonetic,  refute,  schedule  (el),  seldom,  stupid;  1  pos. 
immature,  despite,  fault,  appetite,  exhort;  3  pos.  act,  adapt,  addict, 
apt,   doubt,  foot,   adequate,   mutual,   bad,   adult,   delude,    adept, 
absent,  fat,  mute.    (Sez-circle),  necessitate,  systematic,  exasperate, 
susceptible,   predecessor.     (L-hook),   article,  beautiful,   delicate, 
doubtful,   emblematic,   hospitable,  judicial,   notable.      (R-hook), 
Godfrey,  crabbed,  crescent,  proximate,  Margaret,  district,  lubri- 
cate, dramatic,  enervate,  integral,  promote,  integrity,   prejudice; 
1  pos.  prominent;  3  pos.  attract,  attractive,  transact.     (Rel-hook), 
paternal,     promulgate,     relent,     multiply,     federal,     intolerable, 
multiplication.     (W-hook),  upward,  acquaintance,  went,  warrant, 
quantity,    wayward,   reward,   acquainted,   Edward;    1    pos.   wind, 
Inward,  awkward,  wild,  between,  ward,  wield;  3  pos.  backward, 
outward.       (F-hook),     advocate,     indefinite,     defect,     defective, 
photograph.       (N-hook),     pertinent,     Presbyterian,     manipulat4e, 
beneficent,  patern,  tenant,  mandate,  banquet,  opponent,  splendid, 
antagonism,   benefit,   return,    candid,    longitude;    1    pos.    eastern. 
(Shun-hook),  dedication,  litigation,  intention,  intentional,  estima- 
tion.    (Loops),  abstract,  obstruct,  distinct,  distribute,  investigate, 
stimulate,  stipulate.     (Initial  n-hook),  instruct. 

327.  The  halving  principle  is  applied  informing  the  past  tense 
of  regular  verbs,  as  obliged,  stopped. 

328.  Write:     Packed,    stopped,   stocked,    invested,    molested, 
trusted,   manifested,    transcribed,   obliged,   displayed,    employed, 
adopted,  dispatched,   solicited,   specified,  searched,  risked,  kept. 


98 


KKl'OKTIXG    STYLK    OK    .SHOi:T-IIAXl). 


329.  The  principle  is  applied  twice  in  each  of  the  following 
words:  Artist,  captivate,  capitulate,  estimate,  legitimate,  illegiti- 
mate (el),  mutilate,  ultimate  (el),  fortunate,  Connecticut,  evident, 
protect,   deduct,   latitude,  Methodist,   rectitude,  cataract;  1  pos. 
intent,  mitigate;  3  pos.  aptitude. 

330.  WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

^       [  1  Pos.  feature,  if-it,  2  after,  for-it,  3  future,  fact. 

1  east,  astonish-ed-ment,  2  establish-ed-ment. 
j 
|         !  1  it-ought,  3  at-it,  it-would,  it-bad, 

|        :  1  did,  2  do-it,  3  added,  bad-it. 


lof-it,  2  liavo-it,  3  have-had. 


History                              **   -,  -<? 
historian,  eastern       ~^"^      *^      n 
Act-of-Congresa     ,..  ,  7^".  .  . 

wisdom                        2—  ^             p 
Word-of-God                          -\_     \_ 
People-of-God 

.^_..T-V^±1.... 

at-all-events 
east-and-west 
onward 

fear-of-God 
good-and-bad 
in-the-world. 

331. 


EXERCISE  iHi. 


1.  The-good  is  always  beautiful,  the-beautiful  is  good.  2.  Good- 
ness is  beauty  in-its-lK-st  estate,  3.  Men  often  make-up  in  wrath 
what  they-want  in  reason.  4.  Lot-not  the-sun  go-down  upon  thy 
wralli.  ,j.  All  things  tuv  artificial,  fur  nature  is-the-art  of-God. 
G.  Jiiography  is-the  home  aspect  of  history.  7.  The-desire  of 
knowledge,  like  thirst  of-riches,  increases  ever  with-the  acquisi- 
tion of-it.  8.  Life  is  like  wine:  he-who-wonld  drink  it  pure  must 
drain  it  to-the  dregs.  (J.  Literature  is-the-thonght  of-thinking 
souls.  10.  Doing-good  is-the-only  certainly  happy  action  of-a- 
niau's  life.  11.  A-life  that-is-worth  living  at-all  is  worth  writing 
minutely.  VI.  The-universe  wonld-not-be  rich  enough  to  buy 
the-vote  of-an  honest  man.  lii.  Character  i^-a-perfectly  educated 


'  LAWV. 
DAJ 

THE   ADDED    I>. 

will.  14.  It-were  joy  to  die  if-there-be  gods,  and-sad  to-live  if- 
there-be  none.  15.  It-is-better  to-desire  than-to  enjoy;  to-love 
than-to-be-loved.  16.  If-you-do  what-you  should-not,  you-must- 
bear  what-you  would-not.  17.  If-there-was-no  future-life  our- 
souls  would-not  thirst  for-it.  18.  No-one  can-be-said  to-be  until 
he-is  dead.  19.  I-like  a-good  hater.  (3m). 

382.    True  wisdom  is-to  know  what-is-best  worth  knowing, 
and-to-do  what-is-best  worth  doing.     (6  times  in  1  m). 

333.  TRANSLATE. 


*~     J     °  I 

......  s,  .......  (^. 


NOTE. — "  Use  the  best  quality  of  writing  fluid.  There  is  about  as  much 
difference  between  the  various  kinds  of  ink  that  are  generally  kept  for 
sale  as  there  is  between  a  charcoal  pencil  and  a  good  gold  pen.  And  what 
is  worse,  very  few  people  have  any  idea  that  there  is  any  difference  in 
ink.  Any  liquid  that  will  make  a  colored  mark,  even  though  it  be  indigo 
water,  is  to  the  majority  of  people  equally  ae  good  as  the  best  writing 
fluid.  Good  ink  is  just  as  essential  as  good  pens  and  paper.  Ink  that 
flows  freely  from  the  pen  should  be  used.  The  stand  or  bottle  should  be 
kept  securely  corked  while  not  in  use,  so  as  to  prevent  the  ink  from  be- 
coming thick  by  evaporation  or  from  dust  settling  in  it" 


100  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  XXVII. 


334.    SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 


remonstrate         J <S~   f\^~^i  __  s    predominate 

discreet  *^~§  }     e*Y'.  virtual 

secret  -..^p...  ^....™,  8ec|u(je> 

335.  Letters  of  the  double  and  triple  consonant  series,  are  also 
halved  to  signify  the  addition  of  t  or  d,  as  in  glad,  brought,  spread, 
enameled.     In  these  examples,  it  will  be  observed  that  both  sounds 
expressed  by  the  double  consonant  are  pronounced  before  the  added 
t  or  d. 

336.  Using  the  1-hook  and   vowels:     Plate,  blade,  plat;   1  pos. 
fleet,  flight,  bleed,  clod,  deplete;  (without  vowels),  exclude,  inflate, 
blood,  glad,  flood,  cultivate,  cultivatiorf,  explode,  include,  preclude, 
replied,  tumbled,  coupled,    displayed,  tangled,  entitled,  employeo} 
smuggled,    doubled,   assembled,  rambled,    pamphlet,    multiform; 
1  pos.   plead,  blot,  glide,  plot;    3  pos.   cloud,    seclude.     (R-hook) 
vocalize,  trait,  brute,  prayed,  crowed,  cried,  migrate;   1  pos.  creed, 
trite;  (without  vowels),    destroyed,   gathered,  labored,  prospered, 
papered,    uttered,    shirt,    tempered,    altered,    betrayed,   muttered, 
offered,  silvered,  measured,  treasured,    chartered,   recurred,    scat- 
tered, suffered,   illustrated,  clamored,  flattered,   traveled,  troubled, 
fluttered,  glittered, hammered, scrupled,  arbitrate,    aristocrat,  Brit- 
ish,   culprit,    gratitude,   degenerate,   fertile,   frustrate,    penetrate, 
perpetrate,    pervert,    shrewd,   vibrate,   virtual,  virtuous,  great,  re- 
treat, regret,  grade, grateful,  celebrate,  democrat,  credible,  degrade, 
defraud,    hatred,   effort,   emigrate,  third,  trade,  hypocrite,  gratify, 
vertical,    bread,    overtake,    predicate,    cupboard,    verdict,   thread, 
dread,  intrude,  tread,  sacred,  spread,   straight,    secretary,    demon- 
strate, Klliert,  Frederick,  Richard,  Robert,  Gertrude,  Albert,  Alfred; 


SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 


101 


(using  ar),  overture,  orchard,  remonstrate;  1  pos.  discreet,  entreat, 
fright,  greet,  treat,  trot,  predominate,  prominent,  bright,  brought, 
fraught,  freedom,  pride,  immigrate,  street,  secret;  3  pos.  crowd, 
crude,  fruit,  proud,  graduate,  scrutiny. 

337.  WORD   AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 

fv       1  Pos.  particular-ly,   2  opportunity,  3  part-y. 

1  according-ly,  creature,  2  cared,  occurred,  3  cured. 
1  till-it,  2  tell-it,  3  until-it. 


Partake 
m  ajority 
minority 

at-any-rate 

British-America 

court-of-justice 

virtue 

child 

calculate 

able-to-give-it 

spirit 

with-regard-to 

at-all-its 

at-all-times 

Great-Britain 


v_  -><--*/ 

political 
£         ^V)    ^               prosperity 

f;"T 

p  g__                for-the-most-part 
C_X~?5\                            delight 
ii*  '     guilt-y 

f,                 circulate 
Cy^"  —          ^'  —  -9         co-operate 

"^"^. 

•s                                    in-his-secret 
(--'      (f°    C*}              as-great-as 

*<     ^^  C_^~          in-order-that 
in-order-to 

EXERCISE  27. 

338.  1.  To-do-an  evil  action  is  base ;  to-do  a-good  action,  with- 
out incurring  danger,  is  common  enough;  but  it-is-the-part  of -a 
good-man  to-do  great-and  noble  deeds,  though-he  risks  everything. 
2.  Angels  are  bright  still,  though-the  brightest  fell.  3.  Men  re- 
semble the-gods  in-nothing  so-much-as  in-doing-good  to-their 
fellow-creatures.  4.  Many  delight  more  in-giving  of-presents 
than  in-paying  debts.  5.  Heaven  from  all-creatures  hides  the- 
book  of  fate.  6.  A-good  heart  will,  at-all-times,  betray  the-best 
head  in-the-world.  7.  The-greatest  trust  between  man-and-man 
is-the-trust  of-giving-counsel.  8.  The-next  dreadful  thing  to-a 


102  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

battle  lost  is-a  battle  won.  9.  It-  is  seldom  the  -case  that  beautiful 
persons  are  otherwise  of-great-  virtue.  10.  A-book  may-be  as- 
great-a  thing  as-a  battle.  11.  When  clouds  are-seen  wise-men  put 
on-their  cloaks.  12.  There-can-be  no  Christianity  where-there- 
is-no  charity.  13.  What-can-the  Creator  see  with  greater  pleasure 
than-a-happy  creature?  14.  The-last  enemy  tlmt-shall-be  destroy- 
ed is  death.  15.  The-better  part  of  valor  is  discretion.  16.  He-is- 
not-only  idle  who-does-nothing,  but-he-is  idle  who-might-be 
better  employed.  17.  To  know  how  to  -wait  is-the  -great  secret 
of-success.  (3m). 

339.  You-should-cultivate   a-good-memory  in-order-that,  at- 
all-times,  you-may-be-able-to-report  the-exact-evidence    which, 
in-courts-of-justice,    is    sometimes    given    at-the    rate    of    two 
hundred  a-minute.     (3  times  in  1  m). 

340.  TRANSLATE. 


?       ~v       ~        =\  . 

«?*..-X,  ........................  <?.  .....  ...,/.,,*  ........... 


NOTE. — "  Hold  your  paper  or  note-book  firmly  with  the  left  hand.  This 
can  best  be  done  by  placing  the  tips  of  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  upon 
<v<r.  edge  of  the  paper  at  right-angles  with  the  right  hand,  keeping  the 
tb  urnb  against  the  edge  of  the  paper.  By  a  slight  pressure  of  the  fingers 
the  paper  can  be  held  firmly  in  place  while,  with  the  thumb  at  the  edge  of 
the  paper,  the  page  can  be  readily  turned  with  it  as  soon  as  the  last  line 
is  written.  This  is  a  far  more  important  suggestion  than  it  may  seem, 
since  but  poor  work,  at  best,  can  be  done  unless  the  paper  is  firmly  held 
in  its  place. 


SHORTENED   FINAL-HOOK   CONSONANTS. 


103 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


SHORTENED  FINAL-HOOK  CONSONANTS. 


equivalent 

strengthened 

Ireland 


341. 

Blind 

lend 

paved 

petitioned 

meant 

mitten 

funds 
drafts 
bends 

round 

around 

grand 

superintendent 

stimulant 

suspend 


342.  Consonants  to  which  a  final  hook  is  joined  are  also  halved, 
both  stem  and  hook  being  pronounced  before  the  added  t  or  d,  as 
in  blind,  lend,  paved,  petitioned.    Meant,  for  instance,  is  expressed 
by  the  halved  ?— ^  men,  which  is  equivalent  to  men-te.     Here  the 
character  men  is  regarded  as  indivisible,  and  is  pronounced  first,  it 
not  being  allowable  in  such  case  to  sound  t  immediately  after  em, 
as  in  met,  before  the  reading  of  n,  expressed  by  the  final  hook. 
Hence,  in  mitten,  and  similar  words,  in  which  t  occurs  before  the 
final  hook,  the  halving  principle  cannot  be  applied. 

343.  But  the  s-circle  is  invariably  read  after  t  or  d,  as  in  funds, 
drafts,  bends. 

344.  Write,  using  the  f-hook:  Craft;  1  pos.  gift,  drift.  (N-hook), 
count,  tent,  faint,  fund,  lent,  mend,  paint,  vent,  dent,  dental,  tend, 
rent,   lend,  bound,   bend,  round,   spend,  stand,   surround,  silent, 
repent,  amend,  extent,   fount,   fountain,   indent,   mound,   refund, 
talent,  vacant,  violent,  moment,    accident,   disappoint,   disband, 
husband,   candor  (ar),  certificate,  certify,  event,  ancient,  potent, 
infant,  lament,  phantom,  mount,  mountain,  patent,  patient,  pay- 
ment, country,  ardent,  enchant,  demand,  random,  extend,  mankind, 


104  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

tendency,  depend,  exorbitant,  expedient,  valient,  resident,  serpent, 
servant,  argument,  Atlantic,  excellent,  equivalent,  basement, 
attentive,  strengthened,  coincident,  detriment,  urgent,  cement, 
encounter,  discount,  impotent,  delinquent,  distant,  document, 
cogent,  instant,  elephant,  enactment,  repugnant,  impediment, 
identity,  opulent,  incident,  stimulant,  suspend,  amazement, 
announcement,  romantic,  solvent,  subsequent,  observant,  abscond, 
memorandum,  Maryland,  Richmond.  Edmund,  Omnipotent;  ("using 
el),  elegant,  element,  gentle,  aliment,  boundless,  incidental, 
fundamental,  bundle,  candle;  (using  ar),  arrogant,  indenture, 
counter,  surmount,  venture,  remnant,  around,  remainder,  slander, 
Ireland,  Raymond,  Roland;  1  pos.  bond,  fond,  augment,  authentic, 
joined,  occupant,  joint,  point,  bind,  find,  kind,  appoint,  diamond; 
3  pos.  amusement,  apparent,  rudiment,  expand,  land,  landscape, 
pound,  band,  cant.  (N  and  1  hooks),  plant,  blunt,  applicant, 
supplicant,  blend,  gland,  plunder  far),  blunder  (ar),  Clement; 
1  pos.  blind;  3  pos.  bland.  (N  and  r  hooks),  grand,  brand, 
frantic,  front,  vagrant,  grand -jury,  president,  encouragement, 
frequent,  predicament,  precedent,  prevent,  reprimand,  superintend, 
transparent,  flagrant,  profound,  divergent,  fragrant,  pretend,  frag- 
ment, brilliant,  ingredient;  1  pos.  grind ,  immigrant,  print;  3  pos. 
ground.  (N  and  f  hooks),  pavement,  extravagant,  covenant, 
acliievmeni,  advancement  (des-menH,  reverend.  (N-hook  twice), 
countenance,  tangent,  penitent,  liniment,  monument,  mendicant, 
abundant,  ornament.  (Initial  n-hook),  insolent:,  insolvent.  (Prin- 
ciple applied  twice;,  respondent,  redundant-  /k'WuJej"  candidate, 
resentment,  sentiment,  amendment,  vindicate;  1  pos.  treatment, 
appointment,  predominant. 


NOTE.—"  There  are  two  good  reasons  why  it  pays  to  write  a  small  hand. 
I  do  not  mean  by  this  a  cramped  style,  which  is  as  difficult  to  write  and 
looks  no  better  than  the  other  extreme,  a  large  or  sprawling  style.  It 
takes  a  great  deal  more  time  to  write  a  character  twice  as  long  as  need 
be  than  it  does  to  strike  it  the  proper  length.  To  save  time  is  the  one 
thing  for  which  Short-haad  is  learned,  and  to  spread  the  characters  out 
over  double  the  necessary  amount  of  paper,  is  but  to  defeat,  in  a  great 
measure,  the  end  for  which  it  is  being  used." 


SHORTENED   FINAL-HOOK   CONSONANTS.  105 

345.  WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

1  Pos.  gentlemen,  2  gentleman,  3  imagined. 

1  cannot,  kind,  2  can-it,  3  account. 

1  mind,  2  may-not,  3  movement,  mount. 

1  behind,     be-not,  3  bound. 

1  which-ought-not,  2  which-not,  3  which-would-not,  which-had-not. 

1  which-ought-to-have-had,  2  which-have-had,  3  whieh-would-have-had. 

1  it-ought-not,  2  it-not,  3  it-would-not,  it-had-not. 

1  did-not,  2  do-not,  3  had-not. 

1  it-ought-to-have-had,  3  it-would-have-had. 

1  such-ought-to-have-had,  2  such-have-had,  3  such-would-have-had. 

2  such-are-not,  3  such-were-not. 

1  on-either-hand,  2  they-are-not,  on-the-other-hand. 


1  is-it,  2  as-it,  3  use-it. 

Derivative 
-    in  Unite 
„  profit,  prophet 

temperament 

testament 

will-nut 

which-are-not 

which-were-not 

dare-not 


intelligent 
V°    5~        island 
....<;...,,«<    record 


it-will-not 
which-will-not 
..    great-extent 

give-it 
gave-it 
.„    it-will-have-had 


appoint                                                    !      .,  we-are-not 

upon-it                          ^>       N                j  /    N — A         have-not 

on-the-one-hand      .......^.«..S2...1 M-...  Sei..    in-point-of-fact. 


106  REPORTING   STYLK    OI<'    SHORT-HAND. 

346.  EXERCISE  28. 

1.  Idlers  cannot-flncl  time  to-be  idle,  or-the-industrious  to-be 
at-leisure.  2.  We-must-always-be  doing,  or  suffering.  3.  How 
slow  the-time  to-the  warm  soul,  that,  in-the-very  instant  it  forms, 
would-execute  a-great  design!  4.  The-lcast  movement  is-of- 
importance  to  all  nature.  5.  The-entire  ocean  is  affected  by-a 
pebble.  6.  Nature  has  inclined  us  to-love-ineu.  7.  The-world 
cannot-do-witliout  great-men,  but-great-men  are  troublesome  to- 
the-world.  8.  In-life  we-shall-lind  inauy-meu  tliat-are -great, 
and-somc-men  that-are-good,  but-very  few-men  thut-arc-both 
great-and-good.  9.  A-man  is  sr.re  to-drcam  enough  before-he 
dies,  without-making  arrangements  for-the-purpose.  10.  I-do- 
notgive,  but-lend  myself  to  business.  11.  Good  counsels  observed 
are-claims  to-grace.  12.  If-there-is-auything  that  keeps  the- 
mind  open-to  angel  visits,  aud-repels  the-ministry  of  ill,  it-is 
human-love.  13.  Age,  that-lessens  the-enjoyment  of-life,  increases 
our  desire  of-living.  14.  We-do-uot  count  a-rnan's  years  until 
he-has-nothiug-else  to-count.  15.  1-have-ahvays  observed  that 
to-succccd  in-the-wodd  we-must-be  foolish  in  appearance,  but 
in-reality  wise.  1<>.  Beauty  lives  with  kindness.  17.  You-do-not 
believe,  you  only  believe  lliat-you-believe.  18.  Next  to  acquiring 
good-friends,  the-best  acquisition  is-that-of-good-books.  19.  I- 
can  promise  to-be  candid,  but  I-caimot  promise  to-be  impartial. 

20.  There-is-no-such-thiug  as  chance;    aud-what  seems    to    us 
merest     accident    springs     from-the-deepest     source     of-destiny. 

21.  1-have-often  thought  o1'-de:ith,   and-I-tind  it  tlie-least  of  all 
evils.     22.   The-greatest  dilliculties  lie  where- we -are-not  looking 
for-tliem.      2.">.     How   disappointment   tracks-the   steps   of  hope! 

24.  I)o-not-ask   il'-a-maii   lias-been   through    college;    ask    if-a- 
college    has-been    tlirough-liim,    il'-he-is-a    walking    university. 

25.  Genius    does     what-it-iiKist,    and-talent     does    what-it-can. 
2('..    There-is-in-man  a-higher  aim  than  love  of  happiness;  he-can- 
do  without  happiness,  and-instead  thereof  mid  blessedness.     (4m 
30s). 

347.  The-greatest  events  of-an-age  are-its-best  thoughts.     It- 
is-tlie   nature   of-thought  to-liiid  its-way   into-actiou.      (5   time.1 
in  1  m). 


348 


SHORTENED  LIQUIDS. 
TRANSLATE. 


107 


349. 


LESSON     XXIX. 


SHORTENED  LIQUIDS. 


Institute 
treated 
multitude 

_fJa- 

made 
V                 need 
./»«,  £._•    laid 

read 
failed 
wild 

-L..V-1 

a\     <^   S3        sweet 
*       i    '           wheat 
„-  yield 

around 
mind 
wend 

a...?....~... 

attempt 
U(\      <w          prompt 
..../^..^...    herald 

standard 
coward 
midst 

./.=*,/». 

defend 
I      s/\  w^_>*      endeavor 
.¥??..*....•£..,    Indiana. 

350.  It  is  often  inexpedient  to  use  a  half-length  letter  when  the 
angle  formed  by  its  juncture  with  another  consonant  is  not  sufficient 
to  render  it  readily  distin-ruisluble:  e.  g.,  in  looked,  the  shortened 
kay  should  not  be  used,  since  the  combination  lay-ket,  when  written 
quickly,  would  have  the  appearance  of  lengthened  lay.  For  similar 
reasons  the  halved  ish  should  not  be  used  after  lay;  en,  ef,  or  ve 
after  te  or  de ;  te  after  te  or  de ;  or  kay  after  ef  or  ve. 


1 08  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHOKT-HAXD. 

351.  A  final  half-length  te  denoting  tute,  tude,  or  ted,  is  disjoined 
In  some  cases  in  order  to  render  it  distinguishable,  as  in  institute, 
treated,  multitude. 

352.  f~  El,  ^  ar,  ^ —  em,   and    _^  en,   are    thickened  when 
halved  to  express  d,  as  in  made,  need,  laid,  read.  This  practice  adds 
to  the  legibility  of  short-hand,  and  gives  rise  to  no  ambiguity, 

since  f^  yea,   ^  way,  ^^    emp,  and ^ing  are  not  shortened. 

Only  the  downward  I  is  used  when  thickened  to  express  the  added 
d,  as  in  failed.    These  letters,  however,  are  not  shaded  \vheu  either 
the  w  or  n  hook  is  attached,  as  in  wild,  around,  mind,  wend. 

353.  Exceptions.     In  a  very  few  cases  way,  yea,  and  emp,  are 
halved,  as  in  sweet,  wheat,  yield,  attempt,  prompt. 

354>  Using  Id,  write:  Load,  scold,  lead,  fold,  manifold,  mould, 
Springfield,  unfold,  old,  laid,  sold,  herald,  crawled,  drilled;  1  pos. 
lead,  leader,  mild,  field;  3  pos.  loud,  mood;  (rd),  absurd,  afford, 
standard,  deplored,  beard,  yard,  Leonard,  sword,  coward;  1  pos. 
kindred,  ordinance,  read,  redeem,  redemption;  (mcl),  made,  mud, 
amidst,  modify,  meditate,  blamed,  inflamed,  claimed,  blossomed, 
drummed,  toiled,  meddle :  1  pos.  medium,  modulation,  mid,  mid- 
night, middle,  midst,  model,  modern,  moderate;  3  pos.  mad;  (nd), 
defend,  end,  endless  (el),  send,  defendant,  ascend,  ascendant, 
descend,  descendant,  index,  indebted,  endeavor,  indolence  (el), 
indolent,  indigent,  indivisible,  indulge  (el),  reasoned,  independent, 
errand,  transcend;  1  pos.  need,  needless  (el),  needle  CeO.  Indian, 
Indiana,  indicate,  indication,  intend;  3  pos.  sand.  [Disjoined  ted), 
dated,  destitute,  institute,  dreaded;  3  pos.  attitude. 

355.  WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGXS. 

1  Pos.  immediate-ly,  2  made,  3  mad. 

1  need,  2  end,  under,  3  hand. 

1  lead,  2  hold,  held,  old,  load,  3  loud. 

1  Lord,  read,  2    heard,  word,  3  hard. 


SHORTENED   LIQUIDS. 


109 


World 
handsome 

afterward 
r        ,      v           beforehand 
X^f.ifL..f,.,     behold,  beheld 

downward 
forward                         (       v^_ 

hazard 
"\       ^v^'           hand-writing 

short-hand             / 
undergo                  ^ 
hand-in-hand      .  ^...,  ... 

understand 
.rt   -^S7  f>          (jreater-than 
yL.??r...M.>*      ladies-and-Kentlemen. 

356. 


EXERCISE  29. 


1.  Adversity  is-the-trial  of-principle.  2.  Without-it,  a-man 
hardly  knows  whether  he-is-honest  or-not.  3.  By  steps  we-may 
ascend  to  God.  4.  Act  well  at-the  moment,  and-you-have  per- 
formed a-good  action  to  all-eternity.  5.  For-my-ownjpart,  I-had- 
rather-he  old  only-a-short-time  than-be  old  before  I-really  am  so. 

6.  As-we  grow  old    we-become  more  foolish    aud-more    wise. 

7.  Every-man    desires    to-live-long,   but  no-mau  would-be-old. 

8.  The-path  of-glory  leads  but-to-the  grave.     9.   A-merry  heart 
doeth  good  like-a-medicine,  but-a-broken  spirit  drieth  the-bones. 
10.  Heaven's  eternal  wisdom  has  decreed  that  man  of  man  should- 
ever-stand  in-need.     11.    He-makes  no  friend  who-never  hacl-a 
foe.     12.   Hatred  is  nearly  always  honest,  rarely  if-ever  assumed. 
13.   So-much  cannot-be-said  for-love.     H.   In  a-better-world  we- 
will-tind  our  young  years  and-our  old  friends.      15.    They-say 
women  ami-music  should-never-be  dated.     16.   Few  people  know 
how  to-be-old.     17.   (J,   how-much  more  doth  beauty  beauteous 
seem  by-that  sweet  ornament  which  truth  doth  give !     18.   There's- 
a  divinity  that-shapes  our  ends,   rough  hew  them  how  we-will. 
19.   Genius  makes-its  observations  in-short-hand;  talent  writes- 
them-out  at-length.     20.   The-miserable  have-no-other  medicine, 
but-only  hope.      '21.    Where-there-is-no    hope    there-cau-be    110 
endeavor.     (3  m) . 

357.  The-great-man  is-he  who,  in-the-midst  of-the  crowd 
keeps  with-perfect  sweetness  the-independence  of  solitude. 
(5  times  iu  1  m). 


110 


358. 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 
TRANSLATE. 


LESSON    XXX. 


359. 


Core 
gall 
margrave 

knoll 

cheer 

sport 

cork 

epicure 

jealous 

prevail 
qualify 
legislature 

derogatory 

persevere 

tolerable 

mortal 
ordinary 
volun  teer-ary 


INTERVOCALIZATION. 


cf-| 


gill 

moral 

shoal 

chart 

chill 

accord 

insurance 

lecture 

secure 

require 

school 

corporal 

North-Carolina 

California 

Delaware 

Baltimore 

correspondent 

preliminary. 


360.  Any  letter  of  the  double  or  triple  consonant  series  may  be 
intrrrocalizcd,  by  which  is  meant  the  vowel  may  be  placed  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  be  read  between  the  two  consonants.  E.  g.;1 
ker,  with  the  dash  vowel-o  struck  through  it,  is  read  core.  Here 
the  vowel,  by  being  written  in  this  manner,  is  read  after  kay  and 
before  ar.  Second  and  third  place  dash  vowels  are  struck  through 


INTER  VOCALIZATION.  Ill 

the  stems,  but  first-place  dashes  are  written  just  before  them,  as 
in  gall.  When  a  dot-vowel  is  to  be  written,  a  small  circle  is  used, 
and  placed  before  the  stein  if  long,  as  in  Margrave,  and  after  it  if 
short,  as  in  gill. 

361.  This  principle  is  rarely  applied  in  actual  reporting,  but, 
ft  considerable  advantage  is  nevertheless  secured  by  it;  for,  since 
it  is  a  rule  to  form  no  outline  too  brief  for  vocalization,  the  stems 
per,  ber,  ter,  dcr,  etc.,  would  have  to  be  written  out  in  quite  a 
number  of  words  in  which  double  consonants  may  now  be  used 
instead.  In  moral,  for  example,  the  outline  nier-lay  is  proper, 
since  it  will  admit  of  vocalization;  otherwise,  the  r-hook  could 
not  be  employed. 

3G2.  Write:  Fur,  cur,  core,  cull,  gull,  gall,  gill,  gal,  shoal, 
knoll,  cheer,  sport,  fort,  margrave,  board,  port,  carve',  chart,  chill, 
dirt,  nurse,  purse,  spur,  terse,  encore,  epicure;  1  pos.  accord* 
cork;  ^without  vowels),  course,  college,  derange,  elaborate, 
enormity,  demoralize,  impulse,  infer  infirm,  jealous,  journey,  in- 
surance, invalid,  lecture,  curb,  nerve,  nervous,  North,  moral, 
morality,  nourish,  perceive,  perjure,  person,  shirk,  engineer, 
picture,  pilgrim,  preliminary,  prevail,  pursue,  pursued,  cor- 
ner, shoulder,  qualify,  legislature,  recall,  regulate,  require, 
ridicule,  darling,  school,  sharp,  thirst,  signature,  telegram,  till, 
term,  Thursday,  treasure,  utility,  volume,  voluminous,  vulgar, 
abjure,  agriculture,  armful,  balcony,  barter,  capture,  cargo, 
collateral,  corporal,  corporate,  incorporate,  corroborate,  courteous, 
culture,  decorum,  derogatory,  calico,  director,  disparage,  partial, 
impartial,  distil,  divulge,  falter,  farthing,  garnish,  invulnerable, 
marble,  marshal,  miracle,  nursery,  nurture,  obscure,  parcel,  parlor, 
persevere,  porter,  portray,  purple,  shark,  singular,  tolerable, 
torpedo,  turke}',  valid,  valedictory,  vinegar,  volcano,  assurance, 
Charles,  George,  Jerome,  Philip,  Martha,  Georgia,  New-Jersey, 
North-Carolina,  Virginia,  Columbia;  1  pos.  column,  skill,  cord, 
discord,  gild,  guilt;  3  pos.  assure,  secure,  security.  (Sez),  persist, 
paralysis,  parenthesis.  (W-hook),  Delaware.  (F-hook),  gulf, 
turf,  telegraph,  adventure,  imperative,  California,  narrative.  (N- 
hook),  burden,  margin,  pardon,  pertain,  diligence,  jurisprudence, 
performance,  terminate,  German,  bargain,  cosmopolitan,  culminate, 
galvanic,  Mormon,  northeastern,  parlance,  Calvin,  Martin,  Morgan, 


112  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

Caroline.  (Shun-hookf) ,  perception,  circulation,  admiration,  par- 
tition, jurisdiction,  corruption,  regulation.  (Rel-hook),  journal, 
normal,  personal,  carnal,  phrenology.  (Halving),  carpenter, 
garment,  delegate,  departure  (ar),  invert,  dilapidate,  impart, 
market,  merchant,  merchandise,  mercantile  (el),  mortal,  ordinary, 
particle,  partner,  pursuant,  regard,  record,  transport,  voluntary, 
volunteer,  Vermont,  Baltimore,  Pittsburg,  deliberate,  corre- 
spond, correspondence,  correspondent,  default,  dormant,  escort, 
forbid,  parliament,  persecute,  portrait,  purport,  recorder,  scaffold, 
scarlet,  target,  jurist,  told,  velvet,  palpitate,  Archibald,  Arnold, 
Baldwin,  Gilbert,  Herbert  (ar). 

363.  EXERCISE  30. 

1.  Action  is  eloquence,  and-the  eyes  of -the  ignorant  more  learned 
than  their  ears.  2.  It-is-often  better  to-have-a-great-deal  of 
harm  happen  to-one  than-a-little;  a-great-deal  may  arouse  you 
to-remove  what-a-little  will-only  accustom-you  to  endure. 
:?.  There-is-nothing  that-makes-its-way  more  directly  to-the  soul 
than  beauty.  4.  We-make  way  for-the-maii  who  boldly  pushes 
past  us.  5.  Your  little  child  is-your-only  true  democrat. 
0.  Childhood  shmvs-thc-man,  as-the  morning  shows-the-day. 
7.  The-child  is  father  of-the  man.  8.  Defeat  is-a-school  iu-which 
truth  always  grows  strong.  9.  Admiration  is-the  daughter  of- 
ignorance.  (1  m  ISO  s). 

3(J4.  Rich-men  without  wisdom -and  learning  are-called  sheep 
with  golden  fleeces.  (9  times  in  1  in). 

365-  TRANSLATE. 


PREFIXES. 


113 


LESSON    XXXI. 


366. 


PREFIXES 


Compress 

conduce 

recommend 

countermarch 
contradiction 
contribution 

interview 
introduce 
antiseptic 

commodity 

contemporary 

interpose 

commentary 

community 

credulity 

accommodation 

commission 

compensation 

contempt 
command 
counterpart 

interrogation 

discontent 

malcontent 


reconstruct 
recognition 

excommunicate 


incompetent 

antiquary 

incomprehensible. 


367.  The  commonest  Prefixes  and  Affixes  are  provided  with  brief 
signs,  most  of  which  are  joined  to  the  main  outline.     Com  and  con 
are  indicated  by  a  dot,  as  in  compress  or  conduce.     In   most   cases, 
however,  this  dot  is  entirely  omitted  with  no  loss  of  legibility. 
Com,  con,  and  coy,  when  medial,  are   expressed   by   disjoining  the 
preceding  from  the  following  portion  of  the  word,  as  in  recommend, 
reconstruct,   recognition.     Counter,   contra- i-o,   are   indicated   by  a 
slanting  tick,  as  in  coitntermarclt,  contradiction,  contribution.   C  ircum, 
and  self,  are  denoted  by  the  s-circlc.,  as  in  circumvent,  self-conscious- 
ness.   Inter,  intro,  and  cnti,  arc  indicated  by  the  shortened  en,  joined 
to  the  remaining  part  of  the  word,  as  in  intervieiv,  introduce,antiseptic. 
Mai,  post,  and  super,  are  commonly  expressed  by  the  characters 
met,  pea,  and  .spr,  as  in  maladministration,  postpone,  supervene. 

368.  In  the  following  list,  the  prefixes  printed  in  italics  are  to 
be  represented  by  the   signs  just  explained.    The   syllables  en- 
closed in  brackets  need  not  be  written. 


114  KEPORTIXtf   STYLK   OK   SHOKT-HAXO. 

Commit,  commodity,  compass,  compensate,  compose,  convict, 
[conjtiuual  (el),  [con] temporary  (emp),  interpose,  console,  inten- 
fere,  accompany,  circnmnavigate,  conceit,  conciliate,  introduce,  con- 
cise, interest,  condemn,  confess,  countermarch,  decompose,  discom- 
pose, dis[con]tinue,  internal,  in[con]sistent,  recognize,  reconcile, 
selfish,  un[con]scious,  antithesis,  commentary,  committee,  compile, 
concede,  countercheck,  postpaid,  conspicuous,  conspire,  [con]vey- 
ance,  convoke,  misconceive,  [com]pare,  [com]pany,  [comjparison, 
conceive,  [con]form,  [con]scientious,  [conjscious,  [conjsist;  1  pos. 
consign,  conceal,  countersign',  3  pos.  conduce,  community,  [coii]- 
sume,  interview.  (L-hook), constable,  incomparable,  inconceivable, 
[accom]plish,  conjugal,  convulse,  [com]pel,  [conjflict,  interval. 
(R-hook),  concur,  confer,  circumference,  circumscribe,  incompre- 
hensible, preconceive,  se//-control,  compress,  [con]firm,  [con]gress, 
[con]spiracy,  [conjtraiy,  [controversy,  [conjverse,  enterprise; 
1  pos.  [com]prise,  [com] promise;  3  pos.  [con]strue,  ??iisconstrue. 
(W-hook),  o.ntiqnary,  cozoite'rwork.  (F-hook),  concave,  [con]- 
servative,  [con]trive,  [conjtrivance.  (N-hook),  concurrence, 
[con]tain,  [con]tains,  contino,  cojinte/'balance,  contravene,  in[coii]- 
venience,  re[com  pense,  compendium,  condolence,  [confidence, 
congenial,  [circum]stance,  [com]panion,  [com]plain,  [con]cern, 
[con]science,  [con]stancy,  [coifstrain,  [convenience,  [con]vince, 
[coii]tinuauce,  entertain,  in/rrline,  intervene;  1  pos.  countermine. 
(Shun-hook),  acco77imodation,  czrc?(mlocution,  [com]mission, 
[corn]petition,  compulsion,  [concession,  counteraction,  recognition, 
recommendation,  [con] sideration,  anticipation,  [com]plexion,  [con]- 
cessiou,  [con]clusion,  [con]desceusion,  [condemnation,  [con]ju- 
gation,  consecration,  [cou].solidation,  [con]viction,  [con]tcmpla- 
tion  (emp),  interpretation,  convulsion,  [combination,  [con]dition, 
[con]cei)tion,  mterdiction,  contribution,  conversion,  interjection, 
un[con]ditional,  [con]gregation;  1  pos.  [com]pletion;  3.pos.  con- 
fusion, [com]passion.  (S-shun-liook),  [com]pensation,  [com]po- 
sition.  (St-loop),  cowquest,  contest,  contrast,  con^rv distinction, 
composed,  congestion,  context,  [con]stitute,  [con]stitution.  (Halv- 
ing), accommodate,  ciraonspect,  co?nbat,  [conjtemplate  (emp), 
[con]tempt,  [comm]and,  [com]inent,  [con]duct,  compute,  [con]- 
seut,  concert,  [conjdescend,  confiscate,  [con]sult,  counterpart,  inter- 
dict, dis[con]nect,  compatible,  incompatible,  incc?nplete,  intersect, 


PREFIXES.  115 

mis[con]duct,  recommend,  interrupt,  seZ/-esteem,  anticipate,  anti- 
dote, [comm]andment,.  [con]duct,  [con]ductor,  nonconductor, 
«a;communicate,  [commjencement,  reconstruct,  [comparative, 
[com]plicate,  [coni]pliment,  [con]solidate,  [con] sonant,  [con]- 
struct,  [con] tact,  [con] tribute,  [contra]dict;  1  pos.  confide,  con- 
sort, counterfeit,  co?nplete,  [con]venieut,  interrogate,  interrogation; 
3  pos.  [con]clude,  [comm]unicate.  (R-hook),  [com]fort,  con- 
curred, concordance,  convert,  [congratulate,  [con]gratulation, 
interpret;.  1  pos.  concrete.  (N-hook),  compound,  [contingent,  dis- 
[con]tent,  ma/content,  [con]tent,  [con]straint,  incompetent  (en- 
tent),  [com]plained,  [con]fident,  [consistent,  [con]stant,  [con]- 
stantly  (el),  [cou]tent,  in[con]sistent;  3  pos.  confound. 

369.  WORD-SIGNS. 

Construction  unconcern 


confidential 
conjunction 

consequence 

consequent 

consequential 


o-o 


comprehend 
antiquity 

consider 

consideration 

reconsider. 


EXERCISE  31. 


370.  1.  Our-actions  are  our-own;  their  consequences  belong 
to-heaven.  2.  No-man  should-be  so-much  taken-  up  in-the-search 
of-truth,  as  thereby  to  neglect  the-more-necessary  duties  of- 
active-life;  for  after-all  is-done,  it-is-action  only  that  gives  a-true 
value  and-commendation  to-virtue.  3.  Active  natures  are  rarely 
melancholy.  4.  Words  are-good,  but-there-is-somethiug-bctter. 
5.  The-best  is-not-to-be  explained  by-words.  C.  The-spirit  in- 
which-we  act  is-the-chief  matter.  7.  Action  can  onlj'-be  under- 
stood and-represeuted  by-the-spirit.  8.  No-one  knows  what  he- 
i«-doing  while  he-is  acting  rightly,  but  of-what-is  wrong  we-are- 
always  conscious.  9.  Prosperity  is  too  apt  to-prevent  us  from- 
examining  our  conduct,  but  as  adversity  leads  us  to-think  properly 
of-our  state,  it-is-most  beneficial  to  us.  10.  Our  dependence- 
upon  God  ought-to-be  so  entire  and-absolute  that-  we  should-never 
thipk-it-necessary,  in-any-kiud  of-distress,  to-have  recourse  to- 
hunjan  consolations.  11.  He-who-would  pass-the  declining  years 
of-his-life  with  peace  and-comfort,  should  when  young,  consider- 
that-he-may-one-day  become  old,  and-reniember,  whec-he-is-old, 


116  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHOUT-HAND. 

that-he-has-once-becn  young.  12.  I-would  seek  unto-God,  and- 
unto-God  commit  my -cause.  13.  The -integrity  of-men  is-to-be- 
measured  by-their  conduct,  not-by -their  profession.  14.  He-who- 
has  lost  confidence  can  lose  nothing-more.  15.  Confidence  in-con- 
versation  has-a  greater  share  than  wit.  16.  The-conscience  is 
more  wise  than  science.  17.  Man's  conscience  is-the  oracle  of- 
God.  18.  He-is  richest  who-is  content  with-the  least,  for  content 
is-the  wealth  of  nature.  19.  Reasonable  men  are-the-best  diction- 
aries of -conversation.  20.  Silence  is  one-great  art  of-conversa- 
tion.  21.  Fear  God  and-keep  his  commandments,  for-this-is-the 
whole  duty  of  man.  22.  Gain  may-be  temporary  and-uncertain ; 
but  ever  while-you-live,  expense  is  constant  and-certaiu;  and-it-is 
easier  to  build  two  chimneys  thau-to-keep  one-in  fuel.  23.  If-a- 
good  face  is-a-letter  of-recommendation,  a-good  heart  is-a-letter 
of-credit.  24.  The-worth  of-a  state,  iu-the-long  run,  is-the-worth 
of-the  individuals  composing  it.  25.  Liberality  consists  less  in- 
giving  much  thau-in-giving  with-discretion.  26.  The-human-race 
is-in-the-best  condition,  when-it-has-the-greatest  degree  of-liber- 
ty.  27.  While-we-arc  reasoning  concerning  life,  life  is  gone. 
28.  Love  is  incompatible  with -fear.  29.  Prudence  and-love  are 
inconsistent;  in  proportion  as-the-last  increases,  the-other  de- 
creases. 30.  The-most  manifest  sign-of  wisdom  is  continued 
cheerfulness.  (5  m  30  s) . 

371.  He-is-happy  whose  circumstances  suit  his  temper;  but-^ 
he-is   morc-cxrclh'iit  who-can    suit  his   temper  to    any-circum- 
stances.     (5  times  in  1  in). 

372.  TRANSLATE. 


AFFIXES. 


117 


LESSON  XXXII. 


AFFIXES. 


373. 


Preserving 

castings                *\?" 
himself           .       g  ~^(S-§ 

ourselves 
yourselves 
•7s,  O  "P            accountable 

lordship 
friendship  .          "~^  j 
courtship                        Si  f~j 

\            barbarity 
fidelity 
V/\  ^-/  /.  ,      instrumentality 

township 
admissable 
disgraceful          i     J^.  J   /•» 

formality 
.-,             hospitality 
C  ^^"^\  W|L"     individuality. 

1>*          1 

T^S 

374.  The  dot  and  tick  are  used  to  denote  ing  and  ings  respec- 
tively, in  cases  where  the  letter  ^-^  ing  cannot  conveniently  be 
joined,  as  in  preserving,  or  castings. 

375.  The  s  and  sez  circles  denote  self,  and  selves,  as  in  himself, 
and  ourselves. 

376.  Ship  is  expressed  by  ish  or  shay,  as  in  friendship.     But  in 
order  to  avoid  unsuitable  outlines,  ish  is  sometimes  disjoined,  as  in 
courtship,  or  lordship. 

377.  The  endings  ility,   ality,  and  ariiy,  are  expressed  by  the 
detachment  of  any  letter  from  the  preceding  part  of  the  word,  as 
in  barbarity ,  fidelity ,  instrumentality. 

378.  The  terminations  ble  and  ful  are  often  indicated  by  be  and 
ef  simply,  as  in  admissable,  and  disgraceful. 

379.  In  the  list  here  given,  the  syllables  printed  in  italics  are 
represented  by  the  signs  just  explained. 

Debility,  legibility,  fidelity,  credulity,  barbarity,  formality, 
vitality,  stability,  instrumental'^,  familiar%,  casting,  observing, 
hustmgfs,  disgrace/I^,  seusiWe,  advisa&Ze,  yourself,  itself,  citizenship ; 
1  pos.  myself,  tliyself,  divisiWe;  3  pos.  ourself,  ourselves,  admissive, 
township.  (Halving) ,  hospital,'/,  individual?/,  hards/tip,  lordship  t 
courtship,  partners/tip,  accountable,  ostensiWe. 

380.  EXERCISE  32. 

1.  The-more-a-mau  denies   himself,   the-more  he-shall  obtain 


118  REPORTING   STYLK    OF    SHOUT-HANI). 

from-God.  2.  He-that-has-never-known  adversity  is  but  half 
acquainted  v,  ith  others  or-with  himself.  3.  No-sensible-person 
ever-made-au  apology.  4.  To-love-one-that-is  great  is-almost 
to-be-great  one's-self.  5.  Beauty,  like  truth-and-justice,  lives 
within-us;  like-virtue,  and-like  moral  law,  it-is-a  companion  of- 
the  soul.  6.  Man  believes  himself  always  greater-than  he-is,  aud-is 
esteemed  less-than  he-is-vvorth.  7.  Without  content,  we-shall- 
flnd  it  almost  as  difficult  to-pleuse  others  as  ourselves. 

8.  No-man  was-ever  so-much  deceived  by-another  as  by-himself. 

9.  Dignity  consists  not-iii-possessing  honors     but  in-deserving 
them.     10.   Economy  is-of-itself  a-great-revenue.     11.  The-best 
and-highest  part  of-a-man's  education  Is-that-which    he-gives- 
himself.     12.  The -mo  re -you  speak  of-yourself,  the-more-you-are 
likely  to  lie.     i;>.   Do-yon -wish  men  to-speak  well  of-you?     Then- 
never-speak  well  of-yourself.     14.  When-men  are-friends  there- 
is-no-need  ol'-justice;    but-when-men    are-just,   they   still    need 
friendship.     15.   All-men  would-be-master  of-others,  and-no-man 
is   lord  of-himself.      10.     No-man  is  happy  who-does-not-think 
himself  so.     17.   Self-trust  is-tlie  essence  of  heroism.     18.   Think 
wrongly,  if-you-please,  but  in-all-cases  tliink  for-yourself .   19.  Do- 
not  speak  of-your  happiness  to-a-man  less  fortunate  than  yourself. 
(o  in  45  s) . 

381 .  Every -person  lias-two  educations,  one-of- which  he-receives 
from-others,  and-one-more-important,  which  he-gives-himself. 
(5  times  in  1  m) 


382. 


TRANSLATE. 


EXPEDIENTS   AND   PUNCTUATION. 


119 


LESSON  XXXIII. 


EXPEDIENTS   AND   PUNCTUATION. 


383. 

from-day-to-day                       .,.//  

.  ?—  -T~~        from-week-to-week 

<>               from-generation-to-generatlon 

J^f           from-house-to-house 

from-street-to-street 
day-after-day                           ...i|... 
day-of-the-week 

j  i                from-town-to-town 
v               year-after-year 
^/               hour-of-the-day 
£^*2          wealtl.-:)f-the-nation 

^ 

\              importance-of-the-subject 

1  Cor.  3  chap,  10  verse          ..;?.«.. 

^C*.,  <3  r     Hist.   Eng.    Vol.   3.    chap.    9, 

16 

1$               Sec-  13' 

384.  Only  very  common  phrases,  such  as  these,  should  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  expedients  here  made  use  of.  In  some-of  the-paper, 
for  instance,  of -the  should  not  be  indicated  by  the  nearness  of 
some  and  paper. 


20  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

385.  PUNCTUATION. 


Parenthesis 


dash 


hyphen 


brackets 


period 


underscore. 


386.  Other  punctuation  marks  are  the  same  as  in  long-hand, 
but  are  rarely  made  use  of  except  in  correspondence.     In  reporting, 
a  semicolon  is  indicated  by  a  space  of  an  inch  or  more.     Little 
opportunity,  however,  is  given  for  punctuating  short-hand  notes, 
the  only  practical  method  being  to  leave  spaces  to  correspond  with 
the  speaker's  pauses,  and  insert  the  proper  marks  afterwards  when 
transcribing. 

387.  'EXERCISE  33. 

1.  It-has-been  well  observed  that  few  are  better  qualified  to- 
give-others  advice  than  those-who-have-taken  the-least  of-it 
themselves.  2.  Advice  is  seldom  welcome.  3  Our  happiness  in- 
this-world  depencls-upon  the-affections  we-are-able-to  inspire. 

4.  He-who-purposes   to-be-an  author,    should-nrst-be-a  student. 

5.  Books,    like    our-friends,    should-be    few,    and-well    chosen. 

6.  Every  great-book  is-an  action,   aud-every  great  action  is-a- 
book.     7.   No-man-can-be   brave   who   considers   pain  to-be  the' 
great  evil  of  -life  ;  nor  temperate,  wlio-considers  pleasure  to-be-the 
highest  good.     8.   Judges  ami-senates  have-been  bought  for-gold. 

9.  A-man's  character  is-the  reality  of  himself;  his  reputation  the- 
opinion  others  have-formed  about-hiin;  character  resides  in  him, 
reputation  iii-other-people;  thai-is-tho  substance,  this  thc-shudow. 

10.  The-scenes   of-childhood  are-the   memories  of  future   years. 

11.  Heaven  lies  about  us  in-our  infancy.     12.  It-is-better  to-have- 
a  lion  at-the-head  of-au-army  of  sheep,  than-a  sheep  at-the  -head 
of-au-army  ol'-Iions.     l;i.   Conscience  warns  us  as-a-friend  before 
it  punishes  us  as-a-judge.     14.   Clirist  saw-much  in-the-world  to 
weep  over,  ami-much  to-pray  over;    but  he-saw  nothing  in-it  to- 
look  on  with  contempt.     15.  Knowledge  of-our  duties  is-the-mosi 


EXPEDIENT*   AM)    PUNCTUATION.  121 

useful  part  of  philosophy.  16.  The-best  education  in-the-world 
is-that  got  by  struggling  to-get  a-living.  17.  Did-a-person  but 
know  the-value  of-an  enemy,  he-would  purchase  him  with-pure 
gold.  18.  The-flrst  and-last  thing  which-is  required  of  genius  is- 
the  love  of-truth.  19.  Genius  is-the  gold  in-the  mine;  talent  la- 
the miner  who-works  and-brings  it  out.  20.  Genius  finds  its-own 
road  and-carries  its-own  lamp.  21.  Hope  is  like  a-bad  c?ock, 
forever  striking  the-hour  of  happiness,  wliether  it-has-come  or- 
not.  22.  The-setting  of-a-great  hope  is  like  the-setting  of-the 
sun.  (4  m). 

388.  Phrase   and   punctuate:    There  are  two    ways    of    being 
happy  we  may  either  diminish  our  wants  or  augment  our  means 
either  will  do  the  result  is   the  same  and  it  is  for  each  man   to 
decide  for  himself  and  do  that  winch  happens  to  be  the  easiest  if 
you  are  idle  or  sick  or  poor  however  hard  to  diminish  your  wants 
it  will  be  harder  to  augment  your  means  if  you  are  active  and 
prosperous  or  young  or  in  good  health  it  may  be  easier  for  you  to 
augment  your  means  than  to  diminish  your  wants  but  if  you  are 
wise  you  will  do  both  at  the  same  time  young  or  old  rich  or  poor 
sick  or  well  and  if  you  are  very  wise  you  will  do  both  in  such  a 
way  as  to  augment  the  general  happiness  of  society. 

389.  TRANSLATE. 


NOTE.  —  "  Half  the  work  of  learning  Short-hand  consists  in  acquiring 
the  ability  to  read  without  hesitation  what  has  been  written.  Until  one 
has  acquired  this  ability,  which  long-continued  practice  alone  can  give, 
it  will  make  no  difference  how  plainly  he  may  write,  his  notes  will  not  be 
legible  to  him." 


122  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


390.  GENERAL   PRINCIPLES. 


Obituary 

battery 

betray 

better 

defy 

striven 

study 

ousted 

stead 

steed 
staid 
stood 


V- 


..p... 


dream 

philosopher 

druggist 

mean 

meaner 

meanest 

meanly 

meaning 

meanness 

demean 

fatal 

moderator. 


301.  Since  the  consonant  signs  may  be  combined  in  numerous 
different  ways,  there  arises  an  important  question  of  choice  con- 
cerning the  various  outlines  which  it  is  possible  to  construct  for  a 
given  word,  especially  when  unusual  or  technical  terms  and  proper 
names  arc  to  be  written.  In  better,  for  example,  the  consonant 
delineation,  b-t-r,  may  be  expressed  by  four  different  outlines, 
be-te-ray,  be-te-ar,  be-ter,  and  bet-ray.  Which  of  these  four  best 
expresses  the  word?  It  will  be  observed  that  b-t-r  is  also  the 
delineation  for  betnnj,  which  should,  if  convenient,  be  written  dif- 
ferently from  better.  The  tirst  two  are  unnecessarily  long;  ot  the 
remaining  two,  the  tirst  properly  expresses  betray,  and  the  last 
better,  and  for  these  reasons :  In  betray,  be  should  not  be  halved  to 
express  te,  since  the  rule  is  not  to  shorten  any  letter  to  express  a 
to  or  de  which  belongs  to  a  subsequent  syllable.  And,  in  this  word, 
it  is  necessary  al>o  that  the  double  consonant  ter  be  used,  since 
t  ami  r  coa!e>ce,  there  being  no  intervening  vowel.  In  better,  ex- 
pres>ed  by  the  last  outline,  be  is  properly  halved  to  denote  the  fol- 
lowing te.  The  lir>t  two  outlines  read  respectively,  battery  find 
obitunry,  and  neither  will  admit  of  contraction,  owing  to  the  num- 
ber of  vowels  to  be  supplied.  In  all  cases  the  number  and  location 
of  the  vowels  determine  the  precise  outline  to  be  selected,  tho  rule 


GENERAL   PRINCIPLES.  123 

being  that  every  outline  should  be  contracted  as  much  as  practicable 
but  not  be  made  so  brief  as  to  prevent  vocalization.  This  princi- 
ple is  further  illustrated  by  the  outlines  chosen  to  represent  words 
whose  consonant  delineation  is  s-t-d,  study,  ousted,  stead,  steed, 
staitl,  stood. 

392.  Each  syllable  of  a  word  contains  one  vowel,  and  in  order 
that  this  may  be  written,  it  is  necessary  that  some  of  the  preceding 
or  following  consonants  be  expressed  with  a  long,  or  alphabetical 
sign.  For  example,  in  de-fy  the  alphabetic,  rather  than  the  adjunc- 
tive,  or  hook  ef ,  must  be  written,  in  order  that  the  vowel  i  may  be 
inserted  if  necessary.  This  is  important  whether  the  vowel  is 
actually  written  or  not,  since  the  use  of  the  alphabetic,  instead  of 
the  adjunctive  sign,  indicates  that  a  vowel  is  to  be  supplied.  In 
striv-en,  for  example,  thfere  are  two  vowels ;  hence  there  should  be 
two  long  strokes,  and  no  more.  Of  the  first  syllable  consonants,  te 
is  the  one  properly  chosen  to  be  written  long,  in  order  that  all  the 
remaining  consonant  sounds,  s,  r,  and  v,  may  be  expressed  ad- 
junctively.  Hence  is  deducted  the  genei'al  principle,  that  for  each, 
syllable  of  a  word  there  must  be  either  a  full  or  half  length  alphabetic 
letter.  This,  with  the  adjunctive  signs  that  may  be  attached,  is 
written  with  one  stroke  of  the  pen.  There  are,  of  course,  many 
exceptions  to  this  rule,  as  in  case  of  words  which  have  fewer  con- 
sonants than  syllables,  as  o-bit-u-a-ry;  and  others  whose  outlines 
will  not  admit  of  sufficient  contraction,  as  dream,  which  contains 
but  one  syllable,  but  re-quires  two  strokes  of  the  pen.  But  care 
should  be  taken  as  far  as  possible  to  so  group  together  all  the  con- 
sonants in  any  one  syllable,  that  they  may  be  written  at  a  single 
stroke,  as  in  phi-los-o-pher. 

393.  Derivative  words  are  commonly  written  by  adding  the 
necessary  consonant  signs  to  their  primitives;  e.  g.  the  outlines  for 
meaner,  meanest,  meanly,  meaning,  meanness,  and  demean,  are  formed 
by  joining  ar,  est,  el,  ing,  ens,  and  de,  to  the  primitive  mean.  It  is 
true  that  the  most  facile  outlines  are  not  always  secured  by  con- 
forming with  this  rule,  as  meanest,  for  example,  could  be  more 
quickly  written,  em-nest.  Nevertheless,  this  rule  should  be  follow- 
ed as  long  as  angular  outlines  are  the  result,  since  by  means  of  it, 
legibility  is  greatly  increased,  and  the  labor  of  acquiring  the  art 
considerably  diminished.  There  are  many  exceptions  to  this,  how- 


124 


REPORTING    STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAXD. 


ever,  as  when  its  observance  produces  unsuitable  outlines,  as  in 
druggist,  where  to  secure  angularity,  the  st-loop  instead  of  est,  is 
joined  to  the  primitive  drug;  also,  where  the  syllabification  is 
changed  by  means  of  the  added  consonants,  as  in  fa-tal,  (written 
ef-tel,  not  eft-lay),  and  mod-e-ra-tor  (med-ray-ter,  not  med- 
ret-ar) . 

EXERCISE  34. 

394.  Words  containing  the  same  consonants,  but  requiring 
different  outlines: 

Spirit,  separate,  support;  states,  estates,  status;  stop,  steepy, 
estop;  canst,  keenest,  Kensett;  trained,  turned,  tornado;  browned, 
burned,  brandy;  spade,  speedy,  espied;  skate,  socket,  asked;  billed, 
blood,  bloody;  freed,  afraid,  forehead;  deigned,  dandy,  denied; 
rend,  around,  ruined;  older,  ladder,  Eldora;  signed,  assigned, 
synod;  Elsie,  Lucy,  less;  bayonet,  bent,  Bennett;  married,  humor- 
ed, moored;  scorn,  screen,  scrawny;  estray,  star,  estuary. 


TRANSLATE. 


1"~k  V.VA/..  * 


PROPER  NAMKS. 


125 


LESSON  XXXV. 


395. 


PROPER  NAMES. 


A 
B 

c           \  ;'j 

P 

D 
F                                      |       '    L 

S 
•v       ,                         T 
J       1       n                 V 

G 

_<:* 

V 

f      -x                      w 

v~     ;  —  o         x 

3 

I             ...S...^r... 

Y 
S~    "\   J 

..f   .  /   *•-—  ?            Washington 

M 

N                                      ^^ 

Porter 
Francis               c\      ex 
Montgomery        »1      ^^p^i-^i 

t—     "                Carlyle 
(     0^   /-^~^        Sherman 
.cr^..r73.rn.."Ji..     Chambers 
•#^       <i" 
Nelson 
o          ^^  „/          Napoleon 
^--J2-^^^  *O     Foster 

Cumberland           '      ^ 
Morgan 

4          "      ^      Spencer 
o,^    i    .     y-^        Des  Moines 
CJ        K7i       q       Iowa  City. 

396.     When  practical,  it  is  best  to  write  proper  names  in  both 
long  and  short-hand,  particularly  where  the  spelling  is  not  indicated 

by  the  pronunciation.    If  in  Court,  for  instance,  Miss  .__£ /^ 

should  be  called  as  a  witness,  and  her  name  written  in  short-hand 
only,  the  proper  spelling,  Coralie  Eoth,  would  not  be  known  when 
the  notes  came  to  be  transcribed.  The  stenographic  character 
does  not  indicate  the  spelling  of  a  name,  but  what  is  equally 
important,  it  gives  the  pronunciation,  which  the  spelling  of  it  does 
not  do.  Once  writing  in  long-hand  is  sufficient  for  a  name  that 
occurs  a  number  of  times  in  a  single  report.  If  the  spelling 
cannot  be  had,  the  name  should  be  carefully  vocalized  the  first 
time  written.  Names  are  so  numerous  that  a  vocabulary  of  them 
could  not  well  be  memorized;  and  this  would  be  unnecessary,  since 
the  practical  writer  can  readily  invent  sufficiently  intelligible  out- 


126  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

lines  for  the  most  difficult  of  them.  The  halving  principle  should 
be  made  use  of  sparingly.  Any  outline  which  may  stand  for  more 
than  one  name,  as  kay-per  for  both  Cowper  and  Cooper,  requires 
that  one  or  more  of  the  principal  vowels  be  inserted.  A  name 
thus  vocalized  need  not  be  underscored. 

EXERCISE  35. 

397.  FACULTY    OF    IOWA    STATE    UNIVERSITY. 

J.  L.  Pickard,  President,  Nathan  R.  Leonard,  Gustavus  Hinrichs, 
Charles  A.  Eggert,  Amos  F.  Currier,  Stephen  N.  Fellows,  W.  F. 
Peck,  P.  J.  Farnsworth,  W.  S.  Robertson,  W.  D.  Midclleton,  John 
C.  Shrader,  Leonard  F.  Parker,  Elmer  F.  Clapp,  P.  H.  Philbrick, 
Samuel  Calvin,  James  M.  Love,  A.  C.  Cowperthwaite,  W.  H. 
Dickinson,  George  A.  Thurston,  Lewis  W.  Ross,  Susan  F.  Smith, 
Emlin  McClain,  Austin  Adams,  John  F.  Buncombe,  John  N.  Rogers, 
C.  M.  Hobby,  I.  P.  Wilson,  James  H.  Rothrock,  W.  D.  Stillman, 
William  C.Preston,  Thomas  II.  McBride,  Phcbe  Scofleld,  Will  E. 
Crane,  O.  T.  Gillett,  T.  G.  Roberts,  Clias.  W.  Eaton. 

398.  Cowper,     Channing,     Byron,     Druminoud,     Harrington, 
Hudson,  Beecher,  Dickens,  Evans,  Harrison,  Lambert,  Blackstone, 
Clay,  Douglass,  Cobden,  Everett,  Hale, Herbert,  Andrews,  Brewster, 
Bacon,    Brown,    Butler,    Chapman,   Clinton,   Franklin,    Hamilton, 
Hedge,  Lincoln,  Luther,  Macaulay,  Mitchell,  Osborn,  Pascal,  Potter, 
Rochester,  Rogers,   Ruskin,  Spurgeou,   Strickland,  Taylor,  Tenny- 
son,   Thompson,   Wesley,    Irving,   Johnson,   Littleton,   Liverpool, 
Madison,  Monroe,  Buchanan,  Logan,  Newton,  Nellie  Y.  Hutchinson, 
Lillian  Cooley,  Bessie  Gardner,  Win.  A  Shcpfer,  Chas.  R.  Brown, 

A.  A.  Ladd,  Will  II.  Miller,  II.  W.  Seaman,   H.  C.  Truesdale,  Jas. 

B.  French,  Clara  Gruber,  Emil  L.  Boerner,  Fred.  A.  Remley,  W. 
H.  Martin,  Frank  Olds,  MJTOH  E.  Wheeler,  Ly man  Banks,  Emma 
Scarles,    Ada    Gaston,     Marion    Graysou,    Jenny    Griffiths,    Lide 
Cameron,  London,  Edinburgh,  Paris,  Berlin,  Philadelphia,  Boston, 
Denver,  Lexington,  St.  Paul,  Omaha,  Lancaster. 


SPECIAL   RULES   AND   PRACTICAL   SUGGESTIONS.  127 

399.  TRANSLATE. 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


SPECIAL  RULES  AND   PRACTICAL  SUGGESTIONS. 

400.  Exceptions  must  sometimes  be  made  to  the  rules  given  for 
the  proper  curving  and  slanting  of  letters  to  prevent  certain  out- 
lines from  expressing  too  much;  e.  g.  assail  and  jail  are  written  in 
the  manner  shown  by  the  first  and  third  outlines,  not  by  the  second 
and  fourth. 


Assail  jail  gravest  nicest  Northampton  Trans-Continental  Ry.  Co 

401.  Est  may  sometimes  be  struck  upward,  as  in  gravest,  and 
nicest. 

402.  Reporters   often   contract   the   outlines   for   such  lengthy 
words  and  phrases  as  Northampton,  or  Trans  -Continental  Railway 
Company,   especially   if   these  are   repeated  several  times   in  one 
report. 

403.  The  liquids  r  and  I  are  commonly  expressed   by  ray  and 
lay,  ar  and  el  Deing  employed  only  when  their   use  secures  more 
angular  or  facile  outlines.      Final  I  when  preceded  by  ^_  -  V^i  °  —  t 
or  —  ',  should  be  expressed  by  the  downward  stroke.     When  this 
letter  follows  an  initial  vowel,  el  should  be  used,  as  in  alike  (el-kay)  ; 


128  REPORTING   STYLE    OF   SHORT-HAND. 

but  exceptions  are  made  when  necessary  to  secure  angular  outlines, 
as  in  alight,  written  lay-te,  instead  of  el-te.  Shay  is  employed  only 
when  ish  cannot  be,  which  is  rare,  as  in  shell,  written  shay-lay,  not 
ish-lay,  or  ish-el.  Shay  and  el  are  never  used  standing  alone. 

404.  The  professional  reporter  is  allowed  certain  licenses,  which 
should  not,  however,  be  taken  by  the  student.     In  rapid  writing,  he 
may  give  the  letters  less  than  the  required  amount  of   slant  or 
curvature,  omit  shading  to  a  certain  extent,  and  even  in  some  cases 
write  first  and  third  position  words  on  the  line.     Every  writer  in 
time  becomes  familiar  with  those  inacuracies  which  are  peculiar  to- 
himself;   but  it  should   be  his  constant  aim  to  keep  as  near  the 
standard  as  possible,  in  order  that  the  legibility  of  difficult  passages 
may  not  be  endangered,  and,  also,  that  others  may  be  able  to  read 
his  notes. 

405.  Limit  of  inaccuracy.     In  no  case,  however,  should  a  word 
be  written  so  far  wrong  as  to  appear  to  be  an  entirely  different 
word. 

406.  The  greatest  speed  will  be  gained  ultimately,   only  by 
writing   die  characters  quite  near  each  other,  and  cultivating  as- 
small  and  neat  a  hand  as  possible. 

407.  No  stenographer  can  afford  to  disregard  certain  general 
directions  \vliich  relate  to  the  mechanical  part  of   his  profession. 
He  should  use  paper  distinctly  ruled,  and  of  the  best  quality  only. 
A  good  line  pointed,  short-nibbed  gold  pen  of  medium  size  should 
be  employed.   This  should  be  more  or  less  elastic,  dependent  on  the 
writer's  lightness  of  touch.     Arnold's  writing  fluid  is  most  suitable. 

408.  If  a  pencil  is  used,  it  should  be  of  medium  hardness  only, 
kept  sharp,  and  used  with  soft  or  uncalondered  paper.     It  is  well 
to  employ  this  only  in  exceptional  cases,  since  the  transcribing  of 
pencil   notes   is    injurious  to  the  eyes.     For  various  other  reasons, 
also,  the  pen  is  much  siipiTior  to  the  pencil  for  short-hand  work. 

405).  Professional  stenographers  commonly  use  note-books  man- 
ufactured expressly  for  this  purpose.  Not  only  are  these  the  most 
suitable  for  such  work,  but  greater  ease  of  writing  Is  secured  by  the 
habitual  use  of  books  which  are  uniform  as  to  size  of  page,  width 
of  ruling,  and  quality  of  paper. 

410.  All  stenographic  notes,  no  matter  for  what  purpose  taken, 
should  be  filed,  indexed,  and  carefully  preserved  for  several  years. 


SPECIAL  RULES  AKD   PRACTICAL   SUGGESTIONS.  129 

The  contingencies  are  many  which  may  render  a  transcript  of  some 
portion  of  these  very  valuable. 

EXERCISE  36. 

411.  THE   BOLTER  SCHOOL  BILL. 

Extract  from  a  speech  delivered  before  the  Iowa  Legislature  by 
Hon.  R.  L.  Bolter,  Feb.  26,  1884.  Reported  by  F.  A.  Remley. 

1.  Mr.  Speaker: — The-important-changes  proposed  are  in-the 
1st,  5th,  and  157th  Sections  of-this-bill.  2.  It-will-be  readily  seen 
on-a  careful  examination,  that-in-these  three  Sections  will-be- 
found  all-the  real  changes.  3.  What-are-these-changes?  4.  Simply, 
sir,  that-each  civil  township  is  made-a  corporate  body  for  school- 
purposes,  having-the-right  to  sue  and-be  sued,  and-do-other  cor- 
porate acts.  5.  Now,  I-am-a ware,  sir,  that- this  fact  alone,  in-my- 
judgment,  will  elicit  about-the-only  discussion  thai-will  be  called 
out  by-the-bill.  6.  Each  civil  township  is-the  smallest  govern- 
mental division  of-our  State  and-National  system,  and-has-beeri 
in-existeuce  since  colonial  times.  7.  Every  school  boy  of-twelve 
understands  their  boundaries.  8.  If-I  were  asked  to-explaiu  the- 
present  school-system,  and-our  abominable  system  of-school- 
districts,  I-would-be  unable  to-do-so.  9.  I-think-it-is-not-too- 
much  to  say  that-not-one-of-my-friends  will-be-able-to-explain 
to-this  House  the-system  for- which  he-will  contend.  (2  m). 


NOTE. — "  In  taking  down  rapidly  the  words  of  another,  no  time  is  al- 
lowed for  giving  any  attention  to  the  principles  of  Grammar,  Punctua- 
tion and  Capitalization.  Knowledge  of  these,  however,  is  absolutely 
necessary  in  making  an  acceptable  transcript.  It  will  not  do  to  write  out 
a  speech  or  a  letter  as  though  it  were  one  long,  loose  sentence,  without  a 
pause  or  a  capital  in  it.  Inability  to  readily  capitalize,  punctuate  and  re- 
arrange poorly  constructed  sentences  will  and  should  debar  one  from  the 
profession.  To  give  satisfaction  the  young  reporter  must  be  able  care- 
fully to  correct  all  obvious  grammatical  errors  made  by  the  speaker,  in- 
sert the  proper  marks  of  punctuation,  capitalize  the  right  words,  and  to 
divide  the  whole  into  appropriate  paragraphs." 


130  REPORTING   STYLE   OF    SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON     XXXVII. 


AMANUENSIS   REPORTING. 

412.  As  a  prerequisite  to  success  in  this  field,  a  thorough  educa- 
tion is  demanded  in  the  common  English  branches,  as  arithmetic, 
orthography,  grammar,  and  business  forms.     Good  penmanship, 
and  a  knowledge  of  type-writing,  book-keeping,  and  in  rare  cases 
telegraphy  and  some  of  the  modern  languages,  are  also  valuable. 

413.  Various  degrees  of  speed,  ranging  from  90  to  150  words 
per  minute,  are  required.     As  such   secretary,   it  becomes  one's 
duty  to  write  letters,  telegrams,  contracts,  agreements,  newspaper 
articles,  briefs,  editorials,  etc.,  at  the  dictation  of  his  employer,  or 
whoever  has  the  business  management,  and  afterwards  transcribe 
and  deliver  the  same.     A  better  understanding  of  the  secretary's 
duties  may  be  gained  from  a  consideration  of  the  relations  existing 
between  him  and  his  employer.     It  is  much  more  severe  mental 
work  to  rapidly  indite  important  business  letters,  than  to  slowly 
write  them  out.     Dictating  is  in  fact  as  much  an  accomplishment 
as  reporting.     Perfect  quiet,  and  security  from  all  disturbance,  are 
essential  in  the  work  of  dictating  letters  and  papers  of  this  kind. 
Hence   the    stenographer   to    the   fullest  extent   possible,    should 
refrain  from  everything  that  may  perplex  or  disconcert  the  reflec- 
tions of  his  superior.     He  should  not  only  maintain  quiet,  but  be 
prepared  the  moment  called  upon  to  read  what  he  has  written,  and 
remain  in  con.stant  readiness  to  record  every  word  spoken.     He 
should   also   abstain   from   all    show   of    nervousness    duriug  the 
occasional  intervals  in  the  dictation. 

414.  When  the  matter  in  hand  is  entirely  finished,  he  may  ask 
for  the  spelling  of  proper  names,  insert  words  which  he  failed  to 
hear  or  record,  and  make  the  necessary  corrections.    Apparent 
grammatical  and  verbal  errors  need  not  be  called  up,  but  should  be 
corrected  by  himself  when  the  transcript  is  made. 


AMANUENSIS    REPORTING.  131 

EXERCISE  37. 

415.  1.  The-best  time  to-frame  an-answer  to-the-letter  of-a- 
frieiid  is-the-moment  you-receive-it.  2.  Then-the-warmth  of- 
friendship,  aiid-the  intelligence  received,  most  forcibly  co-operate. 
3.  Letters  which-are  warmly  sealed  are-often  but  coldly  opened. 
*.  Let-your-letter  be-written  as  accurately  as-you-are-able, — I- 
mean  with -regard-to  language,  grammar,  and  stops;  for-as-to-the 
matter  of-it,  the-less  trouble  you-give-yourself  the-better  it-will- 
be.  5.  Letters  should-be  easy  aud-uatural,  aud-convey  to-those- 
to-whom  we-send-them  just  what  we  would-say  if-we-were-with- 
them.  6.  To- write  a-good  love-letter,  you  ought-to  begin  without- 
knowing  what-you-mean-to  say,  and-to-flnish  without-knowing 
what-you-have  written.  (1  m  30  s). 


416.  OMAHA,  NEB.,  DEC.  3,  1883. 

William  Tackaberry  &  Son, 

Sioux-City,  Iowa. 

GENTLEMEN  : — We-understand  t IK- -impression  has-been-formed 
by-you  that  E.  C.  Palmer  &  Co.  have-been  given  the-agency  in- 
your-city  for- our  crackers. 

We-beg  to  advise  you  that-such-is-not-the-case.  We-do-not 
purpose  to-give  the-agency  for-our  crackers  to  any-one -house, 
thereby  depriving  ourselves  of-a  vast  amount-of  business  we  would 
otherwise  get.  We-have-been  offered  the-exclusive trade  of-other 
wholesale-houses  in-your-city  for-that  privilege,  but  have-always 
declined  and-in  future  will  pursue  the-same  policy. 

We-beg-to  advise  you  further  that  the r advertisement  given  us 
by  Messrs.  Palmer  &  Co.  in-their  journal,  is-entirely  gratuitous. 
They-are-not  recompensed  either  directly  or  indirectly  for-the- 
same  by-this-house. 

We  assure-you  your  business  is  thoroughly  appreciated  by-us, 
aud-will-alvvays  meet  with  as-much  favor  at-our  hands  as  any- 
house  trading  with  us,  either  in  Sioux-City  or-else where. 

Yours  respectfully, 

Jos.   GAKNEAU  CRACKER  Co. 

Dictated  to  Miss  Ada  Gaston.  (2  m.  30  s.) 


132  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

417.  ST.  PAUL,  MINN.,  Nov.  8,  1883. 

Messrs.  A-   Ruiz   &   Sons, 

Malaga,   Spain. 

GENTLEMEN: — Ref erring- to-your  esteemed  fayor  of-the  21st 
ult.,  we-wish-to  say,  that-when-you-are  ready  to  quote  prices  on- 
your  brands  of  layer  rah  ins,  we  would-be-pleased  to-receive 
quotations,  with-the  view  of-placing  our  fall-and-winter  order 
with-you.  We  would  also  kindly  request  you  to  inform  us  whether- 
you-have  any  arrangements  with-any  line  of  steamers  running  from- 
your  port  to  New- York  or  Baltimore,  and-what  rates  of  freights  you- 
can  quote  us;also,what-the  insurance  and-other  expenses  connected 
with-a  shipment  of  say  5,000  or  10,000  boxes  would-be.  Any- 
other  information  that-you-can-give-us,  that-you-think  would-be 
valuable  for-us,  will-be  appreciated.  Awaiting  your  reply,  we-a"<i 

Very-truly-yours, 

GLIDDEN,   GRIGGS  &  Co. 

Dictated  to  W.  A.  Shepfer.  (1  m  45  s). 


418.  NEBRASKA  HOSPITAL  FOR  THE  INSANE, 

LINCOLN,  NEB.,  Nov.  20,  1883. 
J.  W.  Trisler, 

St.  Louis. 

DEAK-SIR: — -Mr.  Triskr  was  brought  to-the  Asylum  a-fewmonths 
ago  from  Wyoming  Ter.  He-is-insane,  but  quiet,  aud-iu-general 
good-healtli.  My-impressions  are-that-hc-will-not  recover  his 
mental  health  soon,  probably  never.  He-is  comfortable,  and- 
seems-to-be  contented.  At  any-time,  if-you-would-like  to-hear 
from-liini,  just  drop  me  a-postal-card,  anything  to-remind  me, 
aud-I-will  take-pleasure  iu  writiug-you. 

Respectfully, 

H.  P.  MATHEWSON,  Supt. 
Dictated  to  Miss  B.  Archibald.  (1  m). 


AMANUENSIS    REPORTING.  133 

419.  ST.  PAUL,  MINN,,  Feb.  29,  1884. 

D.  Getty  &  Co., 

White  Bear,  Minn. 

GENTLEMEN: — Enclosed  I  hand -you  statement  of-3'our  account 
to  Jan'y  1st.  You-know  we-do-not-often  say-auything  to-you 
about-money,  but  just-no\v  we-are-havinii  heavy  demands  upon- 
us,  ami-collections  are  rather  slow,  so-that  we  are  compelled  to 
ask-you  to-do  all-that-you  possibly  can  for-us.  We-shall  greatly 
appreciate  anything  you -can-do. 

ALLEN,  Moox  &  Co. 

Dictated  to  Will  E.  Miller.  (1  ra). 


420.  TRANSLATE. 

FARR  &  Co.,  Collection,  Real  Estate  and  Insurance  Agents. 

CEDAR  RAPIDS,  IA.,  Dec.  12,  1883. 


134  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

421.  NEBRASKA  HOSPITAL  FOR  THE  INSANE, 

LINCOLN,  NEB.,  Nov.  20,  1883. 


LESSON  XXXVIIL 


AMANUENSIS    REPORTING,   (Continued). 

422.  The  thoughtful  student  need  not  be  told  that,  since  all  the 
plans  and  secrets  of  his  employer's   business  must  be  made  known 
to  the  correspondence  clerk,  the  most  implicit  confidence  is  reposed 
in  him,  and  loyalty,  integrity,  and  devotion  to  business  are   pre- 
sumed by  the  relationship  established.     He  should  not  only  be  so 
discreet  as  not  to   divulge  office   secrets,  or  betray  implied  confi- 
dence, but  he  should  show  plainly  by  his  conduct  that  he  is  faithful 
to  his  employers,  and  interested  in  their  behalf. 

423.  No  matter  how  accomplished  a  private  secretary  may  be, 
his  services  will  not  be  .sought,  if  he  has  not  cultivated  habits  of 
prudence,  and  showu  himself  to  be  safe  and  trustworthy. 


AMANUENSIS   REPORTING.  135 

424.  In  taking  difficult  matter  at  dictation,  in  which  corrections 
and  interlineations  are  afterwards  to  be  made,  it  is  well  to  leave 
the  alternate  lines  blank  for  this  purpose.  Letter  books  should  be 
paged,  and  every  letter  indexed  in  a  separate  book  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  can  be  quickly  referred  to  afterwards. 


EXERCISE   38. 

425.  NEBRASKA  HOSPITAL  FOR  THE  INSANE, 

LINCOLN,  NEB.,  Nov.  20,  1883. 
Hon    E.   J.  Hainey, 

Aurora,  Neb. 

DEAR-SIR: — Mrs.  Crarger  is  very  insane,  and-is-incliued  to-be 
violent  and-troublesome.  I-think  her-friends  wonld-flnd  her  very- 
difficult  to-manage.  Doubtless  it-would-be  desirable  to-the 
County,  and-it-certainly  would-bo  to  us,  to-have  her  off  our 
hands:  yet-it-is-my-opinkm  that-it-would  be-a-very  unjust  pro- 
ceeding, both  to  Mrs.  Crarger  and-her-friends,  to-place  her  in-a 
private  family.  We  get-along  with-her  very-well,  aud-with-very- 
little  trouble,  but  I-feel-certain  that- if  she  were  with-persons  not 
accustomed  to-manage  tlie-insane,  they  woukl-fiud  it-impossible 
to-get-along  with  her.  However,  if-the  Commissioners  of  Insani- 
ty think-best  to-try-the  experiment,  certainly  there-could-be-no- 
objectiou  on  our-part;  yet  I  wouldn't  advise  it. 

Respectfully, 

H.  P.  MATIIEWSON,  SUPT. 

Dictated  to  Miss  B.  Archibald.  (1  m  45  s). 


426.         FARR  &  Co.,  Collection,  Real  Estate  and  Ins.  Agents, 

CEDAR  RAPIDS,  IOWA,  Dec.  4,  1883. 
Mr.  M.    Traver, 

Le-Graiige,  111. 

DEAR-SIR: — Yours  of  Nov.  30th  received.  You  ask  if-I-have-a 
lot  of -good -farms  for  exchange?  I-have-not  at-the-present-time 
a-large  list  for  exchange,  but -some  for-sale.  I -might  possibly  get- 
<ou  an-exchange  on-farm  or  good  town  property  In  Cedar  Rapids, 


Io6  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

or  in -North- Western  Iowa.    Will  write-you-again  soon-and  tell- 
you-what-I-have.  Yours-truly, 

MARK  C.  FARR. 
Dictated  to  Anna  Goodeil.  (1  m) . 


427.  ST.  PAUL  FIRE  AND  MARINE  INS.  Co, 

ST.  PAUL,  Jan.  4,  1884. 
Albo  De  fiernales,  Esq., 
New  York. 

DEAR-SIR: — Reptying  to-your  favor  of-the  19th  inst.  we  here- 
with enclose  .statement  showing  amount  of-the  grain  premiums,  as- 
they-have-been  reported  to-you  uuder-our  grain  series.  The- 
amounts  reported  in-October  and-November  grain  account  have- 
been  paid  to-you,  and-the-balance  will-be  included  in-Dee,  ac- 
count. If-yon -cannot  find  reports  for  these  by  examining  your 
tiles,  wc-will  send-you  duplicates.  We-are-quite  certain  that-we- 
have-seiit-you  reports  for-all  of-these  risks  as-soou-as  received 
by  us.  Yours-truly, 

Stenographic  Letter.  C.  B.  GILBERT,  SEC'Y. 

Dictated   to  Bessie  Gardner.  (1m  20s). 


428.         GEO.  W.  CRANK  &  Co., 

Blank-Book  Manufacturers,  Printers  and-Binders, 
Mr.   A.  B.,  TOPEKA,  KAN.,  March  20,  1884. 

Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

Dr.AK-Sn:: — Tile-Dockets  sent-you  are-the-kind  which-are  in- 
general  use  iu-this-dty.  The-full  printed  form  made  it-necessary 
in-a-great-many-;:a*es  to  transfer  the-record  to-the-back  of-the- 
book.  ThN-is  obviated  in-the-l'orm  which  we-send-you,  and-also 
in-the  Justice's  Gnido  wliicli  we  enclose,  and-which  will  give-the 
Justice  the-form  of  entry  of  any  case  that-may-come  before-him. 
We-\vi!l  exchange  the-l)ocket  if-you-wish,  but  thiuk-your  Justice 
will-lind  the-form  sent  the-more  convenient. 

Yours  very-truly, 

CRANE  &  Co. 
Dictated  to  Lide  Cameron.  (_!  m  30  s) 


AM  AM   K\>1S    KKPOUTING.  137 

429.  Ouu  HOME  OX-TIIE  HILLSIDE, 

DANSVILLE,  LIVINGSTON-  Co.,  NEW -YORK,  March  1,  1884. 

Isaac  Bennett,  Esq., 

Carrollton,  111. 

MY-DEAR-SIR: — Our  mutual -friend,  Mr. -Peters,  who-is-at-pres- 
eut  iii-the-employ  of-Our  Hume  ou-the  Hillside,  as-one-of-its 
reporting-secretaries,  has  handed  me  your-letter  of  Feb.  20, 
wherein  you  expivvs  a-desiiv  to-havc-my  testimony  in-respect-to 
steuograpliic-writing.  It  gives-me  great-pleasure  to  say-to-you, 
that-for  twenty-six  years  I-have-liad  young-men-and-women  in- 
my-employment  as  stenographers.  Such-is-my  estimate  of-the- 
value  of-the-art  of-short-haud,  that-I-would-have-it  taught  in-all- 
our  graded-schools  and-academies  throughout  the-land  to  young- 
raen-and-women.  Taking  all-our  institutions  into  account,  aud-the 
wide  range  of- occupations  in-which-our  young-men  have-to  engage, 
and-which-are  opening  to-our  young-women,  I-would-rather  have 
given  proficiency  in  stenography  as-a-part  of-a  young-man's  or-a 
young-woman's  education,  than-the-best  average  Collegiate  accom- 
plishment which  any-of-our  Colleges  or-Universities  furnish  in- 
the  Latin  and-Greek  languages.  It-is-not  simply  as  scribes  for- 
others  that-this-art  is-of-value ;  for-it-is  of -quite  as-much  service 
to-those-who  attain  it  in-their-own  private  affairs.  What-an- 
excellent  opportunity  it  furnishes  to-one  who-has-it  at-hand  to- 
tnake  memoranda  of  things  seen  and-heard,  and -thus  furnishing 
him  with-the-means  of-fastening  in-his  mind,  and-having  at-his 
service,  most  useful  information!  I -have-had  on-an  average  for 
twenty-five  years,  not-less-than  three  short-haud-writers  in  con- 
stant use;  and-I-do-not-know  of  any  who  after  my  training  have- 
not  secured  good-positious,  ami-kept  them,  and-obtained  entirely 
satisfactory  compensation.  Assuring  you  that-I-am  in-the  fullest 
sense  a-believer  in-the-worth  of-the-art  as-a-means  of  added  use- 
fulness in-whatever  profession  or-calling  any -person  may-be  en- 
gaged, ami-wishing  you  all-success  in-your  pursuit  of-it, 
I-remain,  Yours  faithfully, 

JAMES  C.  JACKSON. 

(5  m). 


138 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


430.  TRANSLATE. 

GLIDDEN,  GRIGGS  &  Co.,  Importers  &  Wholesale  Grocers, 

ST.  PAUL,  MINN.,  Nov.  9,  1883. 


431- 


Jos.  GARNEAU  CRACKER  Co., 
OMAHA,  NEB.,  Dec.  3,  1883. 


SPEECH   REPORTING.  135* 

432.  ST.  PAUL  FIRE  AND  MARINE  INS.  Co., 

ST.  PAUL,  Jan.  15,  1384. 


v^  C 

...T^....A^. 


.C--  ........  ~. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


SPEECH  REPORTING. 

433.  A  verbatim  report  of  a  rapid  public  speaker  is  the  greatest 
achievement  of  the  stenographic  art.  There  are,  however,  but 
comparatively  few  speeches  of  which  reports  are  wanted;  and  it  is 
a  fortunate  fact  that  the  best  orators,  whose  speeches  are  the  most 
frequently  published,  are  the  easiest,  also,  to  report.  But  it  is 
very  I'.uv:  l!ut  a  tsp-jcch  a;>;K-Lii-s  well  in  print,  in  the  precise 
language  in  which  it  was  delivered.  A  certain  amount  of  tautology 
and  repetition  add  to  the  force  of  a  spoken  address,  which  in  a 
orinted  report  must  be  discarded.  Many  allusions,  and  even  whole 
sentences,  may  oftentimes  be  profitably  omitted;  and  the  rhetoric- 


140  KEPORTIXG    STYLE    OF    SHOUT-HAND. 

of  an  extemporaneous  speech  can  generally  be  improved.  These 
matters  lie  clearly  within  the  scope  of  the  stenographer's  duty;  but 
the  best  plan  is  always,  when  possible,  to  submit  to  the  speaker 
himself  an  exact  copy,  written  on  paper  with  a  broad  margin,  in 
order  that  he  may  amend  and  remodel  as  he  sees  fit. 

434.  The  student  will  find  the  following  suggestions  of  value, 
whether  he  intends  making  a  business  of  this  branch  of  reporting 
or  not. 

Fully  prepare  yourself  before  the  speech  begins.  Obtain  a  seat, 
one  at  a  desk  if  possible,  within  easy  hearing  of  the  speaker.  Have 
yourself  amply  provided  with  writing  material.  Use  a  pen,  if  you 
are  accustomed  to  one;  otherwise,  have  a  number  of  sharpened 
pencils  at  hand. 

435.  No  matter  what  the  purpose  of  your  report  may  be,  make 
it  a  point,  far  as  you  are  able,  to  take  every  word  that  is  uttered. 
If   the  entire  speech  is  not  wanted,  you  can  prepare  an  intelligent 
synopsis   from   your  full   short-hand   notes;    but  an  abridgement 
made   in  shorl-li-uid  while  the  speech  is  being  delivered,  is  by  no 
means  satisfactory. 

43(>.  Beginners  are  sometimes  obliged,  however,  before  they  can 
follow  a  rapid  speaker,  to  make  as  full  a  synopsis  as  they  are  able, 
recording  the1  substance  only  of  what  is  said.  And  it  is  common- 
ly the  case,  indeed,  that  only  partial  reports  of  very  rapid  speakers 
are  wanted. 

437.  A  complete  report  of   a  speech  requires  that  many  things 
be  inserted,   which,  verbally,  are  not  a  part  of  the  address  itself, 
things  acted  rather  than  said.     The  manner  and  appearance  of  the 
speaker  should  be  described ;  also,  the  character  of  the  audience, 
and  the  demonstrations  of  approval,  or  otherwise,  with  which  the 
.speaker's  utterances  are  received. 

EXERCISE  3'J. 

438.  1.   As-it-is-the-characteristic  of-great  wits  to  say-much 
in-few  wonN,  so-it-is  of-small  wits  to-talk  much  and-say-nothing. 
'2.    It-is-when  yon-come  close-to-a-man  in-conversation  that-you 
discover  \vha1-his  real  abilities  are.     3.  Speech-making  is -a  knack. 
4.    Men  are-horn  with-two  eyes,   but-with-one  tongue,  in-order- 
that-they  should  see  twice  as-much-as  they-say.     (1  m). 


SPEECH   KEPOHTIXG.  141 

439.  THE-PRESENT-AGE. — CHAXXIXG. 

1.  The-remarks  now-made  on  literature  might-be  extended  to- 
the  fine-arts.  2.  In-these  we  see,  too,  the-tendency  to-universal- 
ity.  It- is -said,  that-the-spirit  of-tlie  great  artists  has  died  out; 
but-the  taste  for- their  works  is  spreading.  3.  By- the  improvements 
of  engraving,  and-the  invention  of  casts,  tlie-genius  of-the  great- 
masters  is  going  abroad.  4.  Their  conceptions  are  no-longer  pent 
up  in  galleries  open-to  but  few,  but  meet  us  in-our  homes,  and- 
are-the  household  pleasures  of  millions.  5.  Works  designed  for- 
the  halls  ami-eyes  of  emperors,  popes,  and-noblcs,  find  their-\vay, 
in  no  poor  representations,  in  humble  dwellings,  and-sometimes 
give-a  consciousness  of-kindred  powers  to-the  child  of  poverty. 
6.  The-art  of  drawing,  which  lies  at-the-foundation  of-most  of- 
the  fine-arts,  and-is-the-best  education  of-the  eye  for-uature,  is- 
becoming-a  branch  of-common  education,  and-in  some  countries 
is  taught  in-schools  to-which  all-classes  are  admitted.  7.  I-am 
reminded  by-this  remark  of-the-most  striking  feature  of-our 
times,  as  showing  its  tendency  to-universality,  and-that-is-the 
unparalleled  and-constantly  accelerated  diffusion  of-education. 
This  greatest  of-arts,  as-yet  little  understood,  is  making  sure 
progress,  because-its  principles  are-more-and-more  sought  in- 
the-common  nature  of  man ;  and-the  great-truth  is  spreading,  that- 
every-man  has-a-right  to-its  aid.  8.  Accordingly  education  is- 
becomiiig-the-work  of  nations.  9.  Even  in-the  despotic  govern- 
ments of  Europe  schools  are  open  for-every  child  without-distinc- 
tion;  and-not-only-the  elements  of-rcadingand-writing,  but-music 
and-drawing  are  taught,  and-a  foundation  is  laid  for  future 
progress  in  history,  geography,  and-physical  science.  10.  The- 
greatest  minds  are  at-work  on-popular  education.  11.  The- 
revenuesof  states  are  applied  most  liberally,  not-to-the  universities 
for-the  few,  but  to-the  common-schools.  12.  Undoubtedly  much 
remaius-to-be-done ;  especially  a-nevv  rank  in-society  is-to-be 
given  to-the  teacher;  but  even  in-this-respect  a-revolution  has 
commenced,  and-we-are  beginning  to-look  ou-the  guides  of-the 
young  as-the  chief  benefactors  of -mankind.  (4  m) . 


142 
440. 


REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 
TRANSLATE. 


~2» 


_JT_V 


CONVENTION    REPORTING.  143 

LESSON  XL. 


CONVENTION    REPORTING. 

441 .  Stenographers  are  employed  to  report  the  proceedings  of 
various  deliberative  assemblies,  as  legislatures,  constitutional,  and 
the  more  important  political  conventions,  and  professional  and 
trades-men's  associations.  These  reports  arc  commonly  furnished 
to  newspapers,  and  also  frequently  published  in  book  form.  The 
purposes  for  which  they  are  made,  and  the  degrees  of  fullness 
required  are  so  various,  that  no  comprehensive  rules  can  be  laid 
down  Milticient  to  govern  the  reporter  in  every  case.  The  follow- 
ing suggestions,  however,  will  be  found  of  value. 

44*2.  The  stenographer  should  if  possible  be  seated  near,  or  at 
the  same  table  with  the  orticial  secretary,  in  order  that,  as  the 
business  progresses,  he  may  learn  the  names  of  speakers,  and  those 
taking  part  in  the  discussions. 

443.  It  is  the  best  plan  always  to  take  as  full  notes  as  possible 
although  an  abridged  report  only  may  be  wanted,  since  the  work 
of  condensing  can  better  be  performed  when  the  transcribing  is 
being  done,  than  when  the  proceedings  are  in  course. 

444.  It  is  commonly  the  reporter's  dutj'   to  take    clown    all 
motions  and  resolutions,  except  those  in  writing;  also,  amendments 
thereto,  and  remarks  and  decisions  thereupon. 

445.  Essays,  and  other  papers  which  are  read  to  the  asso.cia- 
tiou,  are  filed  with  the. secretary,  and  need  not  be  taken  down  in 
short-hand;    but  the  discussion  of  any   question  to   which  these 
may  give  rise,  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter. 

446.  The  speaker's  name,  when  announced  by  the  chairman, 
should  be  written  in  long-hand  at  the  left  margin  of  the  paper,  and 
his  remarks  recorded  just  below. 

447 .  The  official  stenographer  of  the  convention  should  make  a 
record  of   everything  that  transpires.      Much  revision,   and  the 
judgment  of  an  editor,  are  needed  in  preparing  such  verbatim 
reports  for  publication.    This  is  usually  done  by  the  secretary,  or 
a  special  committee.      Short-hand    writers  experienced   in   this 


144  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

branch  of  the  profession,  are  often  employed  both  to  make  and 
revise,  or  edit,  such  reports. 

EXERCISE  40. 
448.  PROCEEDINGS 

OK  THE 

THIRD  ANNUAL  MEETING  OF   THE  IOWA  STATE  PHARMACEU- 
TICAL ASSOCIATION, 

HELD  IN  DBS  MOINES,  FEBRUARY  14-15,   1882. 
OFFICIALLY  REPORTED  BY  ELDON  MOHAN. 

FIRST  DAY, — WEDNESDAY  AFTERNOON  SESSION. 

The-meeting  was  called-to-order  at  10  o'clock.  President 
Hogin  in-the  chair. 

The-minutes  of-the  last  session  were  read,  corrected,  ancl- 
approvecl. 

The-President:  I-will-now  call-for-the-report  of-the  Commit- 
tee on  Legislation. 

The-report  was  read  by- the  Chairman,  Mr.  Bush,  and-the  paper 
passed  to-tlie  Secretary. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Wallace,  the-report  of-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  was  adopted. 

The -President :  Dr.  Treat,  have -you  any-thing-further  to-re- 
port  on  Pharmacy  and  Queries? 

Dr.  Treat:     Yes-sir;  a-paper  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of-Clinton. 

The-Secretary :  Mr.  Chairman,  I-would-like-to-say  first,  that 
our  Treasurer  lias-a-letter  from  Mr.  Hardy,  expressing  regrets  for- 
his  inability  to-be  at -the  meeting. 

The-President:  We-will-now  listen  to-the  reading  of-the  paper 
by  Mr.  W.  II.  Hardy,  of  Clinton. 

The-paper  is  read  to-the  Association  by  Dr.  Treat. 

The-President:  Now-yon-have  heard-the  readjng  of-the-paper 
by  Mr.  Hardy,  of-Clinton.  What-is-the-pleasure  of-the  house  as- 
to-the  disposal  of-it? 


CONVENTION   REPORTING*  145 

Dr.  Treat:  1-move-you  Mr.  Chairman,  that-the  communication 
be-received. 

The-President:  You-mean-by-that,  that-it  shall-be  printed  in- 
the  proceedings? 

Dr.  Treat:     Yes-sir. 

The-motion  was-carried  and-the  thanks  of-the  Association  ten- 
dered the-writer. 

Mr.  Schafer:  I-will-now-present  the-report  of-the  committee 
appointed  to-cousider  the-Presidents  address. 

Vice-President  Townseud  assumes  the-chair. 

The  committee  referred  to  report  as  follows:  "To-the  President 
and-members  of-the  Iowa  State  Pharmaceutical  Association:  Your 
committee  appointed  to-con.sider  the-address  of-our  retiring 
President,  ask-to-present  the-following  report: 

We-do  most  heartily  concur  in-the  leading  suggestions.  We- 
would,  however,  call-your  special-attention  to-the  following 
recommendations : 

1.  That-every  registered  Pharmacist  look  well  to  all  impositions 
from  unprincipled  persons,  in-obtaining  liquors  for  improper  use 
uuder-all-mauner  of-representatious. 

2.  That-we  heartily  endorse  the  aiding  and-sustaining  the-Com- 
missioners  of  Pharmacy  in-their  duties  to-the  full  extent  of-the 
law. 

3-  The-subject  of-revising  the-By-Laws  had-our  attention,  but 
owing  to-the  necessities  of-the-case,  amendments  have  already- 
been  adopted,  which  fully  cover  this-point. 

4.  We-most  heartily  and-cheerfully  endorse  the-suggestion, 
that-the  Association  become  incorporated  under-the  laws  of-the 
State.  A-motiou  to-adopt  the-report  of-the  committee  prevailed. 

Mr.  Crawford:  Mr. -Chairman;  I-move-you  that-the  Committee 
on  Legislation,  as  expressing  the-sense  of-this  Association,  be 
instructed  to-procure  an-amendmcnt  to-the-preseut  law,  making- 
it-a  penalty  not-exceeding  $200.00  for-a-person  conducting-a 
pharmacy  without  registration,  by-haviug-that-matter  so-that-it- 
•will  properly  come-before-the  Grand-Jury,  and-that-the  Court 
may  act  at  discretion,  and-make-a  flue  not-exceeding  this  amount. 
There-are  communities  where- the  prohibitory  liquor  law  of  Iowa  is 
10 


146  KEPORTIXG   STYLE   OF    SHORT-HAND. 

practically  a-dead-letter.  No  Grand-Jury  can-be  imoaueled  to- 
take  proper  cognizance  of-the  law. 

The-law-maker  makes-the  law,  not-only  to-rule  subjects,  but- 
also  to-rule  the-law-makers.  Now  I-think-that,  in-this-matter, 
we-staud  between-the  law-maker  and-the  law-breaker.  In-this- 
respect  we-are  handling,  unfortunately,  patent  medicines,  one -of- 
the  giant  evils  of-the  day.  That-there-is-a-demaud  for-them,  no- 
one  questions.  This-demand  comes  as-well  from -the  law-maker 
as-it  does  from-the  law-breaker.  While-one-man  claims  to-call- 
for-it  withiu-the  limits  of-the  law,  there -is-a-question  at-last 
about-what  there-is-a-call-for.  Now-then,  we-are-not  only 
standing  between  law-makers  and  law-breakers,  but-we-stand 
betweeu-the  patent  medicine  man  and-the  consumer,  between-the 
physician  and-the  patient.  It-seems-to-me  our-position  is-a-very 
peculiar  one.  Tor-instance,  some  nostrum  is  placed  upou-the 
market  and-it-is  so  advertised  that-there-is-a-demand-for-it,  and- 
we,  as  retail-dealers,  purchase  some  aud-sell  it  to-our-customers 
who-demand-it.  It-is-a  spurious  article.  Who-gets-the  blame? 
I-thiiik-those-who-are  doing-business  on-honest  principles  and- 
living  up  to-the  law,  will  go  forward  ami-raise  the-standard  so- 
high  tlmt-every-one  will-be  ashamed  to  engage  in-that-business. 

The-President:  The-motion  now  is-that-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  procure  u-pharmacy  law  makmg-the  violator  liable  to- 
a  penalty  not-exceeding  $200.00. 

Mr.  Parish:     Did-you-say-that-it-should-be  indictable? 

Mr.  Crawford:  Yes-sir.  I-said-that-it-should-be-a  misde- 
meanor, and-that-the  penalty  should-be-that-amount. 

A-Member:  I-think-tiiere  ought-to-be-a  way  of-getting  out-of 
it  without-making  it  a-Graud-Jury  affair.  I-think-it-is-au  offense 
that  ought-to-be  punishable  beiore-a-justice-of-the-peace. 

Mr.  Parish:  I-don't-think,  Mr.  Chairman,  that-you-can-find-a 
town  in  Iowa,  where-there-is-a  druggist,  but-who-has-a  delicacjr 
about  filing-a  complaint  again  st-a  competitor.  But  if -you -make- 
it  a-Grand-Jury  offense,  they-will-be  obliged  to-take  action  in- 
these-matters.  You-may  take-it  in-any  town.  There-is  one  in- 
our  town  who-is-not-a  pharmacist,  not  eligible  by-reasou-of  age, 
and-he-is  violating  the-law,  and-there  ought-to-be  somebody 
whose  duty  it-was  to-take  action  in-these-matters. 


CONVENTION  REPORTING.  147 

Mr.  Ellis:  Let-us-take-aview  of-our position  as  druggists,  the- 
position  in-which  we-are  held  up  before-the-public,  so-far-as  we- 
are  individually  concerned.  It-ought-to-be  our  object  personally 
to  abide  by-the-laws,  whatever  these  laws  may-be.  (11  in). 

449.  TRANSLATE. 


NOTE. — The  successful  reporter  of  public  meetings  is  wide-awake  and 
observing;  on  the  alert  constantly  not  only  to  hear  what  is  said,  but  to 
know  what  is  meant  by  the  speaker.  The  Stenographer  who  does  not 
know  the  meaning  of  what  he  writes  cannot  be  relied  upon  to  make  a 
correct  transcript. 


148  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  XLI. 


LAW  REPORTING. 

450.  Law  Reporting,  or  the  business  of  recording  the  proceed- 
ings had  on  the  trial  of    causes,  is  one  of    the  most  important 
branches  of  the  stenographic  profession.     In  this  day,  all  the  more 
important  cases  are  reported  in  short-hand,  and,  indeed,  of  so  great 
advantage  is  this  art  found  to  be  in  the  administration  of  justice, 
that  in  many  states  the  appointment  of  skilled  stenographers  is 
authorized  by  law.     In  the  most  perfect  methods  of  administering 
justice  that  have  been  devised,  it  has  been  required  that  some  kind 
of  record  of  the  evidence  be  preserved,  and  the  fuller  this  is  the 
better. 

451.  Stenography  has  revolutionized  the  methods  of  proceeding 
in  the  Courts;   for  by   its  speed  much  time  is  saved,  and   delays, 
which,   during  a  trial,   are  prejudicial  to  justice,  are  more  easily 
prevented,  and  the  occasion  for  expensive  re-trials  oftentimes  pre- 
cluded.    In  no  business  or  profession  is  stenography  more  welcome 
than  in  law,  where  so  much  depends  on  a  record  being  kept  of  the 
precise  words  made  use  of. 

452.  The  Law  Reporter  must  possess  various  qualifications  in 
order  to  a  competent  discharge  of   the  duties  of  his   calling.     He 
should   be    able    to   write  at   least  one  hundred  and  seventy-five 
words  a  minute,  and  read  his  notes  fluently.     In  addition,  also,  to 
a  thorough   English  education,    good  memory,    and    quickness  of 
perception,  he  should  have  a  familiar  acquaintance  with  the  various 
forms   and   methods   of   proceeding   in   Courts.     The  greater   his 
knowledge   of    law,  especially   that  of    evidence,   the  better.     No 
student,  should  neglect  the  main  features  of  this  branch  of  the  pro- 
fession.    Especially  the   forms  of   such  reports  should  be  learned, 
since  amanuenses,  and  all  short-hand  writers  in  fact,  are  frequently 
desired  to  make  reports  of  depositions,  referred  cases,  and  the  tes- 
timony received  at  preliminary  hearings. 


LAW    REPORTING.  149 

453.  The  Caption  of  a  law-stenographer's  report  should  show 
the  title,  number,  and  nature  of  the  cause,  the  Court  where  pend- 
ing, the  name  of  the  judge,  referee,  commissioner,  or  other  tribu- 
nal by  whom  the  same  is  heard ;  the  term  of  vourt,  building,  town, 
county,  and  state  where  the  trial  is  had;  the  name  of  counsel  ap- 
pearing on  either  side;  the  name  and  address  of  the  stenographer 
employed.  This  should  oocupy  the  nrst  page  and  be  drawn  up  in 
the  following  manner : 


454.  CAPTION. 


JAMES  MORGAN,  etal.     ~)  APPEARANCES: 

vs  NINDE  &  ELLISON, 

_  a  Q  Attorneys  for  Plaintiffs. 

O  *     I  0*7  . 


OSCAR  A.  SIMONS 

and 
JOHN  H.  BASS. 


R.  S.  TAYLOR  and 
COOMBS,  MORRIS  &  BELL, 

Attorneys  for  Defendants. 


EJECTMENT. 

Pending  in  the  U.  S.  Circuit  Court  for  the  Northern  District  of 
Indiana,  June  Term,  A.  D.  1881.  At  the  Federal  Court  room,  Fort 
Wayne,  before  his  Honor  Judge  Walter  Q.  Gresham,  and  a  jury. 

ELDON  MORAN,  Official  Stenographer, 
Indianapolis,  Ind. 

455.  The  report  proper  begins  on  the  second  page,  the  heading 
of  which  should  show  for  what  party  litigant  the  testimony  is 
taken,  the  hour,  the  day  of  the  week  and  mouth,  and  the  year,  when 
the  trial  was  begun.     Names  of  witnesses  should  be  written  in  long- 
hand.   The  record  should  also  show  what  attorney  conducted  the 
examination. 

456.  The  main  body  of  a  law-report  consists  in  the  record  of 
question  and  answer,  or  what  is  said  by  the  lawyer  in  eliciting  tes- 
timony, and  by  the  witness  in  reply  thereto.    That  which  is  spoken 
by  the  lawyer  is  for  convenience  denominated  question,  and  the  re- 


150  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

ply  of  the  witness,  answer,  although  the  reverse  is  sometimes  in 
'fact  true,  as  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  colloquy  between 
lawyer  and  witness- 

Ques.  (lawyer)  Where  were  you  living  at  the  time? 

Ans.  (witness)  When  do  you  mean? 

Ques.  (lawyer)    I  mean  at  the  time  the  accident  happened. 

457.  Paper  about  five  iuches  broad  is  the  most  convenient  for 
law-reports.  The  question  begins  at  the  left  margin  and  extends 
across  the  page.  The  answer  should  begin,  and  be  entirely  written, 
in  such  a  manner  as  that  no  part  of  it  shall  be  nearer  than  one  and 
one-half  inches  of  the  left  margin.  Answers,  when  brief,  may  be 
written  on  the  same  line  with  the  question,  providing  a  space  of  at 
least  one  inch  is  allowed  to  intervene. 

The  proper  heading,  and  disposition  of  question  and  answer, 
is  illustrated  by  the  exercise  for  translation  at  the  close  of  the 
lesson. 


EXERCISE  41. 


458.  TESTIMONY   OF   JACOB   FRY,  —  Continued,. 

Q.  You-may  state-what-was  the-condition  of-the  bank  at-the- 
time  Robinson  built  the-dock  if-you-recollect.  First  state  as-to- 
the  surface  of -the  ground. 

A.  It-was  like  all-other  canal-banks.  A-sluice  ran  through 
there — was  banked  up-aiid  stopped  up  with  logs,  for-the  culvert 
to-go-through. 

Q.  Where-the  Robinson-House  now-stands,  what-was-the 
natural  lay  of-the  ground? 

A.  Well  up  in-some-places;  but  all-the-waste  water  ran  in  next 
the-canal  there,  and-the  creek  rail-down  there-also. 

Q.  Where-the  Robinson-House  now-stands,  you-say-the- 
ground  was  up?  What-do-you-mean,  that-there-was-a  knoll,  or 
hill? 

A.    Yes-sir,  a-knoll  used-to-be-there. 


LAW   REPORTING.  151 

Q.  How-is-the  low  place  now,  as  compared  with-its-condition 
then? 

A.    There-is-a  sort  of  hole  or  pond. 

Q-     Where-was-the  pond? 

A.    Where-it-is-now,  before-the-dock  went-in. 

Q.  How-far  south  of-where-the  dock  now-is,  did-the  basin 
theii^corae — what-they  call-the-basin? 

A.    About-as-far-as  it-is-now. 

Q.     What-business  did  Robinson  carry  on-there? 

A.     He  owned-a  shoe-shop,  aud-afterwards  started  a-tan-yard. 

Q.     \Vhere-were-tlie  vats? 

A.     Ail-along  under-his  whole  building. 

Q.     Where-was-the  north-end  of-the-building? 

A.  Where-it-now-stands,  after-he-had-it  all-built  up;  he-had 
tan-vats  clear  up  to-the-canal. 

Q.  Do-you-recollect  any-building  being  west  of-the  Robinson- 
House — auy-other-business  there? 

A.    A-saleratus  factory. 

Q.    Who-was-that  owned  by? 

A.     By  Tyler. 

Q.  Do-you-remember  the-year  in-which  Mr.  Robinson  built- 
the  docking? 

A.    No-sir.  (3m). 


ALWAYS  BE  ON  TIME.—"  There  is  no  other  one  thing  that  will  do  more 
towards  commending  a  person  to  the  favor  of  people  in  general  t&an 
promptness  in  attending  to  his  duties.  This  is  the  case  in  every  kind 
of  business,  but  it  is  especially  true  of  the  reporter.  In  most  occupa- 
tions in  which  a  person  is  doing  business  for  himself  he  may  frequently 
neglect  it  by  tardiness  and  no  one  be  the  loser  but  himself.  With  the 
Stenographer,  however,  there  is  more  of  other  people's  interest  depend- 
ent upon  him  than  in  almost  any  other  position  filled  by  subordinates.  If 
he  is  employed  in  the  courts,  or  is  to  make  a  report  of  some  speech  or 
convention,  he  may,  by  not  being  on  time,  cause  these  to  be  adjourned 
for  the  day,  involving  the  loss,  it  may  be,  of  hundreds  of  dollars  worth  of 
time  and,  what  is  far  worse,  lose  his  reputation  as  a  prompt  and  reliable 
reporter,  which,  when  once  lost,  will  be  hard  to  win  back  again.'1 


152  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

459.  TRANSLATE. 

EVIDENCE  ON  PART  OF  PLAINTIFF. 

TUESDAY,  JUNE  15,  2  P.  M. 

Jacob  Fry, — sworn.    Examined  by  Mr.  Ellison. 


OBJECTIONS,   RULINGS,  AND    EXCEPTIONS.  153 

LESSON     XLII. 

OBJECTIONS,  RULINGS,  AND  EXCEPTIONS. 

460.  The  main  purpose  in  reporting  a  law-suit,  is  that  the  party 
aggrieved  may  be  secured  iu  his  right  of  appeal  to  a  higher  Court. 
There  are  many  other  uses,  however,  which  these  records  are  made 
to  serve.    A  verbatim  report  is  useful  iu  various  ways  on  re -trials, 
as,  for  instance,  when  impeachments  are  sought;  also,  to  refresh 
the  memory  of  counsel  and  witnesses,  and  settle  disputes  in  regard 
to  the  testimony  formerly  elicited. 

461.  For  the  same  reasons  they  are  often  serviceable  in  collateral 
proceedings;  also,  to  perpetuate  the  testimony  of  witnesses  who 
subsequently  decease  or  become  insane.     Even  during  the  trial, 
the  presence  of  "Mr.  Reporter"  has  grown  indispensable,  as  shown 
by  the  fact  that  his  notes  are  hourly  referred  to. 

462.  The  stenographer's  notes  are  presumed  to  be  correct,  and 
cannot  be  changed  or  modified  except  with  the  consent  of  the  judge, 
and  agreement  of  interested  parties.     The  record  should  contain, 
not  only  everything  that  is  said  pertaining  to  the  trial,  but  by  whom 
it  is  spoken.     When  questions  are  asked,  or  remarks  made,  by  the 
Court,  jurors,  or  attorneys  not  conducting  the  examination,  or  by 
the  parties  themselves,  the  name  of  the  speaker  should    appear, 
parenthetically,  in  the  margin. 

463.  Next  in  importance  to  the  evidence  itself  is  the  recording 
of  objections,  which  are  made  from  time  to  time  to  the  introduction 
of  the  same,  or  to  any  proceeding  which  either  party  may  regard  as 
illegal.    The  grounds  upon  which  such  objections  are  based  should 
be  noted  by  the  reporter;  and  should  they  not  be  stated  specifically, 
the   counsel's  argument  in   presenting  the   matter  to   the   Court 
should  be  taken  down.     When  an  objection  is  decided,  the  ex- 
ception,  if  any,   taken  by  the   party  overruled,    should  also    be 
recorded.     Exceptions  are  also  taken  to  the  decisions  of  the  Court 
in  sustaining  or  overruling  various  motions  submitted  in  the  course 
of  the  trial. 


154  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

464.  In    reporting   depositions,   objections  are  recorded,   and 
testimony  taken  subject  thereto,  uo  rulings  being  made,  or  excep- 
tions taken,  at  the  time.    A  law-report  should  be  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible a  photograph  of  all  the  proceedings  had.     Hence,  it  becomes 
the  reporter's  dut}r  to  make  a  minute  of  every  transaction  which 
has  a  bearing  on  the  case.    Examples  of  such  notes  which  are 
inserted  parenthetically  are,  "Witness  refuses  to  answer  the  ques- 
tion," "12  o'clock  M.  Court  adjourns,"  "The  railing  referred  to  by 
the  witness  is  about  twenty  feet  distant,"  "Gentleman  referred  to 
by  witness  is  Mr.  Jones,  attorney." 

465.  In  some  civil  and  most  criminal  cases,  a  report  is  made  of 
the  impaneling  of  the  jury.     This  should  embrace  the  examination 
of  each  juror  as  to  his  qualification  to  act,  challenges  peremptory 
and  for  cause,  by  both  prosecution  and  defense,   rulings  of  the 
Court,  and  exceptions  of  counsel. 

466.  The  reporter  is  at  liberty  at  all  times  to  check  witnesses 
who  speak  too  rapidly  or  indistinctly,  or  while  the  question  is  being 
put,  or  objection  made. 


KXERCISE  42. 
467. 

1  APPEARANCES: 

WILSON  H.  SWALES,  Guardian,  HOLMAN  &  McMuLLEN, 

1  No.  14(50.  Attv's  Jor   Plff 

THE  \\  HITE-WATER  RAILROAD  \ 

( -MM 1. 4  w  BELL  &  BAIXBRIDGE, 

^  Atty's  for  Deft. 


DAMAGES. 

Tried  at  Lawrenceburg,  Indiana,  at  the  May  Term  A.  D.  1881  of 
the  Dearborn  County  Circuit  Court,  before  his  Honor  Judge  Hayes, 
and  a  jury. 

EI.DON  MOHAN,  Ollicial  Stenographer, 

Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Charles  Ashby,— sworn  on  the  part  of  Plaintiff. 
F.xuiiiiiK'd  by  Mr.  Mc'Mullen. 
(.    Where-do-you-reside? 


OBJECTIONS,    KULIXiiS,    AND   EXCEPTIONS.  155 

A.     In  Harrison  Township,  Dearborn  Co.,  Ind. 

Q.     Do-you-kiiow  where  Longnecker  station  is? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.     Tell-the-Jury  where-you-live  in-reference-to-the  station. 

A.  I-live  on-the  pike  about-one-quarter  of-a-mile  from-the- 
station.  Right  about  here,  (referring-to-the  map,  exhibit  "B"). 

Q.  How-far  is-it  from-where-you-live  straight  across  to-the 
railroad? 

A.    About  forty  rods. 

Q.    Do-you-remember  when-this  accident  happened? 

A.  I-believe  it-was-the  9th  of  December,  1879,  between  five  and 
six  o'clock,  to-the-best  of-my-knowledge. 

Q.     You-may  state-whether  it-was  light  or-dark. 

A.  It-was  on-the  darkish  order.  It-was-a  sort  of  cloudy 
evening. 

Q.  How-far  is-that  from-where-the  railroad  crosses  into 
Franklin  County? 

A.     About  two-miles. 

Q.  Wkere-were-you  on-the  evening  that-this-accident  hap- 
pened? 

A.    At  my  house,  standing  out  on-the  porch. 

Q.  What-did-you  first  hear, — not  what-was-said  to-you — -r 
first  state -whether-or-not  you-heard  any  collision  or  noise? 

A.    I-heard-the  collision,  that-is  what  drew  my-attention. 

Q.  State  to-the  Jury  whether-or-not  at-this-time  you  saw-the 
passengc  r  -train . 

A.    I-did. 

Q.    Where-was-the  passenger-train  when-you  saw-it? 

A.    It- was  coming  along-down  here  by-th'e  dam. 

Q.    Where-did-the  work  or  i\  ild  train  whistle  if-at-all? 

A.    Right-here  at-the  grave  yard — just-gave  one  blast. 

Q.  You-may  state-whether-that  work-train  gave-auother  signal 
from-that-time  till -you-heard  the-collision  down  by-the  crossing. 

A.     Yes-sir,  that-is-:Ul  I-'.ieiii-;l  till-the-collision. 

Q.  Now  how  near  was-this  train  to-the  passenger-train  when- 
the-passenger  moved  away-from  the-station? 

A.  Well,  I-cannot  answer  that  because -I-cannot  see-the  station 
from-my  house. 


156  KEPORTIXG   STYLK   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

Q.    Was-there  any-time  when-you-could  see  both  trains  at-once? 

A.  Yes-sir,  when-the -passenger- train  was  here  in  front  of-the 
graveyard,  (referring-to-the  map),  the-wild  train  was  coming 
around-the  dam. 

Q.  Tell -the -Jury  about-how-far  apart  these  trains  were  at-that- 
time. 

A.     Considerably  over-a-mile. 

Q.    That-is,    when-the-passenger-train  was-at-the    graveyard? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.  How-far  down  toward-the-station  could-you  see-the  pas- 
senger-train from-your-house? 

A.    To-right  above-the  target  at-the  upper  end  of-the  switch. 

Q.  How-far  ubove-the-railroad  is-this  ground  where-your- 
house  is  located? 

A.     Forty-five  feet  I  should-judge. 

Q.  How-long-was-it  from-the-time-you-heard-the  whistle  till- 
you-heard-the-collision? 

A.     I-didn't  pay   aiiy-attention,    but  it-was-a-very-short-time. 

Q.     Have-you  any-thing  by-which-you-can  measure  the-tirne? 

A.  No-sir,  I-didn't  pny-inuch  attention  at-that-time.  It-was 
so  short-a-time  that-I-mnde  remarks  to-my  wife — 

Q.  If-you-have-any-thing  by-which-you-can  fix  it  in-your- 
mind  without  teliiug  what-was-said-and-done,  you-may-give  us 
your-best  knowledge  oi-it. 

A.  It-was-a-minute  or  somewheres  about-there;  perhaps  it- 
Tnight-have-been  that-long  or-longer  to-the-bestof-my-knowiedge. 

Q.     IMd-you-go-down  to-ihe  station  after-that? 

A.  Yes-sir,  Iliey  came  after  me  just-a-few-miuutes  after-it 
happened,  a-very-short-i  line. 

Q.     You  wciit-dowu  theii? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.     Who-went-with-you,  if-anybody? 

A.  Nobody  went  with-me,  ouly-the-gentleman  who-came  for- 
me. 

Q.     Were-you  there  when-tlie-traiu  backed  up  again? 

A.     No -sir. 

Q.     Had-it  gone  on  wheu-you  arri\red? 

A.     It-was  just-going  when-I-got-there. 


OBJECTIONS,   RULINGS,    AND  EXCEPTIONS.  157 

Q,     Where-was  Miss  Hurley? 

A.     Hight  at-the  end  of-the  crib. 

Q.     What-was  done  witn-her'r 

A.     She-was  picked  up  and-carrled  to-my-house. 

Q.    How-long  did  she  remain  at-your-house? 

A.     I-think  two-or-three  days. 

Q.  Did-you  ever  measure  the-distance  between-that  crib  and- 
the  railroad? 

A.  I-measured  between-the  end  oi'-the  shingle-pile  and-the 
rails;  I-think  the-distance  was-about  one-hundred  feet. 

Q.     You  did-not  measure  tne-crib  by-itself '( 

A.  No-sir,  but  I  snoulu-judge  the-crib  to-be  about  sixty  feet 
long. 

Q.    It-is  simply  a-pile  01  shingles  with-a  sned  over  it? 

A.     Yes-sir,  that-is-it. 

Q.     Can-you  see-the  crossing  from-your-house? 

A.     No-sir,  I-caunot. 

Q.  Nosv-suppose  a-party  is  seated  in-a  two  norse  spring-wagon, 
the  hind  wheels  being-past  this-end  of-the  shingle-shed,  how-far 
above-the  crossing  can-the-railroad  target  be-seen? 

Mr.  Bell  objects-to-the-question,  as  calling  for-a-conclusion  of- 
the  witness  rather-than  for-the  facts.  Question  withdrawn. 

Q.  I-wish-you-would  state  just  the-coudition  of-the  lady,  when- 
you  saw  hei  there  at-the-time-when  she-was-taken-up  to-your- 
house. 

A.  She-was  perfectly  unconscious,  did-not-kiiow-anything-for- 
a  couple  of-days. 

Q.     What  bruises,  if-any,  did-you  see  upon  heri' 

A.  She-had-a  wound  on  her  arm,  but  I-do-not-i-emember  now 
which-one;  she -had  also-been  struck  ou-the  head. 

Q.     Where- was-tne  wound  dressed?     A.     At-my-house. 

Q.     Wlio-was-the  physician?    A.     Dr.  West,  of  Harrison. 

Q.  Was  she-taken-away  from-your-house  before  she  again - 
became  conscious? 

Mr.  Bell,  on-part  of-defendant,  objects-to-the-question  on-the- 
ground  that-it-is  leading.  Objection  sustained.  Plaintiff-excepts. 

Q.  Did  she  go  away  from-your-house,  before  or-after- she -became 
conscious? 


158  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

Mr.  Bell  on-part  of-clefendant  objects-to-the-question  on-tbe- 
ground  that-it-is  leading,  incompetent,  and-immaterial.  Question 
withdrawn. 

Q.    Did-you  ever  work  on-a  railroad?     A.    No-sir. 

Q.     Have-you  any-judgment  as-to-the  speed  of-trains? 

A.    No -sir. 

Q.  You-may  state  in-your-judgment,  whether-the  wild-train 
was-running  faster  or  slower  than-the  passenger-train. 

Mr.  Bell  objects-to-the-question  on-the-ground  that-it-is-in- 
competeut.  Objection  sustained.  Plaintiff-excepts.  (llm). 

468. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION  OF  CHAS.  ASHBY. — BY  MR.  BELL. 


EXHIBITS   AND   INDICES.  159 

LESSON  XLIII. 


EXHIBITS  AND  INDICES. 

469.  Written  documents,  as  deeds,  notes,  contracts,  mortgages, 
letters,  depositions,  etc.,  are  frequently  produced  in  Court,  and 
made  a  part  of  the  evidence;  and  for  the  purpose  of  identification, 
and  convenience  in  making  references,  the  same  are  at  the  time 
marked  by  the  reporter  as  exhibit  "A",   "B"  etc.,  according  to  the 
order  in  which  they  are  introduced.    After  the  jalphabet  has  been 
exhausted,  the  double  letters  "AA",  "BB"  etc.,  may  be  employed. 
The  paper,  besides  the  letter  "A",  should  be  marked  with  the 
initials  of  the  parties  to  the  suit;  thus,  for  example,  in  the  case  of 
Frederick  vs.  Wilson,  the  certificate  of  a  County  Auditor  is  offered 
in  evidence,  and  marked  by  the  reporter  Exhibit  "A",  F.  vs.  W. 
This  prevents  ambiguity  in  cases  where  the  same  document  has 
already  been  marked  with  a  different  letter,  as  an  exhibit  in  another 
case. 

470.  As  part  of  the  evidence,  also,  knives,  rings,  keys,  photo- 
graphs, or  any  article  whatever  which  it  may  be  important  for  the 
Court  and  Jury  to  examine,  are  from  time  to  time  introduced. 
These  may  oe  marked  by  attaching  a  written  card  firmly  to  them. 
The  reporter  should  be  careful  to  identify  as  an  exhibit,  every 
article  or  document  offered  by  either  party,  whether  or  not  the  same 
is  actually  admitted  in  evidence  by  the  Court,  since  rejected  exhibits 
are  necessary  to  complete  the  appellant's  bill  of  exceptions. 

471.  Half  the   value  of  a  law  report  is  lost  by  not  having  it 
properly  indexed.    In  the  first  place,  the  paper  used  should  be 
accurately  paged,  and  each  separate  book  or  manuscript  numbered 
in  the  order  used.    Trials  vary  in  length  from  an  hour  to  several 
months.     Reference  is  frequently  made,  and  the  reporter  ordered  to 
read  sections  of  testimony  taken  days  and  even  weeks  previous. 
This  can  be  done  only  by  means  of  a  running  index,  which  is  kept 
making  from  hour  to  hour,  just  as  the  proceedings  take  place. 
This  should  give  the  day  and  date  of  each  session  of  Court,  the 
name  of  each  witness,  ;uid  the  page  where  his  testimony  and  cross- 
examination  begins. 


160 


REPORTING    STYLK  OF    SHORT-HAND. 


472.  Agreements,  admissions,  stipulations,  and  the  introduction 
of  exhibits,  shomd  also  be  indexed.  Long-hand  transcripts  are 
paged  and  indexed  in  a  similar  manner. 


INDEX. 


473. 


SWALES 


THE  WHITE-  WATER   RAILROAD. 


EVIDENCE   ON   PART   OF   PLFF. 


FIRST  DAY,  MAY  19,  1881. 

THURSDAY   FORENOON   SESSION. 

Impaneling  of  the  Jury,   Vol.  1,  Page  1. 
M.  B.  Fox,     .....      "1,       "5. 


AFTERNOON    SESSION. 


Fox,  continued,      .     .     .  1-11 

Cross-examination,     .     .  1-13 

Re-direct  examination,  1-20 

Frank  Jackman,     .     .     .  1-22 

Cross-ex.,      .....  1-28 


Chas.  Ashby,      ....  1-37 

Cross-ex.,      .....  1-42 

C.  Ashby,  recalled,      .     .  1-48 

Beuj.  Holdeu,     ....  1-48 


SECOND  DAY,  MAY  20. 


FRIDAY   FOUEXOON    SESSION. 

B.  F.  Hurley,      ....     1-5D  Guardianship,  admitted   2-3 

Cross-ex.,      .....     1-03  Exhibit  "B",  Map  of  Long- 

VV.  H.  Swales,     .     .     Vol.  2-3  uecker,  admitted      .     .     2-4 
Exhibit    "A",    Letters     of 


FRIDAY   AFTERNOON    SESSION. 


Cross-ex.,       .....     2-4       Dr.  L.  J.  Collins, 
Carrie  Hurley,    .     .     .     .     2-15     Dr.  J.  P.  Green, 
Cross-ex.,      .....     2-21     Dr.  J.  D.  Gateh, 


2-28 
2-44 
2-47 


EXHIBITS   AND   INDICES.  161 

THIRD  DAY,  MAY  21. 

SATURDAY   FORENOON    SESSION. 
EVIDENCE   OX   PART   OK    DEFENDANT. 

Mrs.  M.  Jackman,      .     .     2-52    E.  F.  Laraon,     .          .     .    2-54 

SATURDAY  AFTERNOON   SESSION. 

H.  Barneclo,      .     .     .     .     3-15    E.  H.  Bowlby,        .     .     .     3-26 
FOURTH  DAY,  MAY  23. 

MONDAY  AFTERNOON   SESSION. 

Dr.  W.  H.  Myers,      .     .     4-52        Ashby,   admitted     .     .    4-74 
W.  W.  Worthin'Tton,        .     4-tJ8     Exhibit  "D",  Statement  of 
Exhibit  "C",  Statement  of  Jackmau,  admitted       .     4-74 

REBUTTING   EVIDENCE    ON  PART   OF    PLAINTIFF. 

Mrs.  Jackman,  recalled,      4-75. 

EXERCISE   43. 
4:74.         SWALES 


IMPANELING    OF-THE   JURY. 

THK  WHITE-WATER  R.  R.  Co.  ' 

Mr.  McMnllen,  on-part  of-Plaintiff : 

GENTLEMEN  -  OF  -  THE  -  JURY  :  —  This-is-a-case  in-which  Dr. 
Swales,  who-is-the  guardian  of  Miss  Hurley,  is-the-plaintiff,  and- 
the  White-Water  R.  R.  Co.  is-the  defendant,  being-a-suit  brought 
for-damages,  aiid-for-an  alleged  injury  sustained  by  Miss  Hurley, 
the-plaintiff's  ward.  Have-you,  Gentlenien-of -the- Jury,  heard 
anything  of-this-c;i>e?  If-any-of-you  have  heard  anythiug-about- 
it,  please-make-the  fact  known. 

(Jury  make-no  response). 

Q.     Did  anybody  with-uhom-you-have  talked  pretend  to-give- 
you  the -fact.-? 

(^Juror)  Well  I-heard  this-about-it — 

Q.     Did-the-person     with-\vhom-you     talked     say-tiiat-he-was 
telling  you  the-facts  in-the-case? 
11 


162  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

A.    No-sir,  I-think-not. 

Q.  Then-have-you  formed  or-expressed  any-opinion  as-to- 
whether  the-plaintiff  should  recover  in-this-case? 

A.  To-the-best  of-my-knowledge  I-don't  believe  I-have.  I- 
was  going-to  sajr-that  I-had-not-heard  of-the  suit  until  I-came  to- 
the  city.  To-the-best  of-my-recollectkm  I-have-not  expressed 
any-opinion. 

Q.     Mr.  Keed,  have-you-heard  of-the-case  before? 

A.     Yes-sir,  often. 

Q.     Heard  of-the  facts? 

A.  Yes-sir,  and-expressed  my-opinion  of-the-case  when-it 
occurred ;  I-live  close  there  aud-know-all  about-it. 

Q.    And-you-have-formed  and-expressed  an-opinion  about-it? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.  Do-you-think  your-opinion  would-have-any  influence  upon- 
yon  in-making-up-your  rerdict? 

A.     Yes-sir,  I-think-so. 

Q.  Do-you-think-you-could-render  a-verdict  in-this-matter 
upon  sworn  testimony  of-wituesses  here-upon  trial  independently 
of-your-own-opinion? 

A.     No-sir,  I-think-not.     I-have  already  expressed  my-opinion. 

Upon  motion  Mr.  Keed  is  excused  from-the-Jury  by-the  Court. 

(Mr   McMuIlen)     Your-IIonor,  we-pass  the-Jury. 

Upon-the  peremptory  challenge  of-the  defendant,  the  Court 
excuses  Mr.  Stone  from-the-Jury. 

By  Judge  Bainbridge,  on-part  of-the  Defendant: 

Q.     Mr.  Hart,  have-you-heard  of-this-case? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.     Heard  what  purported  to-be-the-facts  in-the-case? 

A.  Yes-sir,  I-both  h:  ard  and-read  about-it  at-the-time  the. 
accident  happened. 

Q.     Ilave-you-formed  any-opinion  as-to-the  merits  of-the-case? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.     Already  have-your-mind  made  up? 

A.     Yes-sir,   to-a-certain-extent. 

Q.  Is-your-opinion  such-a-oue  as  would  readily  give  way  to- 
sworn  testimony? 

A.     Well  I-thiuk-it-would. 


EXHIBITS    AM)    IX1HCKS.  163 

Q.  Can-you-say  positively  that- the  opinion  tliat-you-have 
already  formed  would -not  in-a-measure  influence  your  tiual  verdict? 

A.     I-don't-think-that-  it-would. 

Defendant's  challenge  of  Mr.  Hart  for  cause  is  over-ruled  by- 
the  Court,  to-which  ruling  defendant-excepts.  (4  in). 

475.  INSTRUCTIONS  TO  THE  JURY. 

JOHN  B .       ) 

VS.  V     IX    THE    DISTRICT  COURT,    BUTLER  CO.,  NEB. 

CONRAD  M .  J 

GKNTLEMEN-OF-THE-JURY:  1st.  This-is-an-action  brought  by  - 
the-plaintiff  against  thc-defendant  for-damages  which- the  -plaintiff 
alleges  he-has  sustained  by-reason-of-the  defendant  having  falsely 
and-maliciously  (it-is-charged)  in-the-presence  and-hearing  of 
divers  good-people,  who  understood  the-German-language,  spoken 
and-published  of-and  concerning  the-said-plaiutiff  certain  words 
in-the-German-language,  which-would  in-the  English-language 
mean,  "He  (meaning- the-plaintiff)  stole  my  lath  out-of-the  chick- 
en house."  The-defendant  denies  he-spoke  such-words  of-and 
concerning  plaintiff,  but  justifies  the-speaking  of-the-words,  and- 
claims  that-plainttff  did  steal  his  lath,  and-that  plaintiff  did-uot 
sustain  a-good-character  among-his  neighbors  for-moral-worth, 
integrity,  and-honesty.  The-plaintiff  denies  in-his  reply  these  new 
matters  in-defendant's  answer.  2nd.  The-Court  instructs  the- 
Jury  that  slander  is  regarded  in  law  a-malicious  wrong  ami-injury, 
and-an-action  for-it  has-as  legitimate  a-standing  iu-a-Court  as- 
any-other-action.  3rd.  All-questions  of-fact  you-will-determine 
for-yourselve*  from-all-the  evidence  and-circumstances  of-the- 
case.  4th.  If-you-believe  from-the-evidence  that-the -defendant, 
in-speaking  of -the-plaintiff,  in -the -presence  and-hearing  of-others 
who  understood  the-German-language,  used-the-words  charged 
in-the  petition  in  the  German  language,  meaning-in-the  English- 
language,  "He  (meaning-the-plaintiff)  stole  my  lath  out-of-the 
chicken  house,"  then  it-will-be-your  duty  to-find  for-the,  etc. 

Given  at  David  City,  Neb.,  Dec.  4,  1883,  by  Judge  Norval. 
MYRON  E.  WHEELER,  Official  Stenographer.  (3  m). 


164 


REROUTING   STYLE   OK   SHORT-HAND. 


476.         SWALES 

vs. 
THE  WHITE- WATER 


] 

> 

R.  R.  Co.) 


TESTIMONY   ON   PART   OF  PLFF. 


Wilson  H.  Swales,  —  sworn. 


i  \  v 


i 


TRANSCRIPTS.  165 


LESSON  XLIV. 


TRANSCRIPTS. 

477.  All  short-hand  reports  should  be  securely  filed  away,  either 
by  the  Clerk  of  the  Court,   or  by  the  stenographer  himself.    A 
transcript  in  long-hand  may  be  ordered  at  once,  or  not  till  after 
years;  possibly  never.    Before  making  such  transcript,  the  reporter 
would  do  well  to  ascertain  whether  more  than  one  copy  is  wanted, 
since,  should  he  make  use  of  a  type-writer,  which  is  much  the  best 
plan,   two   or  more   copies    can    be    made    simultaneously.     The 
testimony  of  certain  witnesses  onh,  or  a  brief   of  all  the  evidence 
in  narrative  form  not  containing  objections,   etc.,   is  sometimes 
ordered;   while  again,   only  an  abstract  is    wanted,    giving    the 
testimony  to  which  objections  were  made,  together  with  the  rulings 
and  exceptions.     In  addition  to  the  usual  fee  allowed  for  making 
transcripts,  the  reporter  receives  extra  compensation  for  the  work 
of  making  such  briefs  and  abstracts.     In  all  cases,  the  stenographer 
has  a  right  to  hold  the  transcript  until  his  fees  are  paid. 

478.  Original  notes  are  always  taken  hurriedly,  and  need  more 
or  less  revision  and  condensation  when  transcribed  into  long-hand. 
In  this  matter  the  reporter  is  allowed  some  discretion.    Answers  of 
witnesses  with  few  exceptions  should  be  written  as  spoken,  but  the 
language  of  interrogatories  should  be  corrected  if  imgrammatical, 
and  may  be  abbreviated    often  with    advantage.     Lawyers    not 
uncommonly  indulge  in  repetitions  which  have  only  the  effect  of 
lumbering  the  record,  and  should  in  many  cases  be  entirely  excluded 
from  the  transcript. 

479.  Notes  should  be  transcribed  in  the  order  taken,  and  one 
side  only  of  the  paper  be  written  upon.     Ample  margin  for  the 
notes  of  counsel  should  be  allowed  to  remain  at  the  left  of  each 
page;  also  at  the  top,  so  that  the  sheets  may  be  bound  together. 

480.  Every  interrogatory  should  be  numbered,  beginning  anew 
with  the  testimony  of  each  witness.    The  transcript,  when  com- 


166 


REPORTING   STYLE   CM''    SHORT-HAND. 


plete,   is  paged  and  indexed,  and  bound  firmly  into  volumes  of 
convenient  size. 


481. 

STATE  OF  INDIANA 


vs. 
LYON. 


CROSS-EXAMINATION   OF   MRS.  RACHEL  STOWB, 

Continued. 


TRANSCRIPTS.  107 

482.  TRANSCRIPT. 

STATE  OF  INDIANA]         H.  W.  HARRINGTON, 

on  part       Prosecution. 
DANIEL  W.  VOORHES, 
LYOX.  for  Defendant. 

CROSS-EXAMINATION    OF    MRS.    RACHEL   STOWE,     Continued. 

Ques.  31.  How  far  were  you  standing  from  the  corner  tree 
when  you  heard  the  report  of  the  pistol? 

Y;i>.  About  as  far  from  it  as  I  am  from  the  stove  there  (referring 
to  the  stove  about  sixteen  feet  distant). 

Ques.  32.  You  say  you  heard  two  shots;  now  was  it  a  long  or 
short  space  of  time  that  elapsed  between  them? 

Aus.    It  seemed  to  me  rather  long. 

Ques.     33.     Well,  how  long? 

Ans.    Perhaps  a  minute. 

Ques.     34.    Are  you  certain  a*  much  as  that? 

Aus.    Yes  sir,  that  long  anyway. 

Ques.  35.  Will  you  please  indicate  the  time  that  elapsed  as 
nearly  as  you  cau  remember  it,  by  tapping  with  my  knife  upon  the 
desk? 

(Mrs.  Stowe  taps  twice:  time,  eighteen  seconds,  by  the  report- 
er's watch). 

Ques.  3G.  How  far  was  your  boy  standing  from  you  at  the 
time? 

Ans.  About  as  far  away  from  me  as  that  gentleman,  (referring 
to  Senator  Voorhes). 

Ques.  37.  Were  not  remarks  passed  between  you  and  the  boy 
during  the  time  between  the  shots? 

Ans.     Yes  sir,  my  boy  first  said Objection. 

Ques.  38.  Did  not  he  know  one  of  the  men  on  horse-back,  and 
did  not  he  say  "He  has  shot ''  ? 

Mr.  Griffith  objects  to  the  question  on  the  ground  that  it  is  not 
proper  cross-examination ;  also,  that  it  misrepresents  the  witness. 

Objection  overruled.     Defendant  excepts. 


168  REPORTING   STYLE   OF    SHORT-HAND. 

EXERCISE  44. 
483. 

[Heading,  Question  and  Answer,  Objections,  etc.,  to  be  arranged 
by  the  student  in  the  proper  manner]. 

Benj.  T.  Frederick  vs.  James  Wilson.  Appearances:  Timothy 
Brown,  Attorney  for  Contestant.  J.  H.  Bradley,  Attorney  for  Con- 
testee.  Contested  Election.  For  the  office  of  Representative  In 
Congress  for  the  Fifth  District  of  Iowa.  Cause  pending  in  the 
House  of  Representatives  of  the  United  States  of  America.  Testi- 
mony taken  before  Eldon  Moran,  Stenographer  and  Commissioner, 
during  the  months  of  February,  March,  April,  and  May,  1883. 
Evidence  on  part  of  Contestant.  Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa, 
March  5,  1883.  A.  N.  French,  sworn  on-part  of  contestant.  You- 
may-state  if-you-are-the  Auditor  of  Marshall-County,  Iowa,  and- 
have-now  iu-your  possession  the-poll-books  which-were  returned 
to-you  from  Washington  Township?  Yes-sir,  I-am  Auditor,  and- 
have-them.  Please-take-the  poll-book,  und-read  so-that-the  Com- 
missioner can-take-it-down,  giving  the-mnnber  of -votes  that-were 
cast  in-that  Township  for-each-Candidate  for-Congrcss  at-the 
November-election  1882.  I-uuderstaiid  you-want-the  certificates 
just-as  they-were  returned?  Yes-sir.  For  Rcpresentative-in- 
Congress  there-were  110  votes  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had 
45;  Benj.  T.  Frederick  52;  and  David  Plainer  13.  Is-that-the- 
number  of -votes  for-each-Candidate  returned  in-the  abstract  made 
by -the  County  canvassers  to-the  Board  of-State-canvasser>?  Yes- 
sir,  thc-same-nuinber.  Please-tuni  to-the  poll-book  of  Marietta 
Town  -!iii)  anil-state  how-many-votes  WITH  returned  fro  in -that 
township  for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress  by-the 
Trustees  of-that  township,  as-shown  by-the  poll-books,  and-read 
it  off  so-tliat-it-may-be  taken-down  by-t.he  Commissioner.  (Read- 
ing from  poll-book)  For-Representativc-in-Congress,  Fifth  Dis- 
trict, there  were  123  ballot*,  of-whieh  James  Wilson  had  81 ;  Bcnj. 
T.  Fmler'.rk  87;  and  David  Plainer  5.  Plcase-turn  to-the  poll- 
book  of  he-Urande  Township,  and  state  how-many-votes  were 
cast  for-each  C'andidate  at-the-lastXovember-election,for-the  office 
of-Representative-in-Congrcss,  Fifth  District.  (Reading  from  poll- 
book)  For-the  office  of-Representative-iu-Congress,  Fifth  Dis- 


TRANSCRIPTS.  160 

trict,  there-were  263  ballots  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  180; 
Beiij.  T.  Frederick  78;  ami-David  Plainer  5.  Now  state  if-your 
returns  made  for  Washington,  Bangor,  and- Marietta  Townships, 
were-the-same  as-shown  by-the-poll-books.  I-\\ ill-have-to-look 
and-sce.  First,  I-will-ask-you,  if-you-have-a  copy  of-the  returns 
made  by-the  County  canvasser  to-the  State-canvasser?  Yes-sir,  I- 
have.  Now  state  as-to  Washington  Township,  how-many-votes 
for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Con,irre.ss  were  returned  to-the 
State-canvassers  for-this  Township.  For  James  Wilson  45;  B.  T. 
Frederick  52;  David  Platner  13.  Now  state  with-reference-to 
Marietta  Township.  James  Wilson  81 ;  R  T.  Frederick  37  ?  David 
Plainer  5.  These  numbers  correspond  v>ith-the  poll-book.  State, 
also,  with-reference-to  Le-Grande  Township.  The  schedule  shows 
James  Wilson  received  180  votes;  B.T.Frederick  78;  aud-David 
Platner  5.  These  numbers  are-the-same  as-those  I-read  from-the 
poll-book.  Now  state  with-reference-to  Bangor.  For-the  office 
of-Represeutative-in-Congress,  there-were  85  ballots  cast,  of- 
which  James  Wilson  had  75;  B.  T.  Frederick  2;  and- David  Plntner 
12.  The-abstract  also  shows  Wilson  to-have -received  75 ;  Frederick 
•2:  aud-Platner  12.  Excused.  (5m). 


SUGGESTION. — "  As  soon  as  you  are  able  to  apply  all  the  principles  cor- 
rectly, you  can  not  do  better  than  to  make  all  your  memoranda  in  short- 
hand. This  will  be  of  help  to  you  in  several  ways.  It  will  develop  con- 
fidence in  your  work,  a  thing  which  most  beginners  are  very  apt  to  lack. 
By  making  note  of  items  upon  which  something  of  importance  depends, 
and  trusting  wholly  to  your  notes  for  them,  you  will  soon  find  yourself 
feeling  just  as  certain  of  their  meaning  as  you  would  were  they  written  in 
long-hand,  a  feeling  you  must  have  if  you  would  make  a  successful  re- 
porter. Another  advantage  to  be  derived  from  such  a  habit  is  the  con- 
stant practice  which  it  gives.  The  greatest  advantage,  however,  of  form- 
ing the  habit  of  using  short-hand  in  making  memoranda  is  in  the  fact 
that,  since  it  can  be  done  so  easily  and  rapidly,  one  is  far  more  apt  to 
note  down  many  little  things  which,  were  it  necessary  to  write  them  out 
in  long-hand  would  be  neglected  altogether.'' 


170  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HA>«'D 

LESSON  XLV. 


PROFESSIONAL  CONDUCT. 

484.  The  reporter  should  be  prompt  in  his  attendance  upon 
Court,  and  in  the  preparation  of  transcripts ;  diligent  and  accommo- 
dating as  an  officer. 

485.  It  is  not  unusual  for  him  to  be  made  the  confidant  of  the 
Judge,  and  for  this  reason  he  should  exercise  the  greater  caution, 
since  he  is  the  more  subject  to  interested  inquiry.     He  is  expected 
to  make  a  true  and  impartial  record;  and,  to  avoid  all  inference 
of  prejudice,  it  is  by  far  the  best  policy  to  say  nothing  whatever 
about  the  case  during  the  trial.     He  should  be  trustworthy,  and 
mix  suavity  with  discretion. 

486.  lu  the   heat  of  an  exciting  trial,  when  the   feelings  and 
apprehensions  of  adverse  parties  are  most  awakened,  the  slightest 
look,  movement,  or  insinuation  on  the  reporter's  part,  is  liable  to 
be  construed  into  an  indication  of  prejudice   or  partiality.    The 
utmost  care   and   circumspection  are   necessary   to   prevent  such 
reflections,  which  are  sometimes  carried  even  to  the  extent  of  a 
question  as  to  the  integrity  of  the  report. 

EXERCISE  45. 

487. 

1      TIMOTHY  BROWX, 

FREDERICK  Attu.  for  Contestant. 

w  v'  J.  II.  BRADLEY, 

]  Att>j..fnr  Contests. 

KVIDKXCE     OX     PART    OF    COXTESTEE. 

Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  April  12,  1883. 
James  K.  Johnson,  sworn.     Examined  by  Judge  Bradley. 
Q.     What  official-position  il'-any  do-you  hold? 
A.     I-ani  deputy-clerk. 

Q.     Have-you-examined-the      naturalization     records     of-this- 
countv? 


PROFESSIONAL  CONDUCT.  171 

A.  Yes-sir,  also  all-the-records  of  naturalization  that-have- 
Oeen  kept  by-the  Circuit  and-District-Courts. 

Q.  Have-you-made-a-memorantlum  of-whatthese-recorcls  show 
concerniiig-the  naturalization  of-certaiii-persons? 

A.     1-have. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to-the  testimony  of- 
this-witness  on-the-ground  that-it-is  incompetent  ami-immaterial, 
thu-origmal  record  books  only  being  admissible  as-eviclence. 

Q.  I-will-ask-your  attention  to-the  declaratory  statement  made 
by  James  Dunn.  State-whether-you  ever  examined  the-record  of- 
the  naturalization  of-such-a-person,  aucl-if-so,  wheu-did-you  find 
that-it-was-made? 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects-to-the-question  on- 
the-grouiid  that-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial.  The-original 
books  themselves  are-the-best  evidence,  and-the  witness  should- 
not-be-allowed  to-testify  ufrom  any-document  other-than  these- 
books  themselves. 

A.  I-have  examined-the-records  carefully,  and-flnd  that-there- 
are  two  James  Dunns.  One  made-his  declaratory  statement  ou-the 
28th  of  July,  1856;  the-other  made-his  declaratory  statement  on-the 
12th  of-Dec.,  18G6.  I-also  found  from-a  careful  examination  of- 
the  naturalization  records  of-the  District  and-Circuit-Court 
Journals  from-the-beginning,  that-is,  from  Journal  A  down  to-the 
time-when-the  naturalization  records  were  begun,  that-there-is-no 
•record  of  James  Dunn's  having-been  naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects-to  answer  of-witness 
on-the-gronnd  that-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial,  since-it 
purports  to-be-a  statement  of-the  oflicial  records,  the-same  not- 
being  produced. 

Q.  Then  we-understand  you  as  testifying  that-there-is-no 
record  of  any  second-papers  ever-having-been  issued  to  any-such— 
person? 

A.     No-sir. 

Q.     To  any  James  Dunn,  or  James  Dunn,  Jr.? 

A.     No-sir. 

Q.     What-do-the  records  show  with-reference-to  Patrick  Dunn? 

A.     On-the  27th  of-August,  18GG,  Patrick  Dunn  made-his  declar- 


172  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

atory  statement,  but-there-is-uo  record  of-his  ever-having-been 
naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  moves  that-the -answer  be- 
stricken  out  as  incompetent  and  immaterial,  being-the  statement 
of-what-the-records  contain,  without-the-same  being  produced. 

Q.     No-evidence  at-all? 

A.     No-sir,  uo'.ie 

Q.     Now  I-will-ask-your  attention  to  William  Broadhead. 

A.  He-filed  his  declaratory  statement  on-the  3d  of  Nov.,  1868. 
There-are-no  records  of-his  subsequent  naturalization. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same -as -above. 

Q.  Is-this-the-gentleman  known  as  Uncle  Billy  Broadhead,  who- 
lives  in-the  poor-house? 

A.     Tlie-naine  is-the-same,  and-1-suppose  u-is-the-same-man. 

Q.  Did-yon-find  .that  naturalization  papers  had-been  issued  to 
C.  L.  Petit-Demauge? — if-so,  give-the  date. 

A.     On-the  22nd  of  June,  1882,  he-filed  his  declarator}'  statement. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Then  the-first  papers  are-all -that-you  found  to-have-been 
issued  to-him? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.  Did-you-iiiul  ihat-any-papcrs  had-beeu  issxied  to  Frank 
Delaware? 

A.     No-sir.  I-did-not. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  I-will-ask-you  if-you-have  gone  through  these  naturalization 
and -Court-records  by-the  index,  or  if-not,  how  did-you-examine 
them? 

A.  I-exainined  them  both  waj's;  first  by  index,  and-then  by- 
looking  c::refully  over  each  pa^e. 

(,>.  State-whether-or-not  yon-found  any  record  of-the  naturali- 
zation of  Edward  Willigrod;  if-so,  what-is-the  date  of-;t? 

A.  I-can  state  the-book  and-the  page  from-memory.  It-is-in 
.Minute  Book  Number  One,  page  fourteen,  of-the  records  of-the 
County-Court.  Tlie-date  is  somewhere  between  1856-58. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.     Does-the-record  show-that  two  papers  were  issued? 


PKOFESSIONAL   CONDUCT.  173 

A.  No-sir,  bxit-the  record  I-mention  is-of-the  issue  of-the 
second,  or  official  naturalization  papers. 

Q.     What  Court  were-they  issued  from? 

A.     From-the  County-Court,  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  you-say-you  have  examined  these-records 
from-the  beginning,  page  by  page;  will-you-please  state  more 
specifically  as-to-what-records  you-refer? 

A.  I-have  examined  Journals  1,  2  and  3,  of-the  Circuit-Court  of 
Marshall-County,  and-Journals  A,  B  and  C,  of-the  District-Court. 
The-remaining  records  form  a-book  called  First  Paper  or  Declara- 
tory book.  I-examined  them  all  page  by  page. 

Q.    Are-thei\3  more-Journals  than  this  in-the  Circuit-Court? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.     How-far  does-the  third  Circuit-Court  Journal  extend? 

A.  Down-to  1873,  when-the-flrst  naturalization  record  was- 
begun. 

Q.  And-the  District-Court  Journal  you-have  referred-to  covered 
the-same  period? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  will-you-please  bring  over-the-book  contain- 
ing the-record  of-the  papers  issued  to  Mr.  Willigrod? 

Witness  produces  Naturalization  Record-Book  Number  2. 

Q.  Did-you-find  this-book  in-the  office  and -custody  of-the  clerk 
of-the  District  and-Circuit-Courts  of-this-County? 

A.  Yes-sir,  it-is-one  of-the  official  records,  kept  in-the  office 
of-the  clerk  whose  deputy  I-am. 

Q.  Please  state-the  title  aud-character  of-the  third  book  you- 
now  have-in-your  possession. 

A.  It-is  called  Minute-Book  Number  1,  of-the  Marshall -County- 
Court,  kept  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge. 

Q.  Please-turn-to  page  fourteen  and-read  the-record  contained 
therein  of-the  naturalization  of  Mr.  Willigrod. 

Witness  reads : 


174  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOKT-HAND. 

UXITED-STATES-OF-AMERICA,  \ 

STATE  OF  IOWA,  MARSHALL-COUNTY.     / 

Be-it  remembered  that-at-a-term  of-the  County-Court  held  in- 
and-for  said-County,  State  of  Iowa,  on-the  26th  day  of-February, 
in-the  year  of-our  Lord,  1850,  was-present  the-Honorable  Wm.  C. 
Smith,  sole-presiding  judge,  and  ex-officio  clerk  of -said  Court, 
when-the  following  among-other  proceedings  were-had,  to  wit: 
Edward  Willigrod,  a-native  of-Germany,  and-at-present  residing 
in-said  State,  appeared  in-open  Court  and-made  application  to-be 
admitted  to-become  a-citizen  of-the  United-States,  and-it  appear- 
ing to-the  satisfaction  of-the  Court  that-he-had  declared  on-oath 
before-the-clcrk  of-the  Marshall-County-Court,  two  years  before- 
his  admission,  that-it-was  bona-fide  his-intention  to-become  a- 
citizen  of-the  United-States  and-to  renounce  forever  all  allegiance 
to  any-other  Prince,  Potentate,  State  or  Sovereignty  whatsoever, 
and-especially  to-the  King-of-Gennany,  to  whom  he-was  hereto- 
fore a-subject;  and-said  applicant  having  declared  on-oath  before- 
this  Court  that-he  will  support  the  Constitution-of-the-United- 
States,  aud-that-be  doth  absolutely  and-entirely  abjure  and- 
renounce  all-allegiance  to  any  foreign  Prince,  Potentate,  State,  or 
Sovereignty  whatsoever,  and-particularly  to  William,  reigning 
King-of-Germany,  to  whom  he-has  hitherto  been-a-subject. 

(Signed;  WM.  C.  SMITH,  County  Judge. 

CROSS-EXAMINATION. 

Q.  What-is-your  official-position  iu-this-county,  Mr.  Johnson? 

A.  I-ain  deputy  County-Clerk. 

Q.  Are-you   deputy   County-Clerk,  or  deputy  County  Auditor? 

A.  I-am  both  at-present. 

Q.  Wheu-wcre-you  appointed  deputy  clerk? 

A.  On-the  luth  of-April,  '83. 

Q.  When  -  did-you-make-the-examination  of  -  Court  -  records 
which-you-liave  referred- to? 

A.  Since  receiving  my  appointment. 

Q.  You  still  retain  your  position  in-the  Auditor's  office? 

A.  Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  much  time  did-you  spend  in-making  this  examination! 


PROFESSIONAL   CONDUCT. 


175 


A.    The-greater  portion  of-the  day  and-also  most  of -the  evenings 
for-t  wo- weeks.  Excused. 

(14  m). 

488. 

FREDERICK  ") 

vs.  V  REBUTTING   EVIDENCE  ox  PART   OF  CONTESTANT. 

WILSON,      j 

Jas.  C.  Cochran,  sworn. 


176  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT  HAND. 

SUGGESTIONS. 


"  HAVE  FAITH  IN  SHORT-HAND.— There  Is  probably  no  other  one  thing- 
thai  has  caused  so  many  people  to  fail  in  their  endeavors  to  become  re- 
porters as  a  lack  of  confidence  in  Short-hand.  Too  often  we  hear  begin- 
ners say.  'I  will  try  it  and  see  whether  I  can  succeed  or  not.'  The  young 
man  or  woman  who,  after  seeing  that  thousands  of  others  have  made  a 
success  of  Short-hand,  cannot  say,  'I  will  succeed,'  had  better  not  spend 
time  or  money  upon  it,  or,  in  fact,  upon  anything  else  that  requires  a  little 
study  and  application. 

•'  Nothing  is  more  absurd  than  to  hear  a  certain  class  of  people  decry- 
ing Short-hand,  when  in  fact  they  know  nothing  at  all  about  it.  We  have 
known  many  young  people  who  would  have  become  excellent  reporters, 
had  they  not  been  induced  to  give  up  the  idea  of  learning  Short-hand  by 
the  advice  of  persons  who  had  never  before  even  heard  of  Stenography. 

"The  young  man  or  woman  who  takes  up  the  study  of  Short-hand  will 
surely  be  compelled  to  endure  the  constant  cry  that  there  is  an  over- 
Eupply.  To  be  sure  there  is  an  'over-supply'  of  Short-hand  writers.  So 
is  there  an  over-supply  of  workmen  in  every  industrial  pursuit;  yet 
people  go  on  learning  the  various  trades  just  as  though  the  cry  had  never 
been  heard.  The  over-supply  comes  from  that  large  class  who  only  do 
things  by  halves.  We  have  all  beard  the  cry  of  an  over-supply  of  law- 
yers, teachers,  carpenters,  blacksmiths,  etc.,  yet  a  good  lawyer,  teacher 
or  carpenter  is  never  at  a  !osa  for  something  to  do.  You  never  hear  of  a 
Tnan  who  stands  well  up  in  his  business  or  profession  making  any  com- 
plaint of  the  competition  which  he  may  have.  People  who  can  do  their 
part  well  are  always  in  demand." 

"The  Stenographer,  like  everybody  else,  must,  in  a  certain  sense,  be  a 
machine.  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  many  cases  confidential  mat- 
ter of  the  gravest  importance  is  dictated  to  him,  and  unless  he 
exerts  the  utmobt  care,  he  will  be  apt,  inadvertently  it  may  be,  to  betray 
a  knowledge  of  his  employer's  affairs  to  those  who  would  take  advantage 
of  it.  Again,  it  frequently  occurs  in  some  kinds  of  business  that  the 
Stenographer  is  approached  for  the  special  purpose  of  getting  him  to 
divulge  his  employer's  intentions  or  plans.  Attempts  may  even  be  made 
to  bribe  him,  in  order  to  secure  the  desired  information.  Aside  from  the 
moral  phase  of  the  question,  the  Stenographer  can  by  no  means  afford  to 
betray  his  employer's  secrets  to  others.  Once  let  it  be  proved  that  he  bus 
done  such  a  thing,  and  his  prospects  as  a  reporter  will  be  ruined." 

— From  "  ONE  HUNDRED  VALUABLE  SUGOESTTONS  TO  SHORT-HAND 

STUDENTS,"  by  tielby  A.  Moran,  Short-Hand Institute,  Michigan  University. 


Vocabulary  of  Word  and  Phrase  Signs. 


A 
an,  and                                                          ' 
able-to                                ,?,...•.  .A 

before,  oh 
—3        before-hand 
.?..!„><  begin,  2  begun,  3  began 

accomplish 
accord-ing-Iy,  creature         *.      c— 
accuracy                                 \          *    \ 

behalf 
.        _         behold,  beheld 
X       \     V^,       belief-ve 

acknowledge                         *J 
acute,  2  acquit 
act-of-Congresa                      f  —7  _f°. 

belong 
^      v      v            beneficial 
P  '   ^          benevolence-ent 

added,  had-it 
advantage                                              . 
advantageous                            ^     £ 

better-than 
s)    r,  <\^__      beyond 
V/                          British-America 

advertise-ed-ment,  had      1 
after,  for-it 
afternoon                               i       C-    ^.y 

brother,  member 
\          but 
"X       (         &         by-the-nrst 

again-and-again 
all                                                     .     V^ 
Almighty                               —  a.-^  * 

calculate 
c  —    —3       call,  equal 
*•  —  1_                         cannot 

already 
America                                 1                     n 
angel                                   %p>>  <^\  / 

capable 
—  _-                          care,  occur 
...  \    <:  —  '..TT*      carel'ul-ly 

any,  In 
appear                                 \_x      \    o 

catholic 
—  i-     s~\     />        celestial 

are 
as,  has                                   _            ^ 

as-has,  as-his,  as-is,              iVY'    °  O 

*            change 
/    .                  '    chapter 
/•~\  ^     TT^.    .   character 

as-soon-as 
as-it-were 
as-well-us                                Q_P     fl    {> 

/      \                     child 
/?   c  .^/^~       Christian-  ity 
,k.           <y              Circulate 

as-great-as                                          | 
astonish-ed-ment                             _) 
at,  out                                    p-£>               i 

circumstance 
o  f  collect 
£                 V^>     combination 

at-all-times                                                / 
at-any-rate 
at-all-its                                              . 
at-it,  It-would,  It-had       «««£"»"«f»—  £« 
at-all-eveots 
at-length                                          .          ,, 
at-once                                *•••••-  ^•'•y* 
at-first 
Baptist                                  J        /       \ 
be-not,  behlod                  "tf  ""o  "    V* 
because                                v     Q 
become                                                \ 

come 
comfort 
,  <")     \_^         commandment 
commencement 
__£—  ^  commercial 
\^_$>--i                      common,  kingdom 

commonwealth 
f^_                    communicate 
5L,    companion 

comprehend 
rv         f\,rx            comprise 
V_^     ^  V-a      compromise 

(177) 


178 


VOCABULARY  OF   WORD  AXD  PHRASE   SIGNS. 


Conception 
concern                                  9      ex       \ 
concession                             \)      V    & 

danger 
_                            dare-not 
/    I"      1             dark,  during 

conclude 
conclusion 
condemnation                                      V~^O 

darkness 
Dear-sir 
1      ?\  <^)i         December 

condescend                               c_-e  —  —  j 
condescension                       III 
condition                                  (^    \£>    (j 

"          '                deficient 
<__             degree,  agree 
L          deliberation 

conduct 
confession                               «         / 
confidence                             L      vD    V^ 

V)      delight 
p       .        1           deliver 
|        «           deuominate-ion 

confidential                                                 0 
confirm                                        .       j- 
congratulate                      ^_  V.        V^c-^ 
congregation                              J 
congress                                          . 
conjunction                        >.L'        7.    °^> 
connection 
conscience                                      .  o  u 
consequence                          <^_^  e' 

deride 
q      o       O            derivative 
X^               derive 

descrloe,  scripture 
g  ~^               description 
1           destruction 

0         determination 
determine 
L        L    J           develop-ment 

consideration 
consistent                                 q         Q 
consonant                                  (j     ^    q  ^, 

\j     (J    ^        did 
1        |         -           did-not 
(/         differ-ed-ence-ent 

constantly 
Constitution  of-the  U.S.               „         _ 
construction                              J3    (j^O  (t 

difflcult-y 
dignity 
c  (  L         disadvantage 

consume 
contact 
contain                                                  |  J 

'/            disagree 
disappear 
(  J      L              disconnect 

contempt                                  <T~N 
content,  contained 
continual-ly                               L       j    /, 

\    '         ""    discontent 
discontinue 
LI         r_^            dissatisfaction 

contrary                                                        ^ 
contrivance 
controversy                               'T/  'I       1 

'U"r      fj"**"    do-not 
W    \Jf>           doctor 
•        /       J           doctrine,  3  darken 

convince                                                        ) 
correct                                          I         (  c 
cownterchange                     •""  "  — 

Court-of-Justice 
cross-examination                   7            ./•  —  \ 

domestic 
|     f                        downward 

'j—  •••     during,  dark 
F            each,  wateh 
/       7           each-are 

cure                                               y 
curious 

•••*fc-  «*•««!»«•«••• 

s*    -j      ^/)         evt-and-west 
O      ^*L   ^               pattern,  historian 

VOCABULARY  OK  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


179 


TSffi'cient                                         . 
electric-ity                         f      //**  /"*?_ 

j*     _            Gentleman,  1  gentlemen 
jj    f^                Gentlemen-of-the-Jury 

enlarge 
equal,  call                            >_—   c  —     ) 

give 
give-it 

e_,  '   f*       glory-fy 

essential-ly                         . 
establish-ed-ment                )          -j 

good-and-bad 
_.->   <H\        govern-ed-ment 

European                                         .         ^^, 
ever-anrt-ever                                 V    {j~ 

.^                     greater-  than 
t^S    ,-,0               great-extent 

every-one 
examination                          «*\       ^-^  —f 

had,  advertisement 
had-not 

expect 
experience                              —  *      <\  —  <? 

hand 
hand-ln-hand 

expression                              a 
extemporaneous                      \)  —  P      A 

happiness 
happy,  hope 

extraordinary 
fact,  future                            •  **       \(~\ 

hardware 

.,      C     has'  "^ 

faithful 
falsehood                                  ,      i  /~t\  , 
familiar                                ...Vjs.Sr.  .I.>O, 
fear-of-God                                 V 
feature,  if-it                             /•        C 
tirst                                             X.            /^ 

have-It 
have-not 
.S-.1..SV?,  have-had 
*-        he 

^     sj-        \     health-y 
£       1  C.              hear,  her,  here 

follow 
for                                             ^ 
for-the-most-part                     —    L^  ^~>\ 

heart 
y         heaven 
.-\      Vo         /        height 

for-instauce 
forgive 
forsake,  for-the-sake-of      (.    c\__  C0 

help 
hence 
^\          o    ..         heretofore 

forward                                   £ 
from 
from-it,  effort                           (       o\     ^>. 
full                                         ..^f.J....i.. 

function 
future,  fact                              P     ( 

JXL       hesitate 
s*\     high,  l,  eye 
\       V  V         highly 

"['"'                  '"  highway,  Iowa 
him 
^                 °      his,  is 

gave-it                                               ^irs  ,^- 
general-ly 
generation                                          f    / 

hie-is,  is-his,  is-a» 
x-j     -s^^"            history 
_        hold,  held 

180 


VOCABULARY  OP  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


Holiness 

home 

honorable 

hope,  happy 

how 

however 

howsoever 
human-life 

humble 

humor 
hundred 

I,  eye,  high 

idea 

if,  off 

illegible 
imagine 
iininediate-ly 

importance-ant 

impossible 

improves-ments 

inacurate 

in-the-world 

in-the-second-place 

in-regard-to 

in-point-of-fact 

iu-urder-that 

in-seeming 

in-his-usual 

in-his-expression 

in-his-experience 
in-his-description 
in-cousideration 

in-as-many 

in-some 

in-liis-situation 

in-respeot-to 

in-rei'erunce-to 

m-order-to 

in-his-secret 

inclination, 

income 

incompetent 
inconsistent 
inconvenience 


1  <- 


61 


^ 
U 


^if.^:. 


Indian-Territory 

individual 

infinite 

influence 

influential 

information 

Injunction 
inquire-y,  anywhere 
insigmncance-ant 

intellect-ual 
intelligence 
intelligent 

into,  3  unite 

invention 

irregular 

is,  his 
is-said 
is-safe 
is-such 
is-seen 
island,  I-will-not 

it-would-have,  out-of 
it-will-have,  twelve 
it-is-sitnply 

it-ought-not 
\j  it-not 

J  it-ought-to-have-had 

it-will-not 
it-wou  Id-have-had 
it-would,  it-had 


it-ought-to-have 
it-would-not,   it-had-no* 
it-wlll-huve-Uad 

January 

Jesus-Christ 

junior 

Justice-of-the-Peace 

just-had 

kiiigdom-of-heaven 

knowledge 

ladies-aad-gentlemen 

landlord 

language 

large 

larger-than 


VOCABULARY  OF  WOKD  AND  PUUASK  SIGNS. 


181 


lawyer                                     X-N     x- 
lead                                     /                /7 

North-western 
r-^^'  Y'x^-s     notwithstanding 

legible 
liberty-of-the-people          <\      (\       ~) 
liberty-of-the-press               \        TV 

"*  November 
now 
^^--s  v-<//rs.          nowhere 

Lord  -Jesus-Christ 
loves-us                                   (2—  /^o^>— 

object 
\      \,       V\       objective 

magnetism 
in.-ijoty                                     x-x___"x>'    ^ 

/          occur 
c  s      ^        of 

manner,  3  owner 
manuscript                            ^^  X^S~A 

«          on 
n       c/          on-the-other-hand 

may-be,  improvement 
member,  remember                     <\    i\     n 

on-the-one-hand 
one 

member-of-the-bar 
member-of-the-Leg.              f\    c\/7  <r~> 

one-of-the-most 
**^      one-or-two 

minority 
misconduct                              x"^-'     "fj'^  — 

opinion 
^~^     _                    opportunity 

more,  mercy 
more-tlian                               j.-    c-_ 

organize 
—  ""  —  <5                 organization 

mostly,  may-as-well 
most-likely                             ^^-xc_£^ 

,                       ought 
'     [/                     ought-to-have 

much 
much-are 

our-own 

c>^                     OUt-Of 

must-be 
mystery                                             —^^ 
natural                                  s  ^2w             V 

-"         overwhelm 
rv_^~v                   part-y 

neglect                                            '          ' 
negligent                                                   ^_j» 
neighborhood                       «iSi^^?ii7:.-.J. 
never 
New-York-City 
New-Hampshire                 ..^^.jTe^—  *~\ 

next 
nor,  near,  honor                            ^*«^~\_ 
fiforth-Amnricft                   ^£...., 

particular-ly 
<K     .           ^        peculiar-ity 
^....../Virr.w.X..  people 
people-of-God 
r>       'V.  *\  N      perfect 
k.*:.  ...........  Perfection 

^        philanthropy 
0        /          ^>        phonography 
•  ••??...;£....,   .     plaintiff 

182 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AXD  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


poverty 
practicable 
practice-a  I 

principle-al 
probable-ly 
profit,  prophet 

proof,  prove 

proper-ty 

prosperity 

Providence 
providential 
public-ish-ed 

punish-ed-mant 

quality 

question 

quick 
quiet 
railroad 

railway-car 

rather-than 

reality 

real-ly,  rely 

recollect 

recompense 

reconsider 

reduction 

reform 

reformation 

regular 

reliable 

religion 

religious 

relinquish 

remark-able,  Mr. 

re-member 

represent 

representation 

republic 

respect-able 


respectability 

revelation 

revolution 

rule,  2  roll 

said-to-have 

salvation 

sanction 

scripture,  describe 
second 

secure 
senior 
set-off,  set-forth 

several,  Savior 

shall 

Short-hand 


South-America 
speak,  speech 
special,  spoke 

spirit, 

spoken 

square 

streng'.h 

student 

subject 

subjection 

substantial 

such-a-one 

such-are 
such-were 

such-were-not 

Buch-ought-to-have-had 

sueh-would-have-htd 

sufficient 
suggestion 
surprise,  3  suppres* 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


183 


Takes-us 

temperance-ate 

temptation 

territory 

Testament 

testimony 

thank,  oath,  youth 

that 

the 

their,  there,  they-are 

t -iciu,  they 

therefore 

they-will 

they-are-not 

thing 

think 

this-is,  themselves 

this-system 

those,  thus 
though,  thou 
three,  3  through 

to 

to-be 
together 

too,  two 

true 

truth 

try-to-have 

twelve 

unaware 

uncommon 

unconscious 

under 

understand 

union 

unite-y 

United-States 

universal 

university 

unless 

until 

until-it 

upon-it 
upon-hia 
us.  use 


't- 


L..C. 


0 


usual-ly 

virtue 
"  was 

watch,  each 

water 
•••  we 

we-are 
we-are-not 
•- •    we-will,  while 

we-may 
we-may-be 
...    we-rnust 

welcome 
well,  3  awhile 
...    what 


</ 

.....</, 

t/ 


whatever 

when 

whensoever 

where,  ">  aware 

wherefore 

which 

which-ever,  which,  bare 
/         a  which  will-not 

f. ,..../-.      which-would-have 

/> 

which-ought-not 

which-not 

which-  w'd  (or  had)  not 

which-are 

which-are-not 

which-ought-to-have 

which-were-not 
which-will-have 
while,  we-will 

white 

who 

whoever,  who-have 

whole 

whom,  home 
whose,  use 

will 

will-not 

wisdom 

wish,  3  issue 

with 

with-regard-to 


y 


.£. 


s~ 


184 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


With-hlm,  1  wlth-me 

with-reierence-to 

with-respect-to 

within,  heathen 

without 

witness 

word,  heard 

Word-of-God 

world 


n" 
... 


worship 

would 

ye,  year-« 

yesterday 

yet 

young 

young-man 

young-woman 

yourself. 


ADDENDA. 


Children 
nevertneiess. 


.£ 


will  (noun) 
--  Yours-trnly. 


satisfactory 

satisfy 

south-eastern 


was-thore 
t'or-there 
may-there 


Instruction 
instructive 
English- 

'inguage 


just-as-much- 

a* 

ust-as-wcll-as 
n-the-flrst- 

placc 


whether 

have-there 

further-tlian 


VERBATIM   REPORTING  SPEED. 

It  will  be  the  wish  of  some,  after  completing  the  prescribed 
course,  to  continue  the  study  with  the  view  of  gaining  the 
speed  necessary  to  record  rapid  speeches.  Whether  it  is  your 
intention  or  not  to  engage  in  verbatim  reporting,  the  deter- 
mination of  reaching  the  highest  degree  of  skill  you  are  able, 
is  commendable.  Your  fitness  for  success  in  the  higher 
branches  of  the  stenographic  profession  can  be  decided  upon 
when  you  have  finished  the  principles.  To  furnish  a  few 
explicit  rules  to  guide  you  in  pursuing  an  advanced  course 
is  the  object  of  these  paragraphs.  A  few  months'  service  as 
short-hand  amanuensis,  especially  if  a  situation  as  assistant 
to  a  professional  stenographer  can  be  secured,  is  recommended 
as  a  very  valuable  means  to  the  end  sought. 

As  matter  for  dictation  you  should  select  newspaper 
articles,  sermons,  speeches,  reports  of  law-suits,  and  the 
proceedings  of  legislatures  and  conventions;  also  biographies, 
histories,  or  any  publication  in  which  the  ordinary  phrase- 
ology of  public  or  private  discourse  is  employed.  Volumes 
of  business  letters,  and  law  and  association  reports  printed 
from  stenographic  notes,  have  been  published  for  the  use  of 
advanced  students.  Copies  may  be  bad  by  applying  to  the 
Reporters'  Bureau. 

Your  dictation  practice  should  be  daily  and  systematic. 
The  person  who  reads  should  be  instructed  to  pronounce 
the  sentences  after  the  manner  of  public  speakers,  and  not 
slowly  drawl  out  the  words  to  suit  your  pen.  A  pause  at  the 
end  of  a  clause  or  sentence  may  be  made  for  your  benefit. 
In  this  way  the  power  will  be  cultivated  of  recollecting  long 
sentences  until  you  have  written  them.  This  kind  of  mem- 
ory, called  verbal,  is  altogether  indispensible  to  the  verbatim 
reporter.  Not  only  can  the  stenographer  more  easily  follow 
a  public  speaker  by  keeping  several  words  behind  him,  but, 
since  public  orators  often,  when  least  expected,  deliver  two 
or  three  sentences  in  rapid  succession,  memory  as  well  as 
speed  is  needed  by  the  reporter. 

At  this  point  you  may  try  your  hand  at  taking  down  public 
lectures,  sermons,  etc.,  selecting  of  course  the  most  delib- 


186  VEUBATL5I   UErOKTING  SPEED. 

erate  speakers.  It  will  not  be  possible  to  get  every  word  at 
first.  The  proper  course  is  to  write  whole  sentences  rather 
than  merely  words  here  and  there  as  they  may  be  caught. 
The  notes  thus  taken  should  be  read  afterwards,  and  occa- 
sionally a  carefully  written  transcript  ought  to  be  made, 
correctly  spelled  and  punctuated.  Pen  and  ink  should  be 
used,  and  a  writing  table  provided  whenever  practicable. 

One  cannot  condemn  too  severely  the  habit  of  some  mis- 
guided students  of  practicing  npon  speakers  so  fluent  that 
efforts  to  follow  are  all  in  vain,  getting  the  heads  of  some 
sentences  only  and  the  tails  of  others,  in  hieroglyphics  so 
deformed  as  to  bo  utterly  undecipherable. 

The  reporting  of  speeches  may  be  supplemented  by  occa- 
sional practice  in  taking  down  the  testimony  of  witnesses, 
and  the  other  proceedings  had  in  trials  at  court,  before 
magistrates,  or  the  evidence  given  before  notaries.  The  form 
of  report  made  use  of  in  law-suits  may  be  employed  also  in 
taking  down  conversations. 

A  good  plan  is  now  and  then  to  take  letters  and  other 
papers  for  the  accommodation  of  persons  who  will  afterwards 
examine  and  criticise  your  transcripts.  During  this  period 
a  frequent  correspondence  in  short-hand  with  other  students 
eq-'.a'ly  advanced  will  prove  valuable.  It  will  be  a  serious 
mistake  if  you  s^ek  to  go  over  a  great  deal  of  ground  at  the 
expense  of  thoroughness  of  work.  Leave  no  selection  until 
you  have  written  it  half  a  dozen  times  and  read  it  over  at 
least  twice. 


The  Reporting  Style  of  Short-Hand. 

The  very  latest  and  most  improved  text-book  of  stenography.  The  Report- 
ing Style  of  the  American  Pitman  System  is  taught,  the  method  now  employ- 
ed by  nine-tenths  of  the  professional  reporters.  The  subject  is  so  clearly  and! 
logically  presented  that  no  one  can  fail  to  understand  it.  This  work  unques- 
tionably possesses  the  following  points  of  superiority: 

1.  The  Corresponding  Style  is  discarded,  which  greatly  facilitates  the  ac- 
quirement of  the  art. 

2.  The  learner  is  instructed  how  to  execute  the  characters  rapidly,  and 
given  such  assistance  as  will  enable  him  to  become  practically  efficient. 

3.  No  word  is  introduced  until  every  principle  has  been  explained  upon 
which  the  formation  of  its  most  approved  outline  depends. 

4.  The  course  of  instruction  is  distinctively  progressive,  and  overy  lesson 
accompanied  with  appropriate  reading  and  writing  exercises. 

5.  Word  and  phrase  signs  are  introduced  early  in  the  course. 

6.  A  series  of  lessons  are  added  on  professional  reporting,  such  as  are 
found  in  no  oilier  text-book  whatever. 


COMMENDATIONS. 


THE     "REPORTING     STYLE." 

A  thoroughly  practical  instruction  book. — HOME  AND  SCHOOL  VISITOR, 
Greenfield,  Ind. 

This  is  a  brief,  simple  and  satisfactory  treatise'. — SCHOOL  BULLETIN,  Syra- 
cuse, New  York. 

In  many  respects  the  best  work  on  Phonography  that  has  appeared  for  sev- 
eral years.— D.  P.  LINDSLEY,  Inventor  of  Takigraphy. 

A  complete  and  systematic  treatise  on  Stenography  and  the  reporting  busi- 
ness.—THE  TEACBEU,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Contains  all  that  is  of  value  in  qualifying  the  learner  for  practical  report- 
ing.— THE  NOKMAL  TEACHKB,  Danville,  Ind. 

This  book  teaches  the  Pitman  style  of  reporting  direct,  discarding  the  cor- 
responding stylo.  It  is  a  brief,  simple  and  satisfactory  treatise. — STATI:  EDU- 
CATIONAL JOUUNAL,  Syracuse,  X.  Y. 

A  systematic  series  of  lessons  that  will  110  doubt  prove  very  acceptable  to 
both  instructors  and  pupils  as  a  text-book,  and  will  be  found  particularly  use- 
ful to  those  who  are  undergoing  a  course  of  self-instruction. — CHICAGO  EVEN- 
IM;  .Ji.iiT.NAi.. 

The  character  of  the  work  is  aptly  described  by  its  title,  and  it  possesses  the 
great  merit  of  clearly  presenting  the  reporting  style  of  the  American  Pitman 
System,  divested  of  that  useless  appendage,  the  Corresponding  Style,  so-called. 

[190] 


University  School  of  Short-Hand, 

Full  course  given  in  the  Reporting  Style.  Young  ladies  and  gentlemen 
prepared  for  secretaryships  in  four  months.  Sessions  continue  throughout 
the  year.  Pupils  may  enter  at  any  time.  The  various  kinds  of  Type-writers 
are  taught  by  an  experieuced  operator.  No  assistants  employed  who  are  not 
practical  reporters. 

A  few  of  its  graduates  are  referred  to :  W.  A.  Shepf er,  with  Yanz,  Griggs  & 
Howes,  St.  Paul,.  Minn.;  Alberto  A.  Ladd,  with  Gen'l  Mngr.  C.  M.  &St.  P.  Ry., 
Milwaukee,  Wis. ;  Marion  Grayson,  with  the  Conn.  Ins.  Co.,  Hartford,  Conn.; 
Isaac  W.  Bennett,  Instructor,  Walla  Walla,  Wash.  Ter. ;  Coralie  S.  Roth,  with 
Singer  Mnfg.  Co.,  New  Orleans,  La. ;  Bessie  Gardner,  with  Fire  and  Marine 
Ins.  Co.,  St.  Paul,  Minn.;  Ralph  W.  Miller,  Stenographer,  Kansas  City,  Mo.; 
Agnes  Lord,  with  the  "School  of  Expression,"  Boston,  Mass. :  Noyes  W.  Wil- 
let,  Court  Reporter,  Rapid  City,  Dak. ;  Mira  E.  Morgan,  Stenographer,  Santa 
Barbara,  Cal. ;  J.  G.  Dixon,  Court  Reporter,  Boulder,  Col  ;  Ed.  W.  Dobson, 
with  Childers  &  Fergusson,  Albuquerque,  N.  M. ;  Jno.  M.  Lackey,  Court  Re- 
porter, Montgomery,  Ala.;  Horace  L.  Winslow,  Stenographic  Instructor, 
Newton.  Iowa. 


TERMS: 

Full  Course  in  Stenography  at  the  School  $4000 

Full  Course  by  Mail,  Fifty  Lessons 2000 

Type-writer  Instruction  by  Mail,  or  at  the  School    1000 

Orthography,  Full  Course  by  Mail  ....          590 


THE  REPORTERS'  BUREAU 

Assists  graduates  in  obtaining  situations.  The  Manager  is  often  able  to  se- 
cure a  position  in  whatever  location  the  student  wishes  to  live.  This  Bureau 
was  established  for  the  sole  purpose  of  assisting  the  students  whom  we  ourselves 
instruct,  and  for  whose  qualifications  we  can  vouch.  Since  we  present  the 
names  of  our  own  students  only,  whose  skill  we  are  able  to  certify  to,  busi- 
ness  men  give  credit  to  our  recommendations,  and  often  employ  our  gradu- 
ate outright,  without  the  usual  preliminary  trial  month. 

Over  four  hundred  young  men  and  women  who  have  graduated  from  the 
School  of  Short-Hand  are  now  occupying  lucrative  situations  in  all  the  prin- 
cipal cities. 


Perfected  Method  of  Postal  Instruction, 

The  most  thorough  plan  ever  contrived  of  teaching  Short-hand   by  mail. 
Some  of  the  features  which  recommend  it  are: 

1.  A  system  of  writing  can  be  taught  by  mail  far  more  successfully  than 
any  other  art  or  science. 

2.  The  student  runs  no  risk— is  not  obliged  to  leave  home  or  give  up  his 
business.  [188] 


PERFECTED  METHOD  OF  POSTAL   INSTRUCTION. 

3.  Lessons  are  received  at  whatever  intervals  are  most  convenient. 

4.  Corrected  exercises  are  invariably  sent  back  by  reiurn  mail. 

5.  Lessons  are  carried  in  the  pocket  and  learned  at  leisure  moments. 

6.  Traveling  does  not  interfere  in  tlie  least  with  this  method  of  teacnlng. 

7.  Short  hand  is  best  U-arned  by  devoting  to  it  only  a  fraction  of  one's  time 
daily,  a  plan  suited  to  the  convenience  of  busy  people,  who  have  most  occa- 
sion to  use  a  brief  system  of  writing. 

8.  Students  are  required  to  write  and  read  the  exercises  with  gradually  in- 
Creased  speed.    This  is  the  only  certain  way  of  gaining  proficiency  iu  a  short 
space  of  time. 

9.  No^only  is  the  art  thoroughly  taught,  but  full  directions  are  given  as  to 
its  use  in  the  business  of  Amanuensis,  Court,  and   Legislative   reporting,  etc. 

10.  The  intelligent  student  can  as  certainly  learn  by  this  means  as  by 
attending  college,  and  with  but  a  fraction  of  the  expense. 

11.  By  the  use  of  a  series  of  Circulators,  students  communicate  with  each 
other,  beC'Mie  :r.>qn:itntc  I.  and  a  friendly  competition  is  established. 

12.  Lessons  may  be  received  daily,  although  the  student  lives  thousands  of 
miles  distant. 

13.  A  full  course  in  Orthography  is  also  given  by  mail  for  the  accommoda- 
tion of  those  who  wish  to  perfect  themselves  in  this  branch. 

14.  The  use  of  the  Type-writer,  the  usual  accompaniment  of  short-hand,  is 
also  taught  by  mail. 

15.  Local  Classes  are  formed,  and  meet  for  practice  every  week  under  the 
direction  of  a  competent  drill-master. 


TESTIMONIALS. 

I  have  mastered  short-hand  in  six  months,  taking  lessons  by  mail.  I  have 
thus  acquired  a  paying  business  at  leisure  hours  that  would  otherwise  have 
been  wasted.— W.  H.  JKNKINS,  Swan  Lake,  la. 

While  trying  to  learn  by  means  of  self-instruction,  I  went  astray  a  thousand 
times.  I  find  this  method  entirely  satisfactory,  and  especially  serviceable  to 
me,  as  I  am  allowed  toreeeive  lessons  slowly  at  times  when  pressed  with, 
other  work. — REV.  W.  C.  MADISON,  Grand  Junction.  Col. 

I  do  not  see  how  it  would  be  possible  to  make  the  Course  more  complete  or 
interest.ng.  I  find  the  lessons  entirely  satisfactory,  and  sincerely  believe  that 
<i'-y  fi'  win  can  become  a  proficient  stenographer  by  this  means,  if  he  is  capa- 
ble of  learning  at  all.— T.  J.  ROL.LMAN,  Superintendent  Public  Schools,  Brook- 
ville,  Kansas. 

By  means  of  this  plan  I  have  been  able  to  learn  short-hand,  devoting  to  it 
only  my  leisure  moments.  I  cannot  recommend  it  too  highly. — HATTIE 
LEWIS,  Stenographer  to  the  Homestead  Pub.  Co.,  Des  Moines,  la 

I  can  now  write  very  rapidly,  and  what  is  equally  important,  rend  what  is 
written.  I  learned  entirely  by  mail,  and  at  a  trilling  expense.  Prof  Moran's 
scheme  of  postal  instruction  is  simply  unparalleled— nothing  could  be  better. 
I  have  examined  various  text  books,  but  his  instruction  book  on  the  Report- 
ing Style,  which  is  the  basis  of  this  plan,  is  the  most  free  from  useless  matter, 
clearest,  the  most  concise,  and  best  arranged  of  all.— CYRUS  W.  PHBLPS,  Sten- 
ographer, Marshalltown,  Iowa. 

TRIAL  LESSON  FREE. 
[189] 


THE  NEW  ENGLAND 

SHORT-HAND  AND  HPE-WRITING  SCHOOL 


ALSO 


GENERAL   STENOGRAPHIC  AND  TYPE- 
WRITING SUPPLY  AGENCY. 


S.  G.  GREENWOOD,  Principal. 


INSTRUCTION  BY  MAIL  A  SPECIALTY. 

TEIAL  LESSONS  FREE. 

PERIODICALS.— All  the  leading  Magizines,  both  domestic  and 
foreign.  Sample  copies  furnished  and  subscriptions  solicited. 

TEXT-BOOKS.— Our  stock  contains  the  text-books  of  all  the 
standard  Short-hand  systems,  both  foreign  and  domestic. 

TYPE-WRITER  SUPPLIES.— We  have  in  stock  at  all  times  a 
complete  line  of  Type-writer  Paper,  Ribbons,  Carbons,  Instruc- 
tion Books,  etc.  Samples  furnished  if  desired. 

TYPE- WRITER  MACHINES.— We  buy,  sell  and  rent  any  of  the 

standard  Machines  in  any  part  of  the  United  States. 

STENOGRAPHER'S  SUPPLIFS.— This  department,  we  claim,  is 
as  full  and  complete  as  any  in  the  world,  and  we  are  constantly 
adding  to  it,  having  standing  orders  with  all  the  Publishers  and 
Manufactories  in  this  country  and  Europe.  Nothing  new  es- 
capes us. 

GENERAL  SUPPLIES.— We  also  carry  in  stock  a  large  assort- 
ment of  new  and  interesting  books  on  self-help  and  home 
culture,  as  well  as  a  full  line  of  Stationery,  also  Office  and 
Library  Furniture  in  a  large  variety. 

Send  two  cent  stamp  for  Illustrated  Cotalogue.    Remit  by 
postal  note  or  money  order. 

Address     S.  G.  GREENWOOD, 

33  Pemberton  Sq.,  Boston,  Mass. 


NATIONAL  SYSTEM 

Co-Operative  Schools  of  Short-Hand, 


THE  FOLLOWING  SCHOOLS  ARE  RECOMMENDED  AS  WELL  EQUIPPED 

CORRESPONDENCE  SCHOOLS,  MAKING  USE  OF  THE  PERFECTED 

POSTAL  METHOD,  PATENTED  BY  ELDON  MORAN. 

McGILVRA  COLLEGE  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
McGilvra  Bros.,  Proprietors,  Richmond,  Va. 

SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
Icaac  W.  1'ennett,  Principal,  Walla  Walla,  Washington  Ter. 

THE  EXCELSIOR  COLLEGE, 

Wilrnot  &  Moore,  Proprietors,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 

THE  IOWA  CITY  SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
Geo.  S.  Forest,  Principal,  Iowa  City,  Iowa. 

THE    NEW    ENGLAND    SCHOOL    OF    SHORT-HAND, 

S.  G.  Greenwood,  Principal,  33  Pernberton  Sq.,  Boston,  Mass. 

THE  INDIANAPOLIS  SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
J.  A.  Duthie.  Principal,  Vance  Block,  Indianapolis.  Ind. 

SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
Jno.  H.  Goldman,  Principal,  Columbia,  Mo. 

CORRESPONDENCE    SCHOOL, 
J.  G.  Dixon,  Principal,  Manhattan,  Kansas. 

THE  OHIO  SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 

Geo.  Fritz,  Principal,  Ottawa,  Ohio. 

THE  NEW  JERSEY  SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND, 
H.  W.  Smith,  Principal,  103  Ward  Street,  Patterson,  N.  J. 


Stenographic  Supply   Agency, 

IOWA   CITY,  IOWA. 

Depot   for   Short-Hand  and  Type-Writer    Students'   Material 
and  General  Stenographic  and  Reporters'  Supplies. 


The  ELDON  MORAN  Series  of  Short-Hand  Works : 

THE  REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND. 

Price,  $1.50.  The  latest  aud  most  complete  Text-book  of  American 
Phonography.  Fifth  edition  now  selling.  Revised  edition  in  preparation. 
This  is  the  most  popular  text-book  for  self-instruction  of  any  published. 

THE  SIGN-BOOK. 

Price,  IScts.  A  vest-pocket  manual  of  all  the  abbreviations,  word  and 
phrase  signs  used  in  the  Pitman  System,  designed  as  an  accompaniment 
of  the  "  Reporting  Stylo.'' 

THE  MANUAL  OP  POSTAL  INSTRUCTION. 

Price,  25cts.  A  complete  guide  of  Correspondence  Teaching.  It  should  be 
i'.i  the  hands  of  every  person  vho  intends  to  learn  Short-hand,  Type-writing 
or  Orthography  by  mail.  Third  edition. 

TEST-LESSON  BOOK. 

Twenty-four  pages,  price,  acts.  The  test-iessons  are  so  arranged  and  the 
necessary  tests  so  applied  in  this  ingenious  little  book,  that  any  person  may, 
by  means  of  it,  determine  accurately  the  degree  of  fitness  or  aptitude  they 
naturally  possess  for  success  in  the  business  of  Short-hand  and  Type- writing. 
Twenty-three  editions  of  this  little  work  have  already  been  published.  All 
persons  interested  in  Short-hand  should  procure  a  copy  without  delay. 

100  VALUABLE  SUGGESTIONS  TO  SHORT-HAND  STUDENTS. 

By  Selby  A.  .Moran,  Principal  Stenographic  Institute,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich. 
Price,  §1.00.  The  degree  of  popularity  with  which  trrs  book  has  beeii  re- 
ceived is  indicated  by  tlie  fact  tnat  one  thousand  copies  were  soid  within 
the  first  year.  It  is  a  guide  to  the  Reporting  Business,  the  matter  being  ar- 
ranged in  the  form  of  a  dictation  book ;  so  it  is  valuable  for  both  teacher  aud 
pupil. 

STUDENTS'  PRACTICE  TABLETS.— 2  for  25cts. 

REPORTERS'  NOTE  BOOK— Price  25cts. 

THE  UNION  READING  CIRCLE. 

Subscription  per  year,  $1.00.  A  Literary  Journal.  Stenographic  Depart- 
ment edited  by  Eldon  Moran.  Sample  copies,  lOcts. 

Agents  wauled  everywhere.    Liberal  discount  to  teachers.    Informfltion  fur- 
nished upon  application.    Address  all  orders  to 

STENOGRAPHIC  SUPPLY  AUKNCY,  Iowa  City,  Iowa. 


1_J1>1  V  i.i\.OA  A  i     \_/±     v*rv.L>AJL\_/ AVIDIA./!.    j^j.jjrvnx\.  x 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)4  14 


UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY 


A     000  583  833     9 


M793r 
1887 


